目犍连所述疏解五论。巴利
Moggallāna vuttivivaraṇapañcikā.
Saddhamiddhaguṇaṃ 萨度,礼敬 tathāgataṃ,
我将宣说正法与僧,以及 māgadhaṃ 的音声特征。巴利
Saddhamiddhaguṇaṃ sādhu namassitvā tathāgataṃ, Sadhammasaṅghaṃ bhāsissaṃ māgadhaṃ saddalakkhaṇaṃ.
以“a”等字母为始、以随韵为终,此四十三字名为“字母”,即:a、ā、i、ī、u、ū、e、ai、o、au、ka、kha、ga、gha、ṅa、ca、cha、ja、jha、ña、ṭa、ṭha、ḍa、ḍha、ṇa、ta、tha、da、dha、na、pa、pha、ba、bha、ma、ya、ra、la、va、sa、ha、ḷa、aṃ。由此可知,“ño nama vaṇṇe”(此规则被称为“字母”之名)有何作用。而“四十三”之说则显示了某处字母之省略;由此,“paṭisaṅkhāyoni soti”等词形得以成立。巴利
Akārādayo niggahītantā tecattālīsakkharā vaṇṇā nāma honti, a ā i ī u ū e ऐ o औ ka kha ga gha ṅa ca cha ja jha ña ṭa ṭha ḍa ḍha ṇa ta tha da dha na pa pha ba bha ma ya ra la va sa ha ḷa aṃ; tena kvattho ‘‘ñonama vaṇṇe‘‘. titālīsāti vacanaṃ katthavi vaṇṇalopaṃ ñāpeti; tena-paṭisaṅkhāyoni soti-ādi siddhaṃ.
以十音为首者为元音——巴利
Dasādo sarā-.
其中,最初的十个字母称为“元音”;由此,“元音在元音前脱落”等规则的意义便得以阐明。巴利
Tatthādimhi dasa vaṇṇā sarā nāma honti; tena kvattho ‘‘saro lopo sare‘‘. ccādi.
每二者为同音组——巴利
Dvedve savaṇṇā-.
在这些元音中,每两个元音称为“同类音”;因此,“依音色而同类音”等规则的用意得以说明。巴利
Tesu dvedve sarā savaṇṇā nāma honti; tena kvattho ‘‘vaṇṇapareṇa savaṇṇopi‘‘
1 其中,每两个 sarā 名为 savaṇṇā;由此有何用途?“vaṇṇapareṇa savaṇṇopi”。巴利
1.2.
此两者中,凡为前者,即称为短音;其中,e、o 在复合辅音前即视为前者;由此有何用?“或为短音”等。巴利
Tesu dvīsu yo yo pubbo so so rassasañño hoti; tesu e o saṃyogato pubbāva dissanti; tena kvattho ‘‘rasso ve‘‘.ccādi.
就在那两个之中,凡是在后者,它即成为 dīghasañño;由此何用?‘yolopanisu dīgho’等。巴利
Tesveva dvīsu yo yo paro so so dīghasañño hoti; tena kvattho’yolopanisu dīgho‘‘.ccādi.
Kādayo 是辅音——。巴利
Kādayo byajanā-.
以 k 音等为始、以 niggahīta 为终的音,是辅音之想;由此有何用?“于辅音中,有长音与短音”等。巴利
Kakārādayo vaṇṇā niggahītapariyantā byajanasaññā honti; tena kvattho ‘‘byajane dīgharassā‘‘.ccādi.
“五种五类”者,共有五组。巴利
Pañca pañcakā vaggā-.
以 k 等音为首的、各为五种五音之组,称为“组”;此有何作用?“于组中,组末之音”等。巴利
Kādayo pañcakā pañca vaggā nāma hontī; tena kvattho ‘‘vagge vagganto‘‘. ccādi.
“点”即为随韵。巴利
Bindu niggahītaṃ-.
凡于字母中仅如点量者,彼名为niggahīta;由此有何用?“niggahītami”等;作重音想,是为了有实义想。巴利
Yvāyaṃ vaṇṇe bindumatto so niggahītasañño hoti; tena kvattho ‘‘niggahītami‘‘. ccādi; garusaññā karaṇaṃ anvatthasaññatthaṃ.
位于名词末尾的 i 音与 u 音,称为 jjhalā。巴利
Iyuvaṇṇā jjhalā nāmassante-.
名词称为语基;位于语基末尾的ivaṇṇuvaṇṇā,随其次第而得jhalasaññā之称;由此有何用?“jhalā ve”。等。巴利
Nāmaṃ pāṭipadikaṃ tassa ante vattamānā ivaṇṇuvaṇṇā jhalasaññā honti yathākkamaṃ; tena kvattho‘‘jhalā ve‘‘. Ccādi.
于 pitthi 之后——巴利
Pitthiyaṃ-.
于阴性中,处于名词末尾的ivaṇṇu vaṇṇā(即i、u类音)称为pa;由此有何用?“ye passivaṇṇassa”。如是等。巴利
Itthiyaṃ vattamānassa nāmassante vattamānā ivaṇṇu vaṇṇā pasaññā honti; tena kvatthā ‘‘ye passivaṇṇassa‘‘. Iccādi.
于阴性中现存的、名词末尾现存的 ākāra 可成为 gha 及 ña 等;由此有何义?“ghabrahmādite”。Ccādi。巴利
Itthiyaṃ vattamānassa nāmassante vattamāno ākāro ghasañeññā hoti; tena kvattho ‘‘ghabrahmādite‘‘.Ccādi.
在呼格中,go 的 si——巴利
Gosyālapane-.
在呼唤格中,si 是 gasañño〔ga 标记〕;那有什么用呢?以“ge ve”等为始。巴利
Ālapane si gasañño hoti; tena kvattho ‘‘ge ve‘‘.Ccādi.
规则的差别至此结束——巴利
Vidhibbisesanantassa-.
凡区别词,应知以彼为结尾者之规则;“ato yonaṃ ṭāṭe”。narā nare。巴利
Yaṃ visesanaṃ tadantassa vidhi ñātabbo; ‘‘ato yonaṃ ṭāṭe‘‘. Narā nare.
于第七格时,前(一音)——。巴利
Sattamiyaṃ pubbassa-.
于第七格解说中,应知唯前者的作用;“saro lopo sare”。veḷaggaṃ;此处为何不成 tamahaṃ;依止于音声间者,在那里即说“唯前者有,非后者”。巴利
Sattamīniddese pubbasseva kāriyaṃ ñatabbaṃ; ‘‘saro lopo sare‘‘. Veḷaggaṃ; tamahantīdha kasmā na hoti; saretopasilesikādhāro tatthetāva vuccate pubbasseva hoti na parassāti.
于第五格中,后者的——巴利
Pañcamiyaṃ parassa-.
在第五格(从格)的说明中,应当知道 parassa 的变化;此依“ato yonaṃ ṭāṭe”这条规则。narā nare;这里 jantuyo anantā 不出现;为什么这里不出现?因为 osadhyo anantare 已作其义,所以未受阻隔者不发生这一变化。巴利
Pañcamīniddese parassa kāriyaṃ ñatabbaṃ; ‘‘ato yonaṃ ṭāṭe‘‘. Narā nare; idha na hoti jantuyo anantā; idha kasmā na hoti; osadhyo anantare katatthatāya na vyava hitassa kāriyaṃ.
对于后者,应当了知所期望的作法——即起始音的作法;“ra saṅkhyāto vā”。Rājinā。巴利
Parassa sissamānaṃ kāriyamādivaṇṇassa ñātabbaṃ; ‘‘ra saṅkhyāto vā‘‘. Rājinā.
关于第六种结尾——巴利
Chaṭṭhiyantassa-.
属于第六格所示的(变化)作用,应知是那词尾字母的(变化):“rājassi nāmhi”。Rājinā。巴利
Chaṭṭhiniddiṭṭhassa yaṃ kāriyaṃ tadantassa vaṇṇassa viññeyyaṃ ‘‘rājassi nāmhi‘‘. Rājinā.
随附字母ṅ作为连接字母。巴利
Ṅanubandho-.
有Ṅ随附的,其末尾成为Ṅ;“gossāvaṅi”。Gavāssaṃ。巴利
Ṅakāro’nubandho yassa so’ntassa hoti; ‘‘gossāvaṅi‘‘. Gavāssaṃ.
以 Ṭ 为 anubandha 的多字母者,为全体的——巴利
Ṭanubandhānekavaṇṇā sabbassa-.
凡以ṭ为随伴标记且由多字母构成之替代形式,皆作整体替换;“imassānitthiyaṃ ṭe”。于这些中,“nāmhanimi”。依此。巴利
Ṭakāro’nubandho yassa so’nekakkharo cādeso sabbassa hoti; ‘‘imassānitthiyaṃ ṭe‘‘. Esu ‘‘nāmhanimi‘‘. Anena.
以 Ñakā 为随字的初末——巴利
Ñakānubandhādyantā-.
依第六格所指示的(词干),ñānubandha 与 kānubandha 位于首尾;bruto tissīña。bravīti,bhussa vuka。babhuva。巴利
Chaṭṭhiniddiṭṭhassa ñānubandhakānubandhā ādyantā honti; ‘‘bruto tissīña‘‘. Bravīti, ‘‘bhussa vuka‘‘. Babhuva.
Manubandho 在元音词尾之后。巴利
Manubandho sarānamantā paro-.
以m为随伴标记的替代形式,位于元音词尾之后而成为另一元音;“mañca rudhādīnaṃ”。Rundhati。巴利
Makāro’nubandho yassa so sarānamantā sarā paro hotī; ‘‘mañca rudhādīnaṃ‘‘. Rundhati.
于相违时〔vippaṭisedhe〕——巴利
Vippaṭisedhe-.
二人或三人的共同适用处,后者;他去与你亦去,你们去;他去、你亦去、我亦去,我们去。巴利
Dvinnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vā purisānaṃ sahappattiyaṃ paro; so ca gacchati tvañca gacchasi, tumhe gacchatha; so ca gacchati tvañca gacchasi ahañca gacchāmi, mayaṃ gacchāma.
约定〔Saṅketo〕、非部分〔anavayavo〕、随缚〔anubandho〕——。巴利
Saṅketo’navayavo’nubandho-.
凡是未成为组成部分的 saṅketo,应知那就是 anubandho;如 latupi 等词在 āsi 中。kattā,取 saṅketa 是为了什么?为了使 pakati 等的整体不成为 anubandha;因为未成为组成部分的整体,正因其为整体之相;取“未成为组成部分”是为了什么?“以此”。janena;正因此,由于 lopa 的已离去状态,不是为了 anubandha 的 lopa,语句才开始。巴利
Yo’navayavabhuto saṅketo so’nubandhoti ñatabbo;latupitādīnamāsimhi. Kattā, saṅketaggahaṇaṃ kiṃ? Pakatīyādisamudāyassānubandhatā mā hotuti; anavayavo hi samudāyo samudāyarūpattāyeva; anavayavaggahaṇaṃ kiṃ?’Atena’. Janena; imināva lopassāvagatattā nānubandhalopāya vacanamāraddhaṃ.
依 Vaṇṇaparena〔后随音〕,savaṇṇo’pi〔同类音〕亦被含摄——巴利
Vaṇṇaparena savaṇṇo’pi-.
因 Vaṇṇasaddo 是余词,故由此 savaṇṇa 亦被摄,且 rūpaṃ 亦为色形;如 yuvaṇṇānaṃ eko luttā 之所说,此为同义。巴利
Vaṇṇasaddo paro yasmā tena savaṇṇo’pi gayhati saṃva rūpaṃ; yuvaṇṇānamño luttā‘‘. Vāteritaṃ, samonā.
Ntu 与 vantu、manatvā、avantu、tavantu 有关系——。巴利
Ntu vantumanatvāvantutavantusambandhi-.
与 vantu 等词相关的,ntu 才被采用:“nta、ntu 的词干,在 ntu 后接 yo 和第一格时。” guṇavanto;为何说“与 vantu 等词相关”?jantu、tantu。巴利
Vantvādisambandhiyeva ntu gayhati, ‘‘ntantunaṃ nto yomhi paṭhame‘‘. Guṇavanto; vantvādisambandhīti kiṃ; jantu tantu.
Paribhāsāyo〔诸规则〕。巴利
Paribhāsāyo.
元音于元音前脱落——巴利
Saro lopo sare-.
于 sare 之前,sara 应脱落;例词:tatrime、saddhindriyaṃ、no hetaṃ、bhikkhunovādo、sametāyasmā、abhibhāyatanaṃ、puttā matthi、asantettha。巴利
Sare saro lopanīyo hoti; tatrime, saddhindriyaṃ, no hetaṃ, bhikkhunovādo, sametāyasmā, abhibhāyatanaṃ, puttā matthi, asantettha.
他者有时可脱落;彼亦如是,sāva,yatodakaṃ,tatova;kvaci 是什么意思?从 Saddhinduyaṃ 起,此规则直至章末,因此不会过度牵连。巴利
Paro kvaci lopanīyo hoti; so’pi, sāva, yatodakaṃ, tatova; kvavīti kiṃ? Saddhinduyaṃ ayamadhikāro āparicchedāvasānā tena nātippasaṅgo.
前后两个元音在某些情况下亦可都不省略;latā iva lateva latāva。巴利
Pubbaparasarā dve’pi vā kvaci na lupyante; latā iva lateva latāva.
i 类、u 类元音的 ño 于脱落时——巴利
Yuvaṇṇanamño luttā-.
被省略(变易)的元音,对于他人的 i 类、u 类元音,依次成为 ñ 音,或者(保持原样);例如 tassedaṃ、vāteritaṃ、nopeti、vāmoru、ateva'ññe、vodakaṃ;kathaṃ paccorasmi 如此;依瑜伽分别(yogavibhāga),vātveva tassidaṃ;所谓‘被省略’是什么?犹如 latā iva。巴利
Luttā sarā paresaṃ ivaṇṇuvaṇṇānaṃ ño honti vā yathākkamaṃ; tassedaṃ, vāteritaṃ, nopeti, vāmoru, ateva’ññe, vodakaṃ; kathaṃ paccorasmanti; yogavibhagā, vātveva tassidaṃ; lutteti kiṃ? Latā iva.
当 Yavā 位于元音之前时——。巴利
Yavā sare-.
在其它元音之后,i、u等元音(ivaṇṇuvaṇṇānaṃ)依次变为y和v;如vyākato、iccassa、ajjhiṇamutto、svāgataṃ、bhavāpanalānīlaṃ;vāttheva-itissa;kvacītveva-yānīdha、sūpaṭṭhitaṃ。巴利
Sare pare ivaṇṇuvaṇṇānaṃ yakāravakārā hontiva yathākkamaṃ; vyākato, iccassa, ajjhiṇamutto, svāgataṃ, bhavāpanalānīlaṃ; vāttheva-itissa; kvacītveva-yānīdha, sūpaṭṭhitaṃ.
当元音在前时,Ñonaṃ 的 ya、va 依次可选地成为;tyajja、te’jja、svāhaṃ、so’haṃ,kvacitveva——puttāmatthi asantettha。巴利
Ñonaṃ yavā honti vā sare yathākkamaṃ; tyajja te’jja svāhaṃ so’haṃ,kvacitveva-puttāmatthi asantettha.
Gossāvaṅi——。巴利
Gossāvaṅi-.
于 sare 之后,gossa 变为 avaṅi;gavāssaṃ;yathariva tathariveti 这些是不变词;bhusāmiveti 中 iva 一词即 eva 之义。巴利
Sare gossa avaṅi hoti; gavāssaṃ; yathariva tatharivetinipātāva; bhusāmiveti ivasaddo evattho.
辅音中长音与短音——。巴利
Byañjane dīgharassā-.
短音与长音在某些情况下,于辅音前变成长音或短音;例如 tatrāyaṃ, munīvare, sammadeva, mālahārī。巴利
Rassadīghānaṃ kvaci dīgharassā honti byañjane; tatrāyaṃ, munīvare, sammadeva, mālahārī.
于元音之后,后接辅音有时有两种形式;paggaho;于元音之后——何者?Taṃkhaṇaṃ。巴利
Saramhā parassa byañjanassa kvaci dve rūpā honti; paggaho; saramhāti-kiṃ? Taṃkhaṇaṃ.
于第四、第二〔音节〕时,此〔应作〕第三、第一——巴利
Catutthadutiyesveyaṃ tatiyapaṭhāmā-.
于第四、第二之后者,其第四、第二者,于彼类中,第三、第一为……依相违;mahaddhano,yasa tthero,apphuṭaṃ,abbhuggato;esviti-kiṃ?Thero;esantikiṃ?Pattho.巴利
Catutthadutiyesu paresvesaṃ catutthadutiyānaṃ tabbagge tatiyapaṭhamā honti paccāsattya; mahaddhano, yasa tthero, apphuṭaṃ, abbhuggato; esviti-kiṃ? Thero; esantikiṃ?Pattho.
Vitisseve 可(vā)——巴利
Vitisseve vā-.
当后面是 eva 一词时,iti 可有 vo 的变化;ittheva、icceva;eva 指什么,iccāha。巴利
Evasadde pare itissa vo hoti vā; ittheva icceva; eveti-kiṃ,iccāha.
e、o 于 na 与 ma 类中——。巴利
Ñonama vaṇṇe-.
Ñ 与 o 在字母中有时可变成 a;disvā yācakamāgate, akarambhasate, esaattho, esadhammo, maggo aggamakkhāyati, svāyatanaṃ, hiyyattanaṃ, karassu;所谓“可”即——yācake āgate, eso dhammo;所谓“字母”是什么?So。巴利
Ñonaṃ vaṇṇe kvaci a hoti vā; disvā yācakamāgate, akarambhasate,esaattho, esadhammo, maggo aggamakkhāyati, svāyatanaṃ, hiyyattanaṃ, karassu; vātveva-yācake āgate, eso dhammo; vaṇṇeti kiṃ?So.
Niggahītaṃ 有时在某些情况下成为 āgama;cakkhuṃ udapādi——cakkhu udapādi,purimaṃjāti——purimajāti,kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ bahuṃ。在 avaṃ siro 等中,因为 vā 的管辖范围是常定分别,所以;由于随顺短音,凡有 sāmattī 之处,所来的 āgama 也只是短音的。巴利
Niggabhītamāgamo hoti vā kvaci; cakkhuṃ udapādi cakkhu udapādi, purimaṃjāti purimajāti, kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ bahuṃ. Avaṃ siroti-ādisu niccaṃ vavatthītavibhāsattā vādhikārassa; sāmatthī yenāgamova sa ca rassasarasseva hoti tassa rassānugatattā.
Niggahīta之脱落,有时在某些情况下发生;如kyāhaṃ kīmahaṃ,sā ratto saṃratto;在sallekho-gattukāmo-gantumanoti等中,则恒常如此。巴利
Niggahītassa lopo hoti vā kvaci; kyāhaṃ kīmahaṃ, sā ratto saṃratto; sallekho-gattukāmo-gantumanotiādisu niccaṃ.
Parasarassa——巴利
Parasarassa-
从niggahīta之后,其后的元音有时可发生脱落;tvaṃsi——tvamasi。巴利
Niggahītamhā parassa sarassa lopo hoti vā kvaci; tvaṃsi tvamasi.
于诸组中,组末之音巴利
Vagge vagganto-
Niggahīta 于同组辅音之前,可变为该组辅音;taṅkaroti 即 taṃ karoti,tañcarati 即 taṃ carati,taṇṭhānaṃ 即 taṃ ṭhānaṃ,tandhanaṃ 即 taṃ dhanaṃ,tampāti 即 taṃ pāti;于词中常然,gantvā;有时于他处亦住。巴利
Niggahītassa kho vagge vagganto vā hoti paccā satyā; taṅkaroti taṃ karoti, tañcarati taṃ carati, taṇṭhānaṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ, tandhanaṃ taṃ dhanaṃ, tampāti taṃ pāti; niccaṃ pada majjhe, gantvā; kvacaññatrāpi, santiṭṭhati.
Yevahisuñño-.巴利
Yevahisuñño-.
于‘ya’、‘eva’、‘hi’等词之前,鼻音(随韵)或有变为‘ña’音者;如‘yayaññadeva(那个)’、‘taññeva(恰恰那个)’、‘tañbhi(那,双数)’;或保持不变,如‘vātveva-yaṃyadeva(恰恰就是那个)’。巴利
Yaevahisaddesu niggahītassa vā ño hoti; yayaññadeva, taññeva, tañbhi; vātveva-yaṃyadeva.
在‘saṃ’中,随韵在‘ya’之前有时变为‘ña’音;例如‘saññamo’与‘saṃyamo’(节制)有两种拼写形式。巴利
Saṃsaddassa yaṃ niggahītaṃ tassa vā ño hoti yakāre; saññamo saṃyamo.
mayadā 于母音前。巴利
Mayadā sare-.
随韵于母音前有时变为 mayadā;tamahaṃ、tayidaṃ、tadalaṃ;或则——taṃ ahaṃ。巴利
Niggahītassa mayadā honti vā sare kvaci; tamahaṃ, tayidaṃ, tadalaṃ; vātveva-taṃ ahaṃ.
vanataragā 及 āgama——巴利
Vanataragā cāgamā-.
这些 mayadā 与 āgamā 有时出现在母音前——tivaṅgīkaṃ、ito nāyati、cinitvā、tasmātiha、nirojaṃ、puthageva、idhamāhu、yathayidaṃ、attadatthaṃ——或为 attatthaṃ——atippago kho tāvāti 的开头仅为 paga 一词。巴利
Ete mayadā cāgamā honti sare vā kvaci; tivaṅgīkaṃ, ito nāyati, cinitvā, tasmātiha, nirojaṃ, puthageva, idhamāhu, yathayidaṃ, attadatthaṃ; vātveva-attatthaṃ; atippago kho tāvāti-paṭhamanto pagasaddova.
从 cha 一词,对后接的元音,有时有 ḷ 音作为增音;chaḷahaṃ、chaḷāyatanaṃ;或者不如此——cha abhiññā。巴利
Chasaddā parassa sarassa ḷakāro āgamo hoti vā; chaḷahaṃ, chaḷāyatanaṃ; vātveva-cha abhiññā.
Tadaminā等——巴利
Tadaminādīni-
什么是“此者”与“彼者”等善巧方便呢?“此者”即“以此”,“彼者”即“以此”;“sakiṃ āgāmī”(一来)即“sakadāgāmī”(一来);“ekaṃ idha ahaṃ”(此处如我)即“ekamidāhaṃ”;“saṃvidhāya avahāro”(安排后之称呼)即“saṃvidāvahāro”;“vārino vāhako”(水的承载者)即“valāhako”(云);“jīvanassa mūto”(生命之根)即“jīmūto”;“chavassa sayanaṃ”(尸体的卧处)即“susānaṃ”(冢/墓地);“uddhaṃ khamassa”(上方之容忍)即“udukkhalaṃ”(臼);“pisi tāso”(恶鬼之渴)即“pisāco”(饿鬼/鬼);“mahiyaṃ ravatīti”(在地上鸣叫者)即“mayūro”(孔雀);诸如此类,应当追随其用;他人的“pisodarādi”(饿鬼腹等)之词须敬见观察。巴利
Tadaminādīni sādhūni bhavanti? Taṃ iminā tadaminā, sakiṃ āgāmī sakadāgāmī, ekaṃ idha ahaṃ ekamidāhaṃ, saṃvidhāya avahāro saṃvidāvahāro, vārino vāhako valāhako, jīvanassa mūto jīmūto, chavassa sayanaṃ susānaṃ, uddhaṃ khamassa udukkhalaṃ, pisi tāso pisāco, mahiyaṃ ravatīti mayūro; evamaññepi payoga to’nugantabbā; paresaṃ pisodarādivedaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
成分的出入轮替,其分类有多种。巴利
Tavaggavaraṇānaṃ ye cavaggabayañā-.
于 tavarga 等,在 ya 之前依次变为 cavarga 等;apūccaṇḍakāyaṃ、tacchaṃ、yajjevaṃ、ajjhattaṃ、thañaññaṃ、dibbaṃ、payyesanā、pokkharañño;有时则不然——ratyā。巴利
Tavaggavaraṇānaṃ cavaggabayañā honti yathākkamaṃ yakāre; apūccaṇḍakāyaṃ, tacchaṃ, yajjevaṃ, ajjhattaṃ, thañaññaṃ, dibbaṃ, payyesanā, pokkharañño; kvacītveva-ratyā.
Vaggalasehi〔于vagga类与la音之后〕te——巴利
Vaggalasehi te-
于组末音之后,对方的 ya 有时化作相应的组末音;sakkate、paccate、aṭṭate、kuppate、phallate、assate,有时也如 kyāhaṃ——巴利
Vaggalasehi parassa yakārassa kvaci te vaggalasā honti; sakkate, paccate, aṭṭate, kuppate, phallate, assate, kvacī tveca-kyāhaṃ.
在‘ya’之前,‘ha’音发生位置互换(音位易位);例如‘guyhaṃ’(秘密,属格/宾格形)。巴利
Hassa vipallāso hoti yakāre; guyhaṃ.
于v处,h发生颠倒;bavhābādho——bahvā bādho。巴利
Hassa vipallāso hoti vā vakāre; bavhābādho bahvā bādho.
ta、tha、na、ra 变为 ṭa、ṭha、ṇa、la——巴利
Tathanarānaṃ ṭaṭhaṇalā-.
如是人等确有‘ṭaṭhaṇalā’之义,即恶劣、难解、疑难、障碍、逃避、风寒疼痛之苦;有时亦称为至乐者。巴利
Tathanarānaṃ ṭaṭhaṇalā hontī vā; dukkaṭaṃ, aṭṭhakathā, gahaṇaṃ, paligho, palāyati, vātveca-dukkataṃ; kvacītveva-sugato.
Saṃyogassa 中作为起始部分的那个成分,它在某处也可以(vā)发生脱落(lopa);pupphaṃsā,jāyate’gini。巴利
Saṃyogassa yo ādibhuto’vayavo tassa vā kvacī lopo hoti; pupphaṃsā, jāyate’gini.
于遍求与频繁义中,有二——巴利
Vicchābhikkhaññesu dve-
遍满与重复所表之义有两种形式。对于由动作、性质或事物所区分的不同对象,生起欲普遍含摄的心念,即名为“遍满”;给每一棵树浇水,每一座村庄都可爱,每一座村庄都有水,每一户都有主人,品尝每一种味道,开始每一种动作。巴利
Vīcchāyamābhikkhaññe ca yaṃ vattate tassa dve rūpāni honti, kriyāya guṇena dabbena vā bhinne atthe vyāpitu micchā vīcchā; rukkhaṃrukkhaṃ siñcati, gāmogāmo ramaṇīyo, gāme gāme pānīyaṃ, gehe gehe issaro, rasaṃ rasaṃ bhakkhayatī, kiriyaṃ kiriyamārahate.
于次第中亦有遍满:根部粗,顶端细;若此处无根与顶之差别,次第亦应非有。(jeṭṭhaṃ jeṭṭhamanuppavesaya) “māsakaṃ māsakaṃ imamhā kahāpaṇā bhavantānaṃ dvinnaṃ dehī”ti——由此“māsakaṃ māsakaṃ”可知遍满;然从saddantara来看,“imamhā kahāpaṇā”是限定;pubbaṃ pubbaṃ pupphanti,paṭhamaṃ paṭhamaṃ paccantīti亦是遍满;ime ubho aḍḍhā katarā katarā esaṃ dvinnamaḍḍhatā,sabbe ime aḍḍhā katamā katamā imesaṃ aḍḍhatā,此处亦是遍满;ābhikkhaññaṃ——ponopuññaṃ,pacati pacati papacati papacati,lunāhi lunāhitvevāyaṃ lunāti,bhutvā bhutvā gacchati,paṭapaṭā karoti,paṭapaṭāyati。巴利
Atthiyevānupubbiye’pi vīcchā, mūle thūlā, agge agge sukhumā; yadi hi ettha mūlaggabhedo na siyā ānupubbiyampi na bhaveyya, (jeṭṭhaṃ jeṭṭhamanuppavesaya) māsakaṃ māsakaṃ imamhā kahāpaṇā bhavantānaṃ dvinnaṃ dehīti- māsakaṃ māsakamiccetasmā vīcchāvagamyate saddantarato pana imamhā kahāpaṇāti avadhāraṇaṃ; pubbaṃ pubbaṃ pupphanti, paṭhamaṃ paṭhamaṃ paccantīti vīcchāva; ime ubho aḍḍhā katarā katarā esaṃ dvinnamaḍḍhatā, sabbe ime aḍḍhā katamā katamā imesaṃ aḍḍhatā, ihāpi vīcchāva; ābhikkhaññaṃ-ponopuññaṃ, pacati pacati papacati papacati, lunāhi lunāhitvevāyaṃ lunāti, bhutvā bhutvā gacchati, paṭapaṭā karoti, paṭapaṭāyati.
前一个的 syādi 词尾脱落——巴利
Syādilopo pubbassekassa-.
于vicchāya(分别)中,一个词重复为两词时,前一词的syādi(语尾)脱落,如ekekassa(各个)。matthakamatthakena(以头顶)是如何形成的呢?依“前一词的syādi脱落”之瑜伽分别;由此瑜伽分别,既无过度之失,亦成就所欲之果。巴利
Vīcchāmekassa dvitte pubbassa syādilopo hoti, ekekassa, kathaṃ matthakamatthakenāti? Syādilopo pubbassāti yogavibhāgā; na cātippaṅgo yogavibhāgā iṭṭhappasiddhīti.
一切〔词〕的 vītihāra——巴利
Sabbādīnaṃ vītihāre-.
于 sabba 等词的交互用法中,有两种形式,且前一词的 syādi 脱落;aññamaññassa bhojakā、itarītarassa bhojakā。巴利
Sabbādīnaṃ vītihāre dve bhavanti pubbassa syādilopo ca; aññamaññassa bhojakā, itarītarassa bhojakā.
Yāva bodhaṃ 在 sambhame 中——巴利
Yāva bodhaṃ sambhame-.
迅速显示灭除之因即是止息;若具此念,则依令意义明了所需,便用彼诸音声。如:“蛇!蛇!蛇!”、“速觉悟吧!速觉悟吧!速觉悟吧!”、“比丘僧团分裂了!比丘僧团分裂了!”巴利
Turitenāpāyahetupadassanaṃ sambhamo, tasmiṃ sati vattu yāvanteha saddehi so’ttho viññāyate tāvanto saddā payujjante; sappo sappo sappo, bujjhassu bujjhassu bujjhassu, bhinno bhikkhusaṅgho bhinno bhikkhusaṅgho.
此规则适用于全论终了为止,因此既不过度,亦成就所愿。巴利
Ayamadhikāro āsatthaparisamattiyā tena nātippasaṅgo iṭṭhasiddhi ca.
以上是《目犍连语法》释论之第一章。巴利
Iti moggallānavyākaraṇe vuttīyaṃ paṭhamo kaṇḍo.
于单数与复数中各为二,自名词词干:siyoaṃyonābhisanaṃ smāhisanaṃsmiṃsu-。巴利
Dvedvekānekesu nāmasmā siyoaṃyonābhisanaṃ smāhisanaṃsmiṃsu-.
这些于单一及多种义中现起的,从名词词干而有二二〔形式〕;muni munayo,muniṃ munayo,muninā munīhi,munissa munīnaṃ,munismā munīhi,munissa munīnaṃ,munismiṃ munīsu,如是 kumārī kumāriyo,kaññā kaññāyoti;此七对、七种格;作“分别即格”已——此处 si、aṃ 等词尾“kimaṃsisū”ti。是约定之义。巴利
Etesaṃ dve dve honti ekānekatthesu vattamānato nāmasmā; muni munayo, muniṃ munayo, muninā munīhi, munissa munīnaṃ, munismā munīhi, munissa munīnaṃ, munismiṃ munīsu, evaṃ kumārī kumāriyo, kaññā kaññāyoti; etāni satta dukāni sattavibhattiyo; vibhāgo vibhattīti katvā-ettha siamitīkārā kārā ‘‘kimaṃsisū‘‘ti. Saṃketatthā.
第二变格用于表示动作的对象(业)。巴利
Kamme dutiyā-.
被作、与作者行为相关联者,即是业;于彼,业格(vibhatti)为dutiya;kaṭaṃ karoti,odanaṃ pavati,ādiccaṃ passati,odano paccatīti——从odana一词,业性不被认知,那么是什么?从Ākhyāta;kaṭaṃ karoti vipulaṃ dassanīyanti——确实存在具足德者之业性;即使所愿,亦唯从业性,dutiya成立;gāvuṃ payo dohati,gomantaṃ gāvaṃ yāvati,gavamavarundhati vajaṃ,māṇavakaṃ maggaṃ pucchati,gomantaṃ gāvaṃ bhikkhate,rukkhamava cināti phalāni,sissaṃ dhammaṃ brūte,sissaṃ dhammamanusāsati。巴利
Karīyati kattukriyāyābhīsambandhīyatīti kammaṃ, tasmiṃ dutiyā vibhatti hoti; kaṭaṃ karoti, odanaṃ pavati, ādiccaṃ passati, odano paccatīti-odanasaddato kammatā nappatīyate, kiṃ carahi? Ākhyātato; kaṭaṃ karoti vipulaṃ dassanīyanti- attheva guṇa yuttassa kammatā; icchite’pi kammattāva dutiyā siddha; gāvuṃ payo dohati, gomantaṃ gāvaṃ yāvati, gavamavarundhati vajaṃ, māṇavakaṃ maggaṃ pucchati, gomantaṃ gāvaṃ bhikkhate, rukkhamava cināti phalāni, sissaṃ dhammaṃ brūte, sissaṃ dhammamanusāsati.
即使是不乐意的事,也能如此表现:越过蛇、食用毒药。即使是既非所欲又非非所欲的事,亦可用第二变格成就。如:前往村庄时靠近树根、将躺卧于地、站立于村庄中心、坐于树中央——这是关于“坐”、“站”等动词在处所格中取业词(第二格)的用法。巴利
Evamanicachite’pi; ahiṃ laṅghayati, vīsaṃ bhakkheti; yanne vicchitaṃ nāpi anicchitaṃ tatthāpi dutīyā siddhā; gāmaṃ gacchanto rukkhamūlamupasappati, pathaviṃ adhisessati, gāmamadhitiṭṭhati, rukkha majjhāsateti-adhisīṭhāsānaṃ payoge’dhikaraṇe kammavacanicchā.
诚然,随表达意愿的不同而有种种格。就如:闪电从云中显现(从格)、云的闪电(属格)、云有闪电(主格)、在云中闪电(处格)、由云而闪电(具格)。巴利
Vatticchāto hi kārakāni honti; taṃ yathā- valāhakā vijjotate, valāhakassa vijjotate, valāhako vijjotate, valāhake vijjotate, valāhakena vijjotateti.
Evamabhinavisassa 或 dhammamabhinivisate 或 dhamme 或 tathā upanvajjhāvasassa 之 abhojananavutti 与 canassa;gāmamupavasati、gāma manuvasati、pabbatamadhivasati、gharamāvasati;abhojananivuttivaca nassa 是何?Gāme upavasati——作 bhojananivutti 之义。Tappānācāre 亦因 kamma 故,dutiyā 成立,nadimpivati、gāmaṃ carati;如是 sace maṃ nālapissati 等亦然。巴利
Evamabhinavisassa vā, dhammamabhinivisate dhamme vā, tathā upanvajjhāvasassābhojananavutticanassa; gāmamupavasati, gāma manuvasati, pabbatamadhivasati, gharamāvasati; abhojananivuttivaca nassāti-kiṃ? Gāme upavasati-bhojananivuttiṃ karotīti attho. Tappānācāre’pi kammattāva dutiyā siddhā, nadimpivati, gāmaṃ carati; evaṃ sace maṃ nālapissatīti-ādisupi.
于已制成的工具等,为第二格;愿彼等觉悟支(cunda)显现——彼等觉悟支应被说,此义;然而当pati与界结合时,则由此结合,于关系中亦为第六格,其不显现耶?掷骰子,以骰子掷,于骰子上掷——依业、依具、依所依之欲。巴利
Vihitāva paṭiyoge dutiyā, paṭibhantu taṃ cunda bojjhaṅgāti-taṃ paṭi bojjhaṅgā bhāsantūti attho; yadā tu dhātunā yutto pati tadā tenāyogā sambandhe chaṭṭhī ca tassa nappaṭi bhātīti? Akkhe dibbati, akkhehi dibbati, akkhesu dibbatītikammakaraṇādhikaraṇavacanicchā.
于时间、路程、无间相合中——巴利
Kāladdhānamaccantasaṃyoge-.
与时间、时段有绝对关联时,依动词、性质、实体之整体性,时间与时段之关联为绝对关联;当此被了知时,与时间词及时段词连用者为业格:māsamadhīte,māsaṃ kalyāṇi。Māsaṃ guḷadhānā,kosamadhīte,kosaṃ kuṭilā nadī,kosaṃ pabbato;“绝对关联”为何?Māsassa dvīhamadhīte;kosasseka dese pabbato;pubbanhasamayaṃ nivāsetvā,ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā,imaṃ rattiṃ cattāro mahārājāti;如是等中,因与时间语词有绝对关联故,业格成立,或由格位错乱而多依此规则——巴利
Kriyāguṇadabbehi sākallena kāladdhānaṃ sambandho accantasaṃyoge, tasmiṃ viññāyamāne kālasaddehi addha saddehi ca dutiyā hoti; māsamadhīte, māsaṃ kalyāṇi. Māsaṃ guḷadhānā, kosamadhīte, kosaṃ kuṭilā nadī, kosaṃ pabbato; accantasaṃyegeti kiṃ? Māsassa dvīhamadhīte; kosasseka dese pabbato; pubbanhasamayaṃ nivāsetvā, ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā, imaṃ rattiṃ cattāro mahārājāti; evamādisu kālavācīhi accantasaṃyegattāva dutiyā siddhā, vibhattivipallāsena vā bahulaṃ vidhānā-
在“果得位”的“作用完全成就品”中应当知道:当时间与作用的极边结合时,虽认定是第三格,它却同样因具格性而成立,如“māsenānuvāko’dhīto, kosenānuvāko’dhīto”;而在“非完全成就品”中,因为没有能作性,也就没有具格性,于是只有第二格,如“māsamadhīto’nuvāko, na cānena gahito”。巴利
Phalappattiyaṃ kriyāparisamattyapavaggo tasmiṃ viññāya māne kāladdhānaṃ kriyāyāccantasaṃyoge tatiyābhimatā sāpi karaṇattāva siddhā; māsenānuvāko’dhīto, kosenānuvā ko’dhītoti; anapavaggetu asādhakatamattā karaṇattābhave dutiyāva māsamadhīto’nuvāko, na cānena gahitoti.
于诸作者格中,凡表示时间间隔者,从彼处第七格与第五格被认可;“今日食已,devadatto 将于两日后食,将于两日后食”“此弓箭手于箭囊中射靶,从箭囊射靶”——这些在此也仅依各自作者格语尾变化而成立。巴利
Kārakamajjhe ye kāladdhānavācino tato sattamīpapañcamiyo abhimatā; ajja bhutvā devadatto dvīhe bhuñjissati dvīhā bhuñjissati, atraṭṭho’yamissāso kose lakkhaṃ vijjhati, kosā lakkhaṃ vijjhatīti-tāpīha sakasakakārakavacanicchāyeva siddhā.
迁移、觉知、饮食、音声,以及作者的作用等,构成动力。巴利
Gatibodhāhārasaddatthakammakahajjādīnaṃ payojje-.
对于表去、觉、食、声义的不及物动词,以及bhajj等动词,在使役句中,主动格使用第二格;而且,由于其能力与使役者的作用,他便具有业性,这应如此了知:gama yati māṇavakaṃ gāmaṃ,yāpayati māṇavakaṃ gāmaṃ,bodhayati māṇavakaṃ dhammaṃ,vedayati māṇavakaṃ dhammaṃ,bhojayati māṇavakamodanaṃ,āsayati māṇavakamodanaṃ,ajjhāpayati māṇavakaṃ vedaṃ pāṭhayati māṇavakaṃ vedaṃ,āsayati devadattaṃ,sāyayati deva dattaṃ,aññaṃ bhajjāpeti,aññaṃ koṭṭāpeti,añaññaṃ santharāpeti。“这些”所指为何?Pācayati odanaṃ devadattena yañaññadatto;“使役”所指为何?Gacchati devadatto,yadā carahigamayati devadattaṃ yañña datto,tamaparo payojayati tadā gamayati devadattaṃ yaññadatteneti——应作bhavitabbaṃ,因为gamayati含有去义。巴利
Gamanatthānaṃ bodhatthānaṃ āhāratthānaṃ saddatthānamakammakānaṃ bhajjādīnañca payojje kattari dutiyā hoti, sāmatthiyā ca payojakavyāpārena kammatāvassa hotīti patīyate; gama yati māṇavakaṃ gāmaṃ, yāpayati māṇavakaṃ gāmaṃ, bodhayati māṇavakaṃ dhammaṃ, vedayati māṇavakaṃ dhammaṃ, bhojayati māṇavakamodanaṃ, āsayati māṇavakamodanaṃ, ajjhāpayati māṇavakaṃ vedaṃ pāṭhayati māṇavakaṃ vedaṃ, āsayati devadattaṃ, sāyayati deva dattaṃ, aññaṃ bhajjāpeti, aññaṃ koṭṭāpeti, añaññaṃ santharāpeti. Etesamevāti kiṃ?Pācayati odanaṃ devadattena yañaññadatto; paye ppoti kiṃ?Gacchati devadatto, yadā carahigamayati devadattaṃ yañña datto, tamaparo payojayati tadā gamayati devadattaṃ yaññadatteneti - bhavitabbaṃ gamayatissāgamanatthattā.
或 harā 等词的——巴利
Harādīnaṃ vā-.
Harādīnaṃ 等词的使役用法中,施动者有时用第二格;hāreti hāraṃ devadattaṃ devadatteneti vā,ajjhohāreti sattuṃ devadattaṃ devadatteneti vā,kāreti devadattaṃ devadatteneti vā,dassayate janaṃ rājā janeneti vā,abhivādayate guruṃ devadattaṃ devadatteneti vā。巴利
Harādīnaṃ payojje kattari dutiyā hoti vā; hāreti hāraṃ devadattaṃ devadatteneti vā, ajjhohāreti sattuṃ devadattaṃ devadatteneti vā, kāreti devadattaṃ devadatteneti vā, dassayate janaṃ rājā janeneti vā, abhivādayate guruṃ devadattaṃ devadatteneti vā.
不——khādā 等词的。巴利
Na khādādīnaṃ-.
饮食等使役中,主动者不用第二格;由提婆达多使吃,由提婆达多使取,由提婆达多使唤,由提婆达多发声,由提婆达多使哭,由提婆达多引导。巴利
Khādādīnaṃ payojje kattari dutiyā na hoti; khādayati devadattena, ādayati devadattena, avhāpayati devadattena, saddāyati devadattena, kandayati devadattena, nāyayati devadattena.
(此句原文残缺,暂无法翻译。)巴利
Vahissāniyantuke-.()
由天人承担重担;“承担重担”意指什么?即由力大之人来肩负担子。巴利
Vāhayati bhāraṃ devadattena; aniyantuketi-kiṃ?Vāhayati gāraṃ balivadde.
于 bhakkhissa 的 ahiṃsāyaṃ 中——巴利
Bhakkhissāhiṃsāyaṃ-.()
天人以摩达果行供养;何以称为“无害”?这是因为他以强健之力供养蛇。巴利
Bhakkhayati modake devadattena; ahiṃsāyanti kiṃ? Bhakkhayati balivadde sassaṃ.
与dhyā等相应——巴利
Dhyādīhi yuttā-.
与dhi等词相连时,业格成立?——dhiratthumaṃ pūtikāyaṃ,antarā ca rājagahaṃ,antarā ca nāḷandaṃ,samādhānamantarena,mucalindamabhito saramiccādi——这是属格的例外。巴利
Dhiādīhi yuttato dutiyā hoti? Dhiratthumaṃ pūtikāyaṃ, antarā ca rājagahaṃ, antarā ca nāḷandaṃ, samādhānamantarena, mucalindamabhito saramiccādi-chaṭṭhiyāpavādo yaṃ.
于lakkhaṇa、itthambhūta、vīcchā等词之后,abhi-巴利
Lakkhaṇitthambhutavīcchāsvabhinā-.
于 Lakkhaṇādisvatthesvahinā 结合者,有 dutiyā;rukkha mabhivijjetate vijju,sādhu devadatto mātaramabhi,rukkhaṃ rukkhamabhitiṭṭhati.巴利
Lakkhaṇādisvatthesvahinā yuttamhā dutiyā hoti; rukkha mabhivijjetate vijju, sādhu devadatto mātaramabhi, rukkhaṃ rukkhamabhitiṭṭhati.
与pati和pari连用时,表“部分”之义——巴利
Patiparīhi bhāge ca-.
与 pati、pari 结合时,于 lakkhaṇa 等中、bhāge 中、vatthe 中,第二格成为;rukkhampati vijjotate vijju,sādhu devadatto mātaraṃ pati,rukkhaṃ rukkhaṃ pati tiṭṭhati,yadettha maṃ pati siyā,rukkhaṃ parivijjetate vijju,sādhu devadatto mātaraṃ pari,rukkhaṃ rukkhaṃ pari tiṭṭhati,yadettha maṃ pari siyā。巴利
Patiparīhi yuttamhā lakkhaṇādisu bhāge vatthe dutiyā hoti; rukkhampati vijjotate vijju, sādhu devadatto mātaraṃ pati, rukkhaṃ rukkhaṃ pati tiṭṭhati, yadettha maṃ pati siyā, rukkhaṃ parivijjetate vijju, sādhu devadatto mātaraṃ pari, rukkhaṃ rukkhaṃ pari tiṭṭhati, yadettha maṃ pari siyā.
于表示特征等义中,与anu结合时,为第二格;闪电随树而闪耀,依真实誓愿而降雨;成为因与相,萨度,devadatta随母,他逐树而住,凡此于我随顺。巴利
Lakkhaṇādisvatthesvanunā yuttamhā dutiyā hoti; rukkha manuvijjotate vijju, saccakiriyamanupavassi; hetu ca lakkhaṇaṃ bhavati, sādhu devadatto mātaramanu, rukkhaṃ rukkhamanu tiṭṭhati, yadettha maṃ anusiyā.
与sahattha义相应的anu连用时,为第二格;如pabbatamanutiṭṭhati。巴利
Sahatthe’nunā yuttamhā dutiyā hoti; pabbatamanutiṭṭhati.
于“低劣”之义,与anu连用时,从所连之词起为第二格;如“anusāriputtaṃ paññāvanto”。巴利
Hīnatthe’nunā yuttamhā dutiyā hoti; anusāriputtaṃ paññāvanto.
Hinatthe 于低劣义,在与 upena 相连者之后,dutiyā 第二格成为;upasāriputta paññāvanto。巴利
Hinatthe upena yuttamhā dutiyā hoti; upasāriputta paññāvanto.
以第七格表示超越之义。巴利
Sattamyādhikye-.
当“upa”表示超越义时,与之相连的词用第七格;例如“upakhārayaṃ doṇo”(指稍少于一咖拉耶的一多那)。巴利
Ādhikyatthe upena yuttamhā sattamī hoti; upakhārayaṃ doṇo.
表 Sāmitte〔主人〕之义,与 adhinā 结合——。巴利
Sāmitte’dhinā-.
在表示主属关系——即“以……为主”或“归属……统辖”之义——时,与“adhinā”连用的词采用第七格(处格);例如:“adhibrahmadatte pañcālā”,意为般遮拉族以梵授为主,即梵授统辖般遮拉族;“adhipañcālesu brahmadatto”,意为梵授以般遮拉族为主,即梵授统领般遮拉族。巴利
Sāmibhāvatthe’dhinā yuttamhā sattamī hoti; adhibrahmadatte pañcālā, adhipañcālesu brahmadatto.
在施事者与工具等含义上,使用第三格。巴利
Kattukaraṇesu tatiyā-.
行为者、工具及行为者(作为工具)时,用第三格(工具格);如“由人所作”、“以剑切割”、“本性端正”、“以姓为乔达摩,以名为善慧”、“以出生(年龄)为七岁”等——从 bhū 等词根所生者,在工具义中即用第三格;如是,“以平地奔跑”、“以崎岖地奔跑”、“以两斗买谷物”、“以五单位买牲畜”。巴利
Kattari karaṇa cैa kārake tatiyā hoti; purisena kataṃ, asinā chindati, pakatiyābhirūpo, gottena gotamo’sumedho nāma nāmena, jātiyā sattavassikoti-bhūdhātussa sambhavā karaṇe eva tatiyā; evaṃ samena dhāvati, visamena dhāvati, dvidoṇena dhaññaṃ kiṇāti, pañcakena pasavo kiṇātīti.
Sahatthena——巴利
Sahatthena-
与sahatta义结合时,可用第三格;puttena sahāgato、puttena saddhiṃ āgato?第三格也如同第六格,唯用于非主要成分。巴利
Sahatthena yoge tatiyā siyā; puttena sahāgato, puttena saddhiṃ āgato? Tatiyāpi chaṭṭhīva appadhāne eva bhavati.
于特征现前时,可用第三格;tidaṇḍakena paribbājakam addakkhi,akkhinā kāṇo,由此,依某一肢分之相,即可辨认具有该肢分者之变异。巴利
Lakkhaṇe vattamānato tatiyā siyā; tidaṇḍakena paribbājakamaddakkhi, akkhinā kāṇo, tena hi aṅgena aṅgino vikāro lakkhīyate.
于因中〔Hetumhi〕——。巴利
Hetumhi-.
表原因或适合之义时,可用第三格;annena vasati,vijjāya yaso。巴利
Takkiriyāyogge tatiyā siyā; annena vasati, vijjāya yaso.
于 iṇa 词表示原因时,可用第五格;“因水而系缚”或“以百而系缚”。巴利
Iṇe hetumhī pañcamī hoti vā;jaḷattā baddho satena vā.
于超越之因,或用第五格(从格);因愚痴而系缚,或以愚痴而系缚;以智慧得解脱;由有转为无,故为无常;诸行灭则识灭。巴利
Parāṅgabhute hetumhi pañcamī hoti vā; jaḷattā baddho jaḷattena vā, paññāya mutto, hutvā abhāvato’niccā, saṅkhāra nirodhā viññāṇanirodho.
第六(格)表因义。巴利
Chaṭṭhī hetvatthehi-.
因义之辞,于因处用第六格(属格);如“腹之因”、“腹之缘”。巴利
Hetvatthavacīhi yege hetumhi chaṭhī siyayā; udarassa hetu, udarassa kāraṇā.
从sabba起始,sabbā〔诸格〕——巴利
Sabbādito sabbā-.
与因义连接时,从“一切”等词而有诸格:如“谁因”、“何因”、“以何因”、“彼因之”、“从何因”、“于何因”;又如“何缘”、“以何缘”;“何相”、“以何相”;“何用”、“以何用”等——这些皆为因义所成、因义所作。巴利
Hetvatthehi yoge sabbādīhi sabbā vibhattiyo honti; ko hetu, kaṃ hetuṃ, kena hetunā, tassa hetussa, kasmā hetusmā, kassa hetussa, kasmiṃ hetusmiṃ; kiṃ kāraṇaṃ, kena kāraṇena; kiṃ nimittaṃ, kena nimittena; kiṃ payojanaṃ, kena payojaneneccevamādi –hetvatthehītveva-kena kataṃ.
第四格(为格,表接受者)。巴利
Catutthi sampadāne-.
于正确给予之处,当用第四格,如“给与僧团”;若视其为容器(处所),则亦可用第七格,如“在僧团中给与”。巴利
Yassa sammā padīyate tasmiṃ catutthi siyā; saṅghassa dadāti, ādhāravicakkhāyaṃ sattamīpi siyā, saṅghe dehi.
此处,为表达“为此目的”(tadattha)即“目的性”(tadatthabhāva)之意义时,名词当用第四格(与格);例如:“为抵御寒冷”(sītassa paṭighātāya),“为人天利益与安乐”(atthāya hitāya devamanussānaṃ),“不足养家”(nālaṃ dārabharaṇāya),“作柱之木”(yūpāya dāru),“趋于成熟”(pākāya vajati)等。巴利
Tassedaṃ tadatthaṃ tadatthabhāve jotanīye nāmasmā catutthī siyā; sītassa paṭighātāya, atthāya hitāya devamanussānaṃ, nālaṃ dārabharaṇāya, yūpāya dāru, pākāya vajatītvevamādi.
“谁的美味不令人欢喜?”
“愿尊者们也不要欢喜僧团分裂。”
“僧团允许。”
“此食物未令他满意。”——这些是第六格,用以表达关联的意欲;如此并无矛盾,因其形态相似,且在此类情形中,关联关系为语法家所认可。“你使谁欢喜法?”——此中仅表意义,用第一格。巴利
Kassa sāduṃ na ruccati, mā āyasmantānampi saṅghabhedo ruccattha, khamati saṅghassa, bhattamassa nacchādetīti-chaṭṭhī sambandha vacanicchāyaṃ; na cevaṃ virodho siyā sadisarūpattā evaṃ vidhesu ca sambandhassa saddikānumatattā kassa vā tvaṃ dhammaṃ rocesīti-atthamatte paṭhamā.
同样,其余诸例也当依随教说而了知。巴利
Evamaññāpi viññeyyā parato’pi yathāgamaṃ.
于关联中为属格:“Rañño sataṃ dhāreti, rañño chattaṃ dhāreti”;如是,“rañño silāghate, rañño hanute, rañño upa tiṭṭhate, rañño sapate, devāpi tassa pihayanti tādino, tassa kujjha mahāvīra, yaditaṃ tassa pakuppeyyaṃ, dubhayati disānaṃ megho, yo mittānaṃ na dūhati, yo appaduṭṭhassa narassa dussati, kyāhaṃ ayyānaṃ aparajjhāmi, issayanti samaṇānaṃ titthiyā, dhammena nayamānānaṃ kā usūya, rañño bhāgyamā rajjhati, rañño bhāgyamikkhate, tena yācito ayācito vā tassa gāvo paṭisuṇāti, gāvo āsuṇāti, bhagavato paccassosuṃ, hotu patigiṇāti, hotvanugiṇāti, ārovayāmi vo, pativedayāmi vo, dhamma te desissāmi, yathā no satthā vyākareyya, alaṃ te idha vāsena, kiṃ te jaṭāhi dummedha, arahati mallo mallassāti——jīvitaṃ tiṇāyapi na maññamano”为彼义之第四格;“tiṇena yo attho tadatthāyapīti”为义;巴利
Rañño sataṃ dhāreti, rañño chattaṃ dhāretīti sambandhe chaṭṭhī; evaṃ rañño silāghate, rañño hanute, rañño upa tiṭṭhate, rañño sapate, devāpi tassa pihayanti tādino, tassa kujjha mahāvīra, yaditaṃ tassa pakuppeyyaṃ, dubhayati disānaṃ megho, yo mittānaṃ na dūhatī,[ ] yo appaduṭṭhassa narassa dussati, kyāhaṃ ayyānaṃ aparajjhāmi, issayanti samaṇānaṃ titthiyā, dhammena nayamānānaṃ kā usūya, [ ] rañño bhāgyamā rajjhati, rañño bhāgyamikkhate, tena yācito ayācito vā tassa gāvo paṭisuṇāti, gāvo āsuṇāti, bhagavato paccassosuṃ, hotu patigiṇāti, hotvanugiṇāti, ārovayāmi vo, pativedayāmi vo, dhamma te desissāmi, yathā no satthā vyākareyya, alaṃ te idha vāsena, kiṃ te jaṭāhi dummedha, arahati mallo mallassāti –jīvitaṃ tiṇāyapi na maññamanoti tādatthye catutthi; tiṇena yo attho tadatthāyapīti attho;
Yo ca sitaca uṇhaca tiṇā bhiyyo na namaññati——而谁不将冷与热看作比草更值得在意。巴利
‘‘Yo ca sitaca uṇhaca tiṇā bhiyyo na namaññati‘‘
“Tiṇamiva jīvitaṃ maññamānoti”——词尾各随其境;“saggāya gacchatīti”——于目的义用第四格,因为凡saggaṃ gacchati者,其前往即为此目的——而于kammavavanicchāyaṃ则唯业格——“saggaṃ gacchati”;“āyuṃ bhoto hotu, ciraṃ jīvitaṃ bhaddaṃ kalyāṇaṃ atthaṃ payojanaṃ kusalaṃ anāmayaṃ hitaṃ pathyaṃ sukhaṃ sātaṃ bhoto hotu; sādhu sammuti metassa, puttassāvikareyya guyhamatthaṃ, tassa me sakko pāturahosi, tassa pahiṇeyya, bhikkhūnaṃ dūtaṃ pāhesi, kappati samaṇānaṃ āyogo, ekassa dvinnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vā pahoti, upamaṃ te karissāmi, añjaliṃ te pagaṇhāmi, tassa phāsu, lokassattho, namo te purisājañña, sotthi tassa, alaṃ mallo mallassa, samattho mallo millassa, tassa hitaṃ tassa sukhaṃ, svāgataṃ te mahārājāti”——一切处于关联中为第六格。巴利
Tiṇamiva jīvitaṃ maññamānoti-savisayāva vibhattiyo; saggāya gacchatīti-tādatthye catutthi, yo hi saggaṃ gacchati tadatthaṃ tassa gamananti–-kammavavanicchāyaṃ tu dutiyāva - saggaṃ gacchati; āyuṃ bhoto hotu, ciraṃ jīvitaṃ bhaddaṃ kalyāṇaṃ atthaṃ payojanaṃ kusalaṃ anāmayaṃ hitaṃ pathyaṃ sukhaṃ sātaṃ bhoto hotu; sādhu sammuti metassa, puttassāvikareyya guyhamatthaṃ, tassa me sakko pāturahosi, tassa pahiṇeyya, bhikkhūnaṃ dūtaṃ pāhesi, kappati samaṇānaṃ āyogo, ekassa dvinnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vā pahoti, upamaṃ te karissāmi, añjaliṃ te pagaṇhāmi, tassa phāsu, lokassattho, namo te purisājañña, sotthi tassa, alaṃ mallo mallassa, samattho mallo millassa, tassa hitaṃ tassa sukhaṃ, svāgataṃ te mahārājāti-sabbattha chaṭṭhī sambandhe.
如此,其余类似的,亦当依经教如是了知。巴利
Evaṃ vidhamaññampevaṃ viññeyayyaṃ yathāgamaṃ.
从第五格(从格)起,以 smā 为词尾——巴利
Pañcamyavadhismā-.
从 padattha 起,至 avadhi 为止,为第五格(vibhatti);例如“从 gāma 来”,如是“从 cora 害怕”“从 cora 惊恐”“从 cora 保护”“从 cora 守护”。巴利
Padatthāvadhismā pañcamī vibhatti hoti; gāmasmā āgacchati evaṃ corasmā bhāyati, corasmā uttasati, corasmā tāyati corasmā rakkhatīti.
Savebhāyatha dukkhassa, pamāde bhayadassivā tasanti daṇḍassāti,-chaṭṭhisattamiyo’pi honteva sambandhādhāravavanicchāyaṃ ajjhenā parājeti, paṭipakkhe parājetīti-savīsayāva vibhattiyo; sace kevaṭṭassa parajjissāmīti- chaṭṭhīpi hoti sambandhavavanicchāyaṃ, yavehi gāvo vāreti, pāpā cittaṃ nivāraye, kāke rakkhati taṇḍulāti-savisayeva pañcamī? Cittaṃ rakkhetha medhāvīti-dutiyāva dissati kammatthe; upajjhāyā antaradhāyati, upajjhāyā adhīte; kāmato jāyatī sokoti-savisayeva pañcamī; tatthemichaddhayo’pi honteva savisaye; himacantā pabhavati gaṅgā, pāṇātipātā viramassu khippaṃ, añño devadattā, bhinno devadattāti-samisayeva pañcamī; añño devadattā, bhinno devadattāti-savisayeva pañcami; evaṃ ārā so [ ] āsavakkhayā, itaro devadattā, uddhaṃ pādatalā, adho kesamatthakā, pubbo gāmā, pubbeva sambodhā, tato paraṃ, tato aparena samayena, tatuttarinti, sambandha vacanicchāyaṃ chaṭṭhīpi; purato gāmassa, dakkhiṇato gāmassa, upari pabbatassa, heṭṭhā pāsādassāti;pāsādamāruyha pekkhati, pāsādā pekkhati, āsane upavisitvā pekkhati āsanā pekkhatīti-avadhi vacanicchāyaṃ pañcamī; pucchanakhyānesupi; kuto bhavaṃ, pāṭaliputta smāti; tathā desakālamāne’pi; pāṭaliputtasmā rājagahaṃ satta yojanāni sattasu yojanesūti vā; evamito tiṇṇaṃ māsā namaccayenāti; kicchā laddhantī-guṇe pañcamī; kacchena me adhi gatanti hetumhi karaṇe vā tatiyā; evaṃ thokā mutto, tho kena muttoti, thokaṃ valatīti-kriyāvisesane kammani dutiyā; dūrantikatthayoge’pi savisayeva pañcamīchaṭṭhiyo siyuṃ; dūraṃgāmasmā, antikaṃ gāmasmā, dūraṃ gāmassa, antikaṃ gāmassāti-dūranti katthe hī tu sabbāva savisaye siyuṃ bādhakābhāvā; dūro gāmo, antiko gāmotvevamādi; keci panāhu asattavacanehetehi pāṭipadikatthe dutiyātatiyāpañcamīsattamiyo sattavacanehi tu sabbāva savisayeti; te panaññeheva paṭikkhittā; dūraṃ maggo, antikaṃ maggoti- kriyāvisesanaṃ bhudhātussa gamma mānattā; suddho lobhanīyehi dhammehi, parimutto dukkhasmā, vivicceva kāmehi, gambhīrato ca puthulato ca yojanaṃ, āyāmena yojanaṃ, tatoppabhuti, yato sarāmi attānantī-savisayeva vibhattiyo.巴利
Savebhāyatha dukkhassa, pamāde bhayadassivā tasanti daṇḍassāti,-chaṭṭhisattamiyo’pi honteva sambandhādhāravavanicchāyaṃ ajjhenā parājeti, paṭipakkhe parājetīti-savīsayāva vibhattiyo; sace kevaṭṭassa parajjissāmīti- chaṭṭhīpi hoti sambandhavavanicchāyaṃ, yavehi gāvo vāreti, pāpā cittaṃ nivāraye, kāke rakkhati taṇḍulāti-savisayeva pañcamī? Cittaṃ rakkhetha medhāvīti-dutiyāva dissati kammatthe; upajjhāyā antaradhāyati, upajjhāyā adhīte; kāmato jāyatī sokoti-savisayeva pañcamī; tatthemichaddhayo’pi honteva savisaye; himacantā pabhavati gaṅgā, pāṇātipātā viramassu khippaṃ, añño devadattā, bhinno devadattāti-samisayeva pañcamī; añño devadattā, bhinno devadattāti-savisayeva pañcami; evaṃ ārā so [ ] āsavakkhayā, itaro devadattā, uddhaṃ pādatalā, adho kesamatthakā, pubbo gāmā, pubbeva sambodhā, tato paraṃ, tato aparena samayena, tatuttarinti, sambandha vacanicchāyaṃ chaṭṭhīpi; purato gāmassa, dakkhiṇato gāmassa, upari pabbatassa, heṭṭhā pāsādassāti;pāsādamāruyha pekkhati, pāsādā pekkhati, āsane upavisitvā pekkhati āsanā pekkhatīti-avadhi vacanicchāyaṃ pañcamī; pucchanakhyānesupi; kuto bhavaṃ, pāṭaliputta smāti; tathā desakālamāne’pi; pāṭaliputtasmā rājagahaṃ satta yojanāni sattasu yojanesūti vā; evamito tiṇṇaṃ māsā namaccayenāti; kicchā laddhantī-guṇe pañcamī; kacchena me adhi gatanti hetumhi karaṇe vā tatiyā; evaṃ thokā mutto, tho kena muttoti, thokaṃ valatīti-kriyāvisesane kammani dutiyā; dūrantikatthayoge’pi savisayeva pañcamīchaṭṭhiyo siyuṃ; dūraṃgāmasmā, antikaṃ gāmasmā, dūraṃ gāmassa, antikaṃ gāmassāti-dūranti katthe hī tu sabbāva savisaye siyuṃ bādhakābhāvā; dūro gāmo, antiko gāmotvevamādi; keci panāhu asattavacanehetehi pāṭipadikatthe dutiyātatiyāpañcamīsattamiyo sattavacanehi tu sabbāva savisayeti; te panaññeheva paṭikkhittā; dūraṃ maggo, antikaṃ maggoti- kriyāvisesanaṃ bhudhātussa gamma mānattā; suddho lobhanīyehi dhammehi, parimutto dukkhasmā, vivicceva kāmehi, gambhīrato ca puthulato ca yojanaṃ, āyāmena yojanaṃ, tatoppabhuti, yato sarāmi attānantī-savisayeva vibhattiyo.
与apa、pari连用时,表示排除——巴利
Apaparīhi vajjane-.
当表达远离义,与“不亲近”等词连用时,为第五转声(从格)。例如:商人们从厅外来,商人们从厅前附近来,这是“避开大厅”的意思。问:何为远避?如闪电周遍照亮树木(远离而照),如“除华氏城以外下雨”——此属界限与区别义中的第五转声,即“不以华氏城相伴”之别异。如此,乃至“除华氏城以外下雨”。巴利
Vajjane vattamānehi apaparīhi yoge pañcamī hoti; apasālāya āyanti vāṇijā, parisālāya āyanti vāṇijā, sālaṃ vajjetvāti attho; vajjaneti kiṃ? Rukkhaṃ parivijjotate vijju, āpāṭaliputtasmā vassi devoti-mariyādābhividhimhiyeva pañcama, vinā pāṭalaputtena saha veti-viseso; evaṃ yāva pāṭaliputtasma vassi devoti.
于替代与回赠之义中,用pati——。巴利
Paṭinidhipaṭidānesu patinā-.
当“paṭi”(对、向、从)与表示代替(paṭinidhi)和回赠(paṭidāna)的动词连用时,从名词起用第五格(从格);如“buddhasmā pati sāriputto”(从佛那里,舍利弗),“ghatamassa telasmā pati dadāti”(为他从油中取壶/以油给他)。那么“代替与回赠”是什么意思呢?如“rukkhaṃ pati vippotate”(对树而言,枝叶散开)。巴利
Paṭinidhimhi paṭidāne ca vattamānena patinā yoge nāmasmā pañcamī vibhatti hoti; buddhasmā pati sāriputto, ghatamassa telasmā pati dadāti, paṭinidhipaṭidānesūti-kiṃ? Rukkhaṃ pati vippotate.
则第二格之用亦同,巴利
Rite dutiyā ca-
与 rite 一词连用时,名词有第二格和第五格:rite saddhammaṃ——rite saddhammā。巴利
Rite saddena yoge nāmasmā dutiyā hoti pañcamī ca rite saddhammaṃ, rite saddhammā.
Vināññatra 第三格也——巴利
Vināññatra tatiyā ca-.
与 vinā(除非、离开)和 aññatra(除了……之外)等词结合时,名词可用第三格,也可用第二格和第五格;例如:vinā vātena(除非有风)、vinā vātaṃ(除非有风)、vinā vātasmā(除非有风)、aññatra ekena piṇḍapātanīhārakena(除了一个捻钵行者之外)、aññatra dhammaṃ(除了法之外)、aññatra dhammā(除了法之外)。巴利
Vināññatrasaddehi yoge nāmasmā tatiyā ca hoti, dutiyāpañcamiyo ca; vinā vātena, vinā vātaṃ, vinā vātasmā, aññatra ekena piṇḍapātanīhārakena, aññatra dhammaṃ, aññatra dhammā.
putha、nānā、hi——。巴利
Puthanānāhi-.
与这些词连用时,用第三格和第五格;puthageva janena、puthageva janasmā、janena nānā、jasanmā nānā。巴利
Etehi yoge tatiyā hoti pañcamī ca; puthageva janena, puthageva janasmā, janena nānā, jasanmā nānā.
第七依格(处所)……巴利
Sattamyādhāre-.
行为所依的基础,即行为的支撑者,此中依处为第七格:坐于席上,于锅中煮饭,鸟在空中,芝麻中有油,恒河岸上有村落。巴利
Kriyādhārabhutakattukammānaṃ dhāraṇena yo kriyāyādhāro tasmiṃ kārake nāmasmā sattami hoti; kaṭe nisīdati, thāliyaṃ odanaṃ pacati, ākāse sakuṇā, tilesu telaṃ, gaṅgāyaṃ vajo.
于表相之义,第七格;ajinamhi haññate dīpi,musā vāde pācittiyaṃ。巴利
Nimittatthe sattamī hoti; ajinamhi haññate dīpi, musā vāde pācittiyaṃ.
某一状态之存在,即另一状态之相。巴利
Yabbhāvo bhāvalakkhaṇaṃ-.
当某一状态成为另一状态的标志时,此处即为第七格。例如:“众牛正被挤乳时离去,已挤毕时返回。”什么是状态?“那留辫者在进食。”什么是状态标志?“进食者正是提婆达多?”
“非时而雨,应时而不雨”——这便是境界第七格。巴利
Yassa bhāvo bhāvantarassa lakkhaṇaṃ bhavati tato sattamī hoti; gāvīsu duyhamānāsu gato, duddhāsu āgato; bhāvoti kiṃ? Yo jaṭāhi sa bhuñjati; bhāvalakkhaṇanti kiṃ;yo bhujate so devadatto? Akāle vassati tassa, kāle tassa na vassatīti-visayasattamī.
第六格亦用于不敬。巴利
Chaṭṭhī cānādare-.
若某一种状态的存在,成为另一种状态的标志,则于此用第六格;若以不尊重义而转时,则为第七格。巴利
Yassa bhāvo bhāvantarassa lakkhaṇaṃ bhavati tato chaṭṭhī bhavati sattamī cānādare gamyāne.
他一面捶打,一面牵着他离去,当 sivirājassa 正在看时;
Maccu gacchati ādāya pekkhamāne mahājane——死神在大众注视着的时候将他带走。巴利
‘‘Ākoṭayanto so neti sivirājassa pekkhato; Maccu gacchati ādāya pekkhamāne mahājane.
“牛群的主人”这一关系中用第六格,“于牛群中为主人”这一领域中用第七格。如是,“牛群的主宰者”与“于牛群中为主宰者”,“牛群的统领”与“于牛群中为统领”,“牛群的继承者”与“于牛群中为继承者”,“牛群的证人”与“于牛群中为证人”,“牛群的担保人”与“于牛群中为担保人”,“牛群的随从”与“于牛群中为随从”,“擅长舞蹈歌唱者”与“于舞蹈歌唱中擅长者”,“致力于制作席子者”与“于制作席子中致力于者”。同样,表达处所之义时亦用第七格:于比丘众中礼敬、亲吻额头、握住手臂、于手中持钵乞食、于道路上行走、于芭蕉林中守护大象;于智慧中净信,这是领域第七格;以智慧净信,这是具格第三格;如是,于智慧中精勤、以智慧精勤。巴利
Gunnaṃ sāmīti-sambandhe chaṭṭhī, geṃsu sāmīti visayasattamī, evaṃ gunnamissaro gosissaro, gunnaṃ adhipati gosu adhipati, gunnaṃ dāyādo gosu dāyādo gunnaṃ sakkhi gosu sakkhi, gunnaṃ patibhu gosupatibhu, gunnaṃ pasūto gosu pasūto, kusalā naccagītassa kusalā naccagīte, āyutto kaṭakaraṇassa āyutto kaṭakaraṇe, tathādhāravacanicchāyaṃ pattamī; bhikkhusu abhivādenti, muddhani cumbitvā, bāhāsu gahetvā, hatthesu piddhāya caranti, pathesu gacchanti, kadalīsu gaje rakkhantīti; ñāṇasmiṃ pasannotivisayasattamī; ñāṇena pasannoti-karaṇe tatiyā; evaṃ ñāṇasmiṃ ussukko ñāṇena ussukkoti.
从……之中简择——巴利
Yato niddhāraṇaṃ-.
由种姓、功德、行为等,从集合体中区分出某一部分,即称为niddhāraṇa。由彼作此区分,由此生起第六格与第七格;sāliyo sūkadhaññānaṃ pathyatamā,sāliyo sūkadhaññesu pathyatamā,kaṇhā gāvīnaṃ sampannakhīratamā,kaṇhā gāvīsu sampannakhīratamā,gacchataṃ dhāvanto sīghatamā,gacchantesu dhāvanto sīghatamā——sīlameva sutā seyyoti——于avadhi义即为第五格。巴利
Jātiguṇakriyāhi samudāyatekadesassa puthakkaraṇaṃ niddhāraṇaṃ yato taṃ karīyati tato chaṭṭhīsattamiyo honti; sāliyo sūkadhaññānaṃ pathyatamā sāliyo sūkadhaññesu pathya tamā,kaṇbhā gāvīnaṃ sampannakhīratamā kaṇhā gāvīsu sampanna khīratamā, gacchataṃ dhāvanto sīghatamā gacchantesu dhāvanto sīghatamā –- sīlameva sutā seyyoti-avadhimhiyeva pañcamī.
于第一义之范围内——巴利
Paṭhamātthamante -.
名词仅表称谓之义时,即是第一格;rukkho、itthi、pumā、napuṃsaka——此性别亦唯是词义;同样,doṇo、khārī、āḷahaka——此容量亦唯是词义;eko、dve、bahavo——此数目亦唯是词义。巴利
Nāmasmābhidheyyamatte paṭhamāvibhatti hoti; rukkho, itthi, pumā napuṃsakanti-liṅgampi saddotthova, tathā doṇo, khārī āḷahakanti-parimāṇampi saddatthova, eko, dve, bahavoti-saṃkhyyāpi saddatthova.
因此,以声音引人注意而作召唤,此义用第一格表示;如“喂,男人”“喂,女人”“喂,非男非女者”。第六格用于关系。巴利
Yato saddenābhimukhīkaraṇamāmantaṇaṃ tasmiṃ visaye paṭhamā vibhatti hoti; bho purisa, bho itthi, bho napuṃsaka. Chaṭṭhī sambandhe-.
由动作与施事者所生、以此为因的关联,名为关系,此时使用第六格。如“国王的人”、“他忆念国王的统治”。此处关系格即指“国王的人”,意为“与国王相关的记忆”。若表达动作的对象,则用第二格。如“他忆念王国”;又如“给洗衣工衣服”、“给打击者以背”、“愚人充满罪恶”。巴利
Kriyākārakasañjāto assedambhāvahetuko sambandho nāma tasmiṃ chaṭṭhīvibhatti hoti; rañño puriso, sarati rajjassāti- sambandhe kṭṭhī, rajajjasambandhiniṃ satiṃ karotīti attho; kammavacanicchāyantu dutiyāva; sarati rajjaṃ, tathā rajakassa vatthaṃ dadāti, paharatopiṭṭhiṃ dadāti pūrati bālo pāpassa,
“儿啊,你要认识那些大臣——坚毅者、通达义利者。”巴利
‘‘Amacce tāta jānāhi dhīre atthassa kovide’’
如一日三时、半月一次,又如盛满黄金纯金之罐等。巴利
Divasassa tijhattuṃ, sakiṃ pakkhassa, pūraṃ hiraññasuvaṇṇassa kumbhiṃ tvevamādi.
于已作成分词结构中,当欲表达与作者及业之关联时,多用第六格;例如:sādhu sammato bahujanassa、suppaṭividdhā buddhānaṃ dhammadhātu、dhammassa gutto medhāvī、amataṃ tesaṃ paribhuttaṃ、tassabhavanti vattāro、avisaṃvādako lokassa、alajjīnaṃ nissāya、catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃupādāya pasādotvevamādi;若欲表达作者与业之义,则唯用第三格或第二格,例如:sañcatto pitarā ahaṃ、sarasi tvaṃ evarūpiṃ vācā bhāsitā、bhagavantaṃ dassanāyatthemādi。巴利
Kitakappayoge kattukammesu bahulaṃ sambandhavacanicchāyaṃ chaṭṭhī; sādhu sammato bahujanassa, suppaṭividdhā buddhānaṃ dhammadhātu, dhammassa gutto medhāvī, amataṃ tesaṃ paribhuttaṃ, tassabhavanti vattāro, avisaṃvādako lokassa, alajjīnaṃ nissāya, catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃupādāya pasādotvevamādi; kattukamma vacanicchāyantu tatiyādutiyāyova sañcatto pitarā ahaṃ, sarasi tvaṃ evarūpiṃ vācā bhāsitā, bhagavantaṃ dassanāyatthemādi.
或以同义而用第三格。巴利
Tulyatthena vā tatiyā-.
与表示“相等”义的词连用时,用第六格或第三格;tulyo pitu、tulyo pitarā;sadiso pitu、sadiso pitarā——此处为何不用第三格;ajjunassa tulā natthi, kesavassupamā na ceti nete tulyatthā, kiṃ carahi; tulyānamopammatthā.巴利
Tulyatthena yoge chaṭṭhī hoti tatiyā vā; tulyo pitu, tulyo pitarā; sadiso pitu, sadiso pitarā –-iha kathaṃ tatiyayā na hoti; ajjunassa tulā natthi, kesavassupamā nacetinete lyatthā kiṃ carahi; tulyānamopammatthā.
以 a 结尾者,其词尾 yo 与 naṃ 变为 ā 与 e——。巴利
Aato yonaṃ ṭāṭe-.
从以-a结尾的名词(构成-yo复数主格)时,词干末尾的-a按顺序被-ā替换,一切皆如此;如buddhā、buddhe等。那么(问:)为何(不说)ato?——如kaññāyo(少女们)、itthiyo(女人们)、vadhuyo(媳妇们)。此处为何不出现aggayo?因为没有(构成该形的)规则能力。巴利
Akārantato nāmasmā yonaṃ ṭāṭe honti yathākkamaṃ ṭakārā sabbādesatthā; buddhā, buddhe, atoti-kiṃ? Kaññāyo itthiyo, vadhuyo –- idha kasmā na bhavati aggayo, avidhāna sāmatthiyā.
对于 nī 的〔替换〕可有——巴利
Nīnaṃ vā-.
从以-kāra结尾的名词,nīnaṃ 与 ṭāṭe 可(vā)依 yathākkaṃ 规则替换;rūpā、rūpe、rūpāni;ato 词干者亦然——aṭṭhīni。巴利
Kārantato nāmasmā nīnaṃ ṭāṭe vā honti yathākka maṃ; rūpā, rūpe, rūpāni; atottheva-aṭṭhīni.
smā 与 smiṃ 的——。巴利
Smāsminnaṃ-.
以a结尾的名词词干之后,smā与smiṃ可依序替换为ṭā与ṭe;buddhā、buddhasmā、buddhe、buddhasmiṃ;同样地——aggismā aggismiṃ。巴利
Akārantato nāmasmā smāsminnaṃ ṭāṭe vā honti yathākkamaṃ; buddhā, buddhasmā, buddhe, buddhasmiṃ; atotveva-aggīsmā aggismiṃ.
属格转为第四格(为格)之例——巴利
Sassāya catutthiyā-.
以a结尾的词干之后,第四格的ssa可替换为āya;buddhāya、buddhassa。通常,此āya只见于表示目的义的场合,偶尔也见于其他情况;isissa的情况也是如此。为何要说明“第四格”?Buddhassa mukhaṃ——attattha,此词由attha一词构成复合词。从sabba等一切词之后,在smā、smiṃ、sānaṃ处,可替换为ṭā、ṭñā、āya。由于随顺Niruttikāra之说,且于buddha之语中可见,故于此即是例证?——巴利
Akārantato parassa sassa catutthiyā āyo hoti vā; buddhāya, buddhassa, bhiyyo tādatthyeyevāyamāyo dissate kvavi devaññattha; atotveva-isissa; catutthiyāti-kiṃ? Buddhassa mukhaṃ –- attatthanti atthasaddena samāso; sabbādito’pi smāsmiṃ sānaṃ ṭāṭñāyā honteva. Niruttikārānumatattā buddha vacane sandassanato va-tatredamudāharaṇaṃ?-
“从此世间与他世间,此人于两处皆败坏”,“我于彼处因慢而固执”;“你们正是为了哪个目的而来,就应当善加作意那个目的”。巴利
‘‘Asmā lokā paramhā ca ubhayā dhaṃsate naro‘‘tyāhaṃ mante paratthaddho; yāyeva kho panatthāya āgaccheyyātho; tamevatthaṃ sādhukaṃ manasi kareyyāthoti.
于gha类及pa类各自的单数依格中,将sa等词尾替换为ya等词尾──巴利
Ghapatekasmiṃ sādīnaṃ yayā-.
以gha、pa结尾的词干,在单数中,将nā等词尾依次替换为yā;例如:kaññāya、rattiyā、itthiyā、dhenuyā、vadhuyā。为何单数?因为复数为kaññāhi、rattīhi。巴利
Ghapato nādīnamekasmiṃ yayā honti yathākkamaṃ; kaññāya, rattiyā, itthiyā, dhenuyā, vadhuyā; ekasmintikiṃ?Kaññāhi, rattīhi.
于 tā、etā、imā、amū 之后,可替换为 ssā。巴利
Ssā vā tetimāmūhi-.
对于以gha和pa结尾的(词干),在te、ti、mā、mū之后,若非nādī(阴性词干),于单数时,ssā可(vā)有;tassā kataṃ、tassā dīyate、tassā nissaṭaṃ、tassā pariggaho、tassā patiṭṭhitaṃ,或tāya;同样地,etissā、etāya、imissā、imāya、amussā、amuyā;“这些之后”是什么意思?sabbāya;若非nādī——sā;若非gha和pa结尾——tāhi、amūhi。巴利
Ghapasaññehi tetimāmūhi nādīnamekasmiṃ ssā vā hoti; tassā kataṃ, tassā dīyate, tassā nissaṭaṃ, tassā pariggaho, tassā patiṭṭhitaṃ, tāya vā; evaṃ etissā, etāya, imissā, imāya, amussā, amuyā; etehīti-kiṃ? Sabbāya, nādīnaṃtveva-sā, ghapatotvevatena, ekasmiṃtveca-tāhi, amūhi.
在 namhi 与 nuka 中,dvādanaṃ 等的十七种情况——巴利
Namhi nuka dvādanaṃ sattarasannaṃ-.
Dvā 等直至 sattarasanna 的数词,在 namhi 词尾之前,nuka 发生;dvinnaṃ、catunnaṃ、pañcannaṃ,如此乃至 aṭṭhārasannaṃ;字母 u 为发音之用,字母 k 为词干末尾的组成部分,因此于 namhi 之前不发生长音化。巴利
Dvādīnaṃ sattarasannaṃ saṃkhyānaṃ nuka hoti namhi vibhattimhi; dvinnaṃ, catunnaṃ, pañcannaṃ, evaṃ yāva aṭṭhārasannaṃ; ukāro uccāraṇattho, kakāro antāvayavattho, tenanamhi na dīgho.
Bahukatinnaṃ——巴利
Bahukatinnaṃ-.
于naṃ词尾之前,bahuna与katissa的词干有sukaka?——bahunnaṃ、katinnaṃ。巴利
Namhi bahuno katissa ca sukaka hoti? Bahunnaṃ, katinnaṃ.
Ṇṇaṃṇṇannaṃ 于 ti 后 jjhā——。巴利
Ṇṇaṃṇṇannaṃ titojjhā-.
Jhasaññā 时,从 ti 起的 naṃ 词尾变为 ṇṇaṃṇṇannaṃ;tiṇṇaṃ、tiṇṇannaṃ。jhā 是什么意思?Tissannaṃ。巴利
Jhasaññā tito naṃvacanassa ṇṇaṃṇṇannaṃ honti; tiṇṇaṃ, tiṇṇannaṃ, jhāti-kiṃ?Tissannaṃ.
ubhā 的 naṃ 语尾变为 innaṃ;即 ubhinnaṃ。巴利
Ubhā naṃvacanassa innaṃ hoti; ubhinnaṃ.
名词之后的“ssa”即表简略;如“buddhassa”以双“s”音节的读法而得成立,此为略义。巴利
Nāmasmā sassa suña hoti; buddhassa–-dvisakārapāṭhena siddhe lāghavatthamidaṃ.
于ssaṃ、ssā、ssāya、esvi、itara、ekañña、etimāna 之后为 i-。巴利
Ssaṃssāssāyesvitarekaññetimānami-.
此句以“ssamādisvitarādīnami”为起始,表明代词依不同形态而有多样形式,如:itarissaṃ、itarissā、ekissaṃ、ekissā、aññassaṃ、aññassā、etissaṃ、etissāya、imissaṃ、imissā、imassāya。“esviti”是何义?即 itarāya 等。“esanti”是何义?即 sabbassaṃ、sabbassā。巴利
Ssamādisvitarādīnami hoti; itarissaṃ, itarissā, ekissaṃ, ekissā, aññassaṃ, aññassā, etissaṃ, etissāya, imissaṃ, imissā, imassāya; esviti-kiṃ? Itarāya, esanti-kiṃ? Sabbassaṃ, sabbassā.
“Ssamādisu tassā vā i hoti”说明在ssa等词尾之后,tassā(阴性代词词干)的ā有时变为i,例如tissaṃ、tassaṃ、tissā、tassā、tissāya、tassāya;ssaṃ、ssā、ssāya等词尾处即如此。巴利
Ssamādisu tassā vā i hoti; tissaṃ, tassaṃ, tissā, tassā, tissāya, tassāya; ssaṃssāssāyesvitveva-tāya.
于 tā、etā、imā 之后,yassa 变为 ssāya——巴利
Tetimāto yassa ssāya-.
“tā、etā、imā”等词的属格或与格词尾“ssa”可变为“ssāya”;其变格形式为:tassāya(她的/为她)、tāya(她的/为她)、etissāya(这女人的/为这女人)、etāya(这女人的/为这女人)、imissāya(此女人的/为此女人)、imāya(此女人的/为此女人)。巴利
Tāetāimāto sassassāyo hoti vā; tassāya, tāya, etissāya, etāya, imissāya, imāya.
从 rati 等词之后,smiṃ 变为 ṭo——巴利
Ratyādīhi ṭo smino-.
“Ratyādīhi smino ṭo hoti vā”:对于“rati”等以“i”结尾的阴性名词,其处格词尾“smiṃ”可选择性地变为“ṭo”。具体变化形式为:ratto(“欢喜”的处格)、rattiyaṃ(“欢喜”的处格)、ādo(“贪欲”的处格)、ādismiṃ(“贪欲”的处格)。巴利
Ratyādīhi smino ṭo hoti vā; ratto, rattiyaṃ, ādo, ādismiṃ.
suhisubhasso——巴利
Suhisubhasso-.
“ubha”(两者)一词,在复数处格词尾“su”及复数工具格、离格词尾“hi”之前,词干变为“ubho”;其变格形式为:ubhosu(在两者中)、ubhohi(由两者/以两者)。巴利
Ubhassa suhisvo hoti; ubhosu, ubhohi.
以ltu及pitā等结尾的词,于si词尾时——巴利
Ltupitādīnamā simhi-.
以-latup后缀结尾的词以及pitu等词,于simhi(主格单数)中成为ā;kattā、pitā;pitu、mātu、bhātu、dhītu、duhitu、jāmātu、nattu、hotu、potu。巴利
Latuppaccayantānaṃ pitādīnañcā hoti simhi; kattā pitā; pitu mātu bhātu dhītu duhitu jāmātu nattu hotu potu.
以 ltu 为后缀的词及 pitu 等词,在呼格中词尾变为 a,亦可变为 ā;bho katta、bho kattā、bho pita、bho pitā。巴利
Latupitādīnaṃ a hoti ge ā ca; bho katta, bho kattā, bho pita, bho pitā.
āyu 等词的〔末尾〕或为长音——巴利
Ayūnaṃ vā dīgho-.
A、i、u 这些〔词尾〕,当呼格词尾紧随其后时,于三性中可变为长音;bho purisā, bho purisa, bho aggī, bho aggi, bho bhikkhū, bho bhikkhū.巴利
A i u iccesaṃ vā dīgho hoti ge pare tiliṅge; bho purisā, bho purisa, bho aggī, bho aggi, bho bhikkhū, bho bhikkhū.
于 gha、brahma 等之后——巴利
Ghabrahmādite-.
于gha之后,及brahma等词之后,呼格词尾ga有时变为e;成为hoti kaññe、hoti kaññā、bho brahme、bho brahma、bho katte、bho katta、bho ise、bho isi、bho sakhe、bho sakha——sakhi、sakhī,于阴性中则依常规推导即成;此为不规则词群;余处亦依此类推。巴利
Ghato brahmādito ca gasse vā hoti; hoti kaññe, hoti kaññā, bho brahme, bho brahma, bho katte, bho katta,bho ise, bho isi, bho sakhe, bho sakha –- sakhi sakhīti-itthiyaṃ siddhameva; ākatigaṇoyaṃ; evamaññatrāpi.
以 amma 等词,有 gassa 变化;bhoti ammā;bhoti annā,bhoti ambā。巴利
Ammādīhi gassena hoti; bhoti ammā; bhoti annā, bhoti ambā.
以 amma 等词的 ge 为短音,可;bhoti amma,bhoti ammā。巴利
Ammādīnaṃ ge rasso hoti vā; bhoti amma, bhoti ammā.
gho 在 ssaṃ、ssā、ssāyaṃ、tiṃsu 之前——巴利
Gho ssaṃssāssāyaṃtiṃsu-.
在“ssaṃ”等格词尾前,“gha”类名词(即以长“ā”结尾的阴性名词)词根元音缩短;例如:tassaṃ、tassā、tassāya、taṃ,以及与 sabhati 连用的诸形式——(问:)“esviti-kiṃ”(即“在诸格词尾中”这一限制)用意何在?是为了排除 tāya、sahāya 等(这些虽属相关格形式,但不在缩短规则适用范围之内)。巴利
Ssamādisu gho rasso hoti; tassaṃ, tassā, tassāya, taṃ, sabhatiṃ –-esviti-kiṃ? Tāya, sahāya.
于单数及双数中,gho 的〔词尾〕——巴利
Ekavacanayosvaghonaṃ-.
在单数格尾(而非复数格尾“yo”等所适用的场合),凡非“gha”类(即不以长“ā”结尾)的名词,不论何种性(阴性、阳性、中性),其词干在相关格尾前皆变为短音。例如:“itthi”类——“itthiṃ”(宾格单数)、“itthiyā”(与格/离格单数)、“itthiyo”(主格复数);“vadhu”类——“vadhuṃ”、“vadhuyā”、“vadhuyo”;“daddhi”类——“daddhinā”(具格单数)、“daddhino”(属格单数)等;“sayambhu”类——“sayambhuṃ”、“sayambhunā”、“sayambhuvo”。此处特别指明“非gha类(agho)”是何用意?是为了排除像“kaññāya”、“kaññāyo”这样以长“ā”结尾的阴性名词(因其属于“gha”类,故不适用此缩短规则)。提出这一规则,是为了便于统摄后续诸项规定。巴利
Ekavacane yosuva ghaokārantavajjitānaṃ nāmānaṃ rassohoti tiliṅge; itthiṃ, itthiyā, itthiyo, vadhuṃ, vadhuyā, vadhuyo; daddhiṃ, daddhinā, daddhino, sayambhuṃ, sayamabhunā, sayamabhuvo –- aghonanti-kiṃ? Kaññāya, kaññāyo; oggahaṇamuttaratthaṃ.
不以gha结尾者,于三性呼格ge中,可变为短音。Itthi、itthī、vadhu、vadhū、daddhi、daddhī、sayambhu、sayambhū——唯不以gha结尾者——kaññā、bho go。巴利
Aghonaṃ ge vā rasso hoti tiliṅge?Itthi, itthi, vadhu, vadhu,daddhi, daddhī, sayambhu, sayambhu –- aghonaṃtveva-hoti kaññā, bho go.
“si”位格,不别性别。巴利
Sismiṃ nānapuṃsakassa-.
非中性名词的 si 词尾不变短。itthi、daddhī、vadhū、sayambhu——为何说“si”?itthiṃ。为何说“非中性”?daddhi、kulaṃ。巴利
Napuṃsakavajjitassa nāmassa sismiṃ rasso na hoti. Itthi, daddhī, vadhū, sayambhu –-sisminti-kiṃ?Itthiṃ, anapuṃsakassāti-kiṃ. Daddhi, kulaṃ.
go 在 ssa、smiṃ、hiṃ、naṃ、su 前,变为 gāva、gava——巴利
Gossāgasihinaṃsu gāvagavā-.
于除 si 与 naṃ 以外的诸词尾中,go 一词有 gāva、gava 二形;gāvo、gavo、gāvena、gavena、gāvassa、gavassa、gāvasmā、gavasmā、gāve、gave;除 si 与 naṃ 以外者何?Bho go、go tiṭṭhati、gohi、gonaṃ。巴利
Gasihinaṃ cajjitāsu vibhattisu gosaddassa gāvagavā honti; gāvo, gavo, gāvena, gavena, gāvassa, gavassa, gāvasmā, gavasmā, gāve, gave; agasihinaṃsūti-kiṃ? Bho go go tiṭṭhati, gohi, gonaṃ.
go 的 sumhi 处,gāva、gava 可(vā)成为——gāvesu、gavesu、gosu。巴利
Gossa sumhi gāvagavā honti vā; gāvesu, gavesu, gosu.
Gavaṃ sena——。巴利
Gavaṃ sena-.
‘牛’字的属格单数为 gavaṃ,与‘群’(sena)连用;其形式有 gavaṃ、gāvassa、gavassa。巴利
Gossa se vā gavaṃ hoti saha sena; gavaṃ, gāvassa, gavassa.
与gossa相连时,依naṃ变化,成为gunnaṃ——巴利
Gunnava naṃnā-.
“牛”(go)字与对格复数词尾 -naṃ 连用时,词根变为 gunna- 或 gava-;其形式有 gunnaṃ、gavaṃ、gonaṃ(皆为对格或属格复数)。巴利
Naṃvacanena saha gossa gunnaṃ hoti gavañca vā; gunnaṃ, gavaṃ, gonaṃ.
凡“牛”(go)字,其词根 o 音在某些格位可随意变为 ā,即 go 变为 gāva-;其形式有:gāvā、gavā(主格复数);gāvena、gavena(工具格单数)。巴利
Goto nāssa ā hoti vā; gāvā, gavā, gāvena, gavena.
于业格单数,go 可成为 gāvu;gāvuṃ、gāvaṃ、gavaṃ——go 未作 goṇa 替换,因属不同词形之故。巴利
Aṃvacane gossa gāvu vā hoti; gāvuṃ, gāvaṃ, gavaṃ–-gossa goṇādeso na kato saddantarattā.
在 pito 之后为 Yaṃ——。巴利
Yaṃ pito-.
Pasaññīto:以 aṃ 结尾的词可转为 yaṃ 或 vā;itthiyaṃ、itthiṃ——pitoti 是什么?Daddhiṃ、rattiṃ。巴利
Pasaññīto aṃvacanassa yaṃ vā hoti; itthiyaṃ, itthiṃ–-pitoti-kiṃ?Daddhiṃ, rattiṃ.
于 jhī 之后为 naṃ。巴利
Naṃ jhīto-.
jhasaññīto 的 aṃ 语尾,其替换形式为 naṃ 或 vā;daddhinaṃ、daddhiṃ——如何?buddhaṃ ādiccabandhun 由连声法则所致;jhāti——何者?itthiṃ,īto——何者?aggiṃ巴利
Jhasaññīto aṃvacanassa naṃ vā hoti; daddhinaṃ, daddhiṃ–- kathaṃ? Buddhaṃ ādiccabandhunanti-yogavibhāgā; jhāti-kiṃ? Itthiṃ, ītoti -kiṃ?Aggiṃ
阳性中,yonaṃ 变为 none。巴利
Yonaṃ none pume-.
jhito 与 yonaṃ 或 none 依次在阳性中成为——daddhino、daddhine、daddhī——jhīto 亦然,如 aggi;puma 指什么?daddhīni、kulāni。巴利
Jhito yonaṃ none vā honti yathākkamaṃ pulliṅge, daddhino, daddhine, daddhī–-jhītotveva aggī; pumeti-kiṃ?Daddhīni, kulāni.
(格尾)在阳性的“jhita”之后,属格复数词尾“naṃ”可替换为“no”,亦可不替换。例如:daddhino tiṭṭhanti(诸酸乳站立)、daddhino passa(看那些酸乳);或仍取原形 daddhī。巴利
Jhito yonaṃ no vā hoti pulliṅge; daddhino tiṭṭhanti, daddhino passa, daddhī vā.
在“jhita”词干之后,离格单数语尾“smiṃ”可替换成“ni”,亦可不替换,例如 daddhinī、daddhismiṃ。然而,同属“jhita”类的 aggismiṃ(从火/在火中)则保持原形,不作替换。巴利
Jhito smiṃvacanassa ni hoti vā; daddhinī, daddhismiṃ, jhito tveva-aggismiṃ.
Ambavādīhi——巴利
Ambavādīhi-.
由 ambu 等词,smiṃ 的词尾可替换为 ni 或 vā;例如“果实落于水中”(phalaṃ patati ambuni),“如同莲花在烈日下落在尘土中”(padumaṃ yathā paṃsuni ātape kataṃ);那么,若是 vā 呢——ambumha、paṃsumhi。巴利
Ambuādīhi smino ni hoti vā; phalaṃ patati ambuni,’padumaṃ yathā paṃsuni ātape kataṃ’, vātveva-ambumha, paṃsumhi.
从kamma等词之后——巴利
Kammādito-.
从kamma等开始,smin变为ni,亦可无;kammanī,kamme;kamma camma vesma bhasma brahma atta ātuma ghamma muddha——从kamma等开始,为何?Buddhe。巴利
Kammādito smino ni hoti vā; kammanī, kamme; kamma camma vesma bhasma brahma atta ātuma ghamma muddha–-kammāditoti-kiṃ? Buddhe.
nā 的 assa 替换为 eno——。巴利
Nāsseno-.
从kamma等词干起始,以nā结尾的语形,其语尾变为ena,亦可不变;kammena、kammanā、cammena、cammanā——唯从kamma等词干起始——buddhena。巴利
Kammādito nāvavanassa eno vā hoti; kammena, kammanā, cammena, cammanā–-kammāditotveva-buddhena.
以 jha 或 la 结尾的词干,assa 变为 no——巴利
Jhalā sassa no-.
以jha等结尾的词,其ssa可变为no;aggino、aggissa、daddhino、daddhissa、bhikkhuno、bhikkhussa、sayambhuno、sayambhussa——如何?“Yo vā sisso mahāmune”如此。巴利
Jhalato sassa no vā hoti; aggino, aggissa, daddhino daddhissa, bhikkhuno, bhikkhussa, sayambhuno, sayambhussa–-kathaṃ?’Yo vā sisso mahāmune’ti.
从此以后,kvavī 的 ssa 是 ṭa 随字——巴利
Ito kvavī sassa ṭānubandheti -()
自此之后,sassa 的 ṭ 随附于 e——Brahmā 等词中,sassa 的 ṭ 随附于 e。巴利
Brahmādisu pāṭhā sassa e ṭānubandho.
以 jha 等结尾的词,smā 的 ssa 变为 nā,或可有可无;agginā、aggismā、daddhinā、daddhismā、bhikkhunā、bhikkhusmā、sayambhunā、sayambhusmā。巴利
Jhalato smāssa nā hoti vā; aagginā aggismā daddhinā, daddhismā, bhikkhunā, bhikkhusmā, sayambhunā, sayambhusmā.
在阳性中,于 Lā 之后,yonaṃ 变为 vo——巴利
Lā yonaṃ vo pume-.
以 la 等结尾的阳性词,yo 可变为 naṃ 和 vo,亦可不变;bhikkhavo, bhikkhū, sayambhuvo, sayambhu——若问何以特指阳性?Āyūni。巴利
Lato yonaṃ vo hoti vā palliṅge; bhikkhavo, bhikkhū, sayambhuvo, sayambhu–-pumeti-kiṃ?Āyūni.
从 janatvā 等词之后,no 也(替换);巴利
Janatvādito no ca-.
对于以jantu等结尾的词干,阳性中,属格复数词尾naṃ变为no,或变为vo;jantuno, jantavo, jantuyo, gotrabhuno, gotrabhuvo, gotrabhaa, sahabhuno, sahabhuvo, sahabhu。巴利
Jantvādito yonaṃ no hoti vo ca vā pulliṅge; jantuno, jantavo, jantuyo, gotrabhuno, gotrabhuvo, gotrabhaa, sahabhuno, sahabhuvo, sahabhu.
在以 kuppaccaya 结尾的词干后面,若为阳性,yonaṃ 的 no 可(vā)出现;viduno——vidū,viññuno——viñña,sabbaññuno——sabbañña。巴利
Kuppaccayantato yonaṃ no vā hoti pulliṅge; viduno, vidū, viññuno, viñña, sabbaññuno, sabbañña.
于 amusmā 有脱落——巴利
Lopo’musmā-.
从 amu 之后,属格复数词尾 naṃ 脱落,唯于阳性;amū 仅于阳性——amuyo、amūni;此乃 vo 替换之规则。巴利
Amusaddato yonaṃ lopova hoti pulliṅge; amū pumetveva-amuyo,amūni; vo’pavādā’yaṃ.
属格单数词尾“ssa”之前,不进行“no”的替换。巴利
Na no sassa-.
在 Amusmā 之后,sassa 不成为 na;amussa。若问“不”指什么?amuyā。巴利
Amusmā sassa no na hoti; amussa, noti-kiṃ? Amuyā.
在 yo 省略及 nisu 之前,元音变长。巴利
Yolopanisu dīgho-.
当〔yo〕格词尾省略时,〔ni〕词基及类似词基的末元音延长为长音;例如:aṭṭhi(骨,单数主格)、aṭṭhīni(诸骨,复数主格)。为何限定‘yo格省略、ni词基’这一条件?因为其他情形如rattiyo(诸夜,复数主格),其词尾并未省略,故末音不延长。巴利
Yonaṃ lope nisuva dīgho hoti; aṭṭhi, aṭṭhīni; yolopa nisūti-kiṃ? Rattiyo.
在 su、naṃ、hi 之前——。巴利
Sunaṃhisu-.
在‘esu’等词尾前,词基元音延长为长音;例如:aggīsu(诸火中)、aggīnaṃ(诸火的)、aggīhani(诸火上)。巴利
Esu nāmassa dīgho hoti; aggīsu, aggīnaṃ, aggīhani.
“五”等十四数的规则。巴利
Pañcādīnaṃ cuddasannama-.
从 pañca 等十四个词,有 sunaṃhi 的形式;pañcasu、pañcannaṃ、pañcahi、chasu、channa、chahi;如此直至 aṭṭhārasa。巴利
Pañcādīnaṃ vaddasannaṃ sunaṃhisva hoti; pañcasu, pañcannaṃ, pañcahi, chasu, channa, chahi; evaṃ yāva aṭṭhārasā.
Yavādo 的 ntussa——巴利
Yavādo ntussa-.
于 yvā 等词尾中,nt 变为 a;guṇavantā、guṇavantaṃ、guṇavante、guṇavantena 等——为何说“yvā”等?guṇavā tiṭṭhati。Amussā-ma。巴利
Yavādisu ntussa a hoti; guṇavantā, guṇavantaṃ, guṇavante, guṇavantena, iccādi–-yvādoti-kiṃ? Guṇavā tiṭṭhati. Amussā-ma.
nta 的 ṭa 亦于 vaṃsa 中——巴利
Ntassa ca ṭa vaṃse-.
在 aṃsa 等词中,nt 后缀有时变为 ṭa,nt 本身也发生变化;“yaṃ yaṃ hirāja bhajati sataṃ vā yadi vā asaṃ”“kiccāni kubbassa kareyya kiccaṃ”“himavaṃ ca pabbataṃ”“sujāti manto’pi ajātimassa”依语法无碍解,他处亦同;“cakkhumā andhitā honti”“vaggumudātīriyā pana bhikkhū vaṇṇavā honti”。巴利
Aṃsesu ntappaccayayassa ṭa hoti vā ntussa ci;’ yaṃ yaṃ hirāja bhajati sataṃ vā yadi vā asaṃ’’ kiccāni kubbassa kareyya kiccaṃ’’himavaṃca pabbataṃ’,’sujāti manto’pi ajātimassa’ yogavibhāgenāññatrāpi’cakkhumā andhitā honti’’ vaggumudātīriyā pana bhikkhū vaṇṇavā honti.’
于 yosu 格位,于阳性中 ujjhissa——巴利
Yosujjhissa pume-.
凡是“jh”类的名称,其词尾“i”在“yo”格位中,若为阳性,可选择变为“ī”;例如 aggī——标举“jh”是为了什么?为了不使以“i”结尾的词类全体均适用此规则——rattiyo;标举“i”是为了什么?为了排除 daṇḍino;那么“pu”呢?aṭṭhi。巴利
Jhasaññassa issa yosu vā ṭa hoti pulliṅge;aggaso aggī–-jhaggahaṇaṃ kiṃ? Ikārantasamudāyassa ṭo mā siyātirattiyo; iggahaṇaṃ kiṃ? Daṇḍino; puveti-kiṃ; aṭṭhi.
于“ve”与“vo”中,“lu”的规则——。巴利
Vevosu lussa-.
以 la 为标记者,其 u 在 dvevosu 中变为 ṭa;bhikkhave、bhikkhavo,特别标举 vevosu 是为了什么?Cantuyo;特别标举“u”是为了什么?sayambhuvo。巴利
Lasaññassa ussa dvevosu ṭa hoti; bhikkhave, bhikkhavo, vevosūti-kiṃ?Cantuyo; uggahaṇaṃ kiṃ; sayambhuvo.
于Yomhi中可 kvavi-。巴利
Yomhi vā kvavi-.
在“yo”格位中,某些以“la”为标记的词,其“u”有时变为“ṭa”;hetayo(诸因),“nandanti taṃ kurayo dassanena”(他们见到那些行为而欢喜),“ajjeva taṃ kurayo pāpayātu”(今日就让那些行为招致恶果)。为何说“有时”?hetuyo(诸因)。巴利
Yomhī kvaci lasaññassa vā ṭa hoti; hetayo,’nandanti taṃ kurayo dassanena ajjeva taṃ kurayo pāpayātu’ vāti-kiṃ hetuyo.
阳性呼格中,变为 ve 和 vo——巴利
Pumālapane vevo-.
从 lasañña 词干、以 u 结尾的词,在呼格中,vevo 可出现在阳性中;bhikkhave、bhikkhavo、bhikkhū——pumeti——什么;āyūni;ālapaneti——什么?Cantuyo 站立着;lutātveva——dhenuyo、sayambhuvo。巴利
Lasaññato uto yossālapane vevo honti vā pulliṅge; bhikkhave, bhikkhavo, bhikkhū–-pumeti-kiṃ; āyūni; ālapaneti-kiṃ?Cantuyo tiṭṭhanti; lutātvevै-dhenuyo,sayambhuvo.
smā、hi、smiṃ、nnaṃ 的规则为 mhā、bhi、mhi——巴利
Smāhisminnaṃ mhābhimhi-.
名词之后,smā、hi、smiṃ 的 mhā、bhi、mhi 可依顺次替换;buddhamhā、buddhasmā、buddhehi、buddhamhi、buddhasmiṃ——于广泛适用及排除范畴中亦可;dasasahassimhi dhātuyā。巴利
Nāmasmā paresaṃ smāhisminnaṃ mhābhimhi vā honti yathā kkamaṃ; buddhamhā, buddhasmā, buddhehi, buddhamhi, buddhasmiṃ–-bahulādhikārāpavādavīsaye’pi; dasasahassimhi dhātuyā.
Suhisvasse——巴利
Suhisvasse-.
以 a 结尾的词干,在 su 与 hi 之前变为 e;buddhesu、buddhehi。巴利
Akārantassa suhisve hoti; buddhesu, buddhehi.
sabba 等词,于 naṃ 之前,(a)亦换为 e——巴利
Sabbādīnaṃ namhi ca-.
以-a结尾的sabba等词的namhi与suhi、su中,e成为;sabbesaṃ、sabbesu、sabbehi——sabbādi等词如何?Buddhānaṃ;但amūsaṃ则不然。巴利
Akārantānaṃ sabbādīnaṃ e hoti namhi suhisuca; sabbesaṃ sabbesu, sabbehi–-sabbādīnanti-kiṃ?Buddhānaṃ; assetveva amūsaṃ.
Sabba、katara、katama、ubhaya、itara、añña、aññatara、aññatama;巴利
Sabba katara katama ubhaya itara añña aññatara aññatama;
于确定中、于非名称中,Pubbaparāparadakkhiṇuttarādharāni——()。巴利
Pubbaparāparadakkhiṇuttarādharāni vavatthāyamasaññāyaṃ-().
凡此、那、这、彼、何、一、你、我(这些是 sabbādi 词干)——巴利
Yatya ta eta ima amu kiṃ eka tumha amha (iccete sabbādayo )
从 sabba 等词之后,naṃ 词尾的 saṃ 与 sānaṃ 形式发生;sabbesaṃ、sabbesānaṃ。巴利
Sabbādito naṃvacanassa saṃsānaṃ honti; sabbesaṃ, sabbesānaṃ.
从gha类词干和pā类词干,属格单数词尾sa可替换为ssa或ssā——巴利
Ghapā sassa ssā vā-.
对于sabba等词,于gha、pa(词干)之后,sa(词尾)可变为ssā;sabbassā、sabbāya,举出gha、pa是为接续后文。巴利
Sabbādīnaṃ ghapato sassa ssā vā hoti; sabbassā, sabbāya, paggahaṇamuttaratthaṃ.
smi 词尾的 ssaṃ——巴利
Smino ssaṃ-.
对于 sabba 等词,在 gha 之后,smiṃ 词尾可变为 ssaṃ;sabbassaṃ、sabbāya;amussaṃ、amuyā。巴利
Sabbādīnaṃ ghapato smino ssaṃ vā hoti; sabbassaṃ, sabbāya; amussaṃ, amuyā.
“yaṃ”(关系代词词根,此处用作相关格变化说明)。巴利
Yaṃ-.
ghapato 与 smiṃ 语尾可转为 yaṃ;kaññāyaṃ、kaññāya、rattiyaṃ、rattiyā、vadhuyaṃ、vadhuyā、sabbāyaṃ、sabbāya、amuyaṃ、amuyā。巴利
Ghapato smino yaṃ vā hoti; kaññāyaṃ, daññāya, rattiyaṃ, rattiyā, vadhuyaṃ, vadhuyā, sabbāyaṃ, sabbāya, amuyaṃ, amuyā.
在 sabhā 与 parisā 词后接 tiṃ 语尾——巴利
Tiṃ sabhāparisāya-.
“sabhā”(会堂)与“parisā”(众)等词,其离格(smā)及属格、处格(smiṃ)词尾,可变作词尾“tiṃ”,亦可用原词尾,如:“sabhatiṃ”或“sabhāya”;“parisatiṃ”或“parisāya”。巴利
Sabhāparisāhi smino tiṃ vā hoti; sabhatiṃ, sahāya, parisatiṃ, parisāya.
由 pada 等词后接 si-。巴利
Padādīhi si-.
于 e 之后,smi 的词尾可成为 si——padasi、padasmiṃ、bilasi、bilasmiṃ。巴利
Ehi smino si hoti vā, padasi, padasmiṃ, bilasi, bilasmiṃ.
Nāssa 的 sā——。巴利
Nāssa sā-.
以‘pada’等词为例,其后缀‘sā’或有或无;例如:padasā(以足)、padena(以足)、bilasā(以洞穴)、bilena(以洞穴)。巴利
Padādīhi nāssa sā hoti vā; padasā, padena, bilasā, bilena.
于 e 之后,nā 的 sā 可成为——kodhasā、kodhena、atthasā、atthena。巴利
Ehi nāssa sā hoti vā; kodhasā, kodhena, atthasā, atthena.
以a结尾的名词之后,具格词尾变为ena;buddhena;若问为何说“以a结尾”?Agginā。巴利
Akārantato parassa nāvavanassa enādeso hoti; buddhena; atoti-kiṃ?Agginā.
以a结尾的名词之后,词尾 si 变为 o;如 buddho;由此正是——aggi。巴利
Akārantato nāmasmā sissa o hoti; buddho; ato tveva-aggi.
以a结尾的名词,其sis词尾有时或变为e;“vanappagumbe yathā phussitagge”,于例外领域亦多依规则,sukhe、dukkhe——为何说vā?vanappagumbo;为何说kvaci?以免于一切情形中皆如此。巴利
Akārantato nāmasmā sissa e hoti vā kvaci;’vanappa gumbe yathā phussitagge’ apavādavisaye’pi bahulaṃ vidhānā, sukhe, dukkhe–-vāti-kiṃ? Vanappagumbo; kvacīti-kiṃ? Pakkhe sabbattha mā hotu.
“Aṃ”为中性名词。巴利
Aṃ napuṃsake-.
以 a 结尾的名词,当中性时,sa 词尾变为 aṃ。rūpaṃ。巴利
Akārantato nāmasmā sassa aṃ hoti napuṃsakaliṅge rūpaṃ.
以a结尾的名词词干,在中性时,yonaṃ变为ni;sabbāni、rūpāni——在常制中,phalamekaccādisabbādanaṃ的第一格。巴利
Akārantato nāmasmā yonaṃ ni hoti napuṃsake; sabbāni, rūpāni –-niccavidhāne phalamekaccādisabbādanaṃ paṭhamāya.
于 Jhalā 后可——。巴利
Jhalā vā-.
对于颚音、喉音类词干,在中性时,可变为yonaṃ ni或不变化;例如:aṭṭhini、aṭṭhī、āyūni、āyū。巴利
Jhalato yonaṃ ni hoti vā napuṃsake; aṭṭhini, aṭṭhī, āyūni, āyū.
于jhalā类之后,y-ādesa发生脱落;aṭṭhī、āyū、aggī、bhikkhū,唯于jhalā类之后——aggayo;何况为何不发生?因a音为内音。巴利
Jhalato yonaṃ lopo hoti; aṭṭhī, āyū, aggī, bhikkhū, jhalātveva-aggayo; pageva kasmā na hoti; antaraṅgattā ākarassa.
于 Jantutvīghepehi 之后,可——巴利
Jantutvīghepehi vā-.
在jantu、hetu等以-ī结尾的词干后,以及在gha、pa术语(阴性、阳性名词)后,有时省略(词干末尾的ī)而代之以yo:jantu(有情)→jantuyo,hetu(因)→hetuyo,daddhī(乳)→daddhīyo,kaññā(少女)→kaññāyo,rattī(夜)→rattiyo,itthī(女人)→itthiyo,deṇū(母牛)→deṇuyā,vadhū(新娘)→vadhuyo。巴利
Jantuhetūhi īkārantehi ghapasaññohiva paresaṃ yonaṃ vā lopo hoti; jantu jantuyo, hetu hetuyo, daddhī daddhīyo, kaññā kaññāyo, rattī rattiyo, itthī itthiyo, deṇū deṇuyā, vैdhū vadhuyo.
凡“passa”之 i 音——巴利
Yepassivaṇṇassa-.
i-元音在y-音前有时消失(lopo hoti vā yakāre);如ratyo、ratyā、ratyaṃ(由rati而来),pokkharañño、pokkharaññā、pokkharaññaṃ(由pokkharaññī而来)——但亦有rattiyo(不消失之例);“passāti”(看)是何义?如daddhiyo;“ivaṇṇassa”(i-元音)是何义?如dhenuyo、vadhuyā;此处如何?“anuññāto ahaṃ matyāti”(我被允许,以我之见)?依“ye passā”(那些看者)之合释分别。巴利
Pasaññassa ivaṇṇassa lopo hoti vā yakāre; ratyo ratyā ratyaṃ, pokkharañño pokkharañññā pokkharaññaṃ–-vātveva-rattiyo; passāti-kiṃ?Daddhiyo; ivaṇṇassāti-kiṃ? Dhenuyo vadhuyā; kैthaṃ; anuññāto ahaṃ matyāti?’ Ye passā’ti-yogavibhāgā.
在无内部区别时,从名词(词干)起,ga 等(音)发生脱落;bho purisa,ayaṃ daddhī。巴利
Nāmasmā gasīnaṃ lopo hoti vijjhantarābhāve; bho purisa, ayaṃ daddhī.
于 Asaṃkhyehi〔非数〕之后,sabbāsaṃ〔一切〕之——巴利
Asaṃkhyehi sabbāsaṃ-.
于不存在的数词之后,一切词尾皆脱落;或亦可如是。由此同一性〔……〕,从不存在的数词亦可推知 syā 等词尾之形成。巴利
Avijjamānasaṅkhyehi parāsaṃ sabbāsaṃ vibhattīnaṃ lopohoti;va vā evaevaṃ. Etasmāyeva liṅgā [ ] asaṅkhyehi syāthuppattyanumīyate.
表达单一意义时,一切词尾大多发生省略;puttīyati、rājapuriso、vāsiṭṭho——某些情况下不常省略 vidhānā;parantapo。Bhagandaro、parassapadaṃ、attanopadaṃ、gavampati、devānampiyatisso、antevāsī、janesuto、mamattaṃ、māmako。巴利
Ekatthībhāve sabbāsaṃ vibhattīnaṃ lopo hoti bahulaṃ; puttīyati, rājapuriso, vāsiṭṭho–- kvavi na hoti bahulaṃ vidhānā; parantapo. Bhagandaro, parassapadaṃ, attanopadaṃ, gavampati, devānampiyatisso, antevāsī, janesuto, mamattaṃ, māmako.
从前者、自开端——巴利
Pubbasmāmādito-.
以 a 结尾且表一义的前分,其后所有格位变化皆脱落;adhitthī——此处依多分规则不脱落,依诸规则、依各自众会;pubbasmā 为何?Gāmaṃ gato。巴利
Amādekatthā pubbaṃ yadekatthaṃ tato parāsaṃ sabbāsaṃ vibhattīnaṃ lopo hoti; adhitthī–-idha na hoti bahulaṃ vidhānā, yathāpattiyā, yayathāparisāya; pubbasmāti-kiṃ?Gāmaṃ gato.
Nāto 之后,ma 之第五格——巴利
Nātomapañcamiyā-.
从 amā 之前的单一义、以 a 结尾的单一义之后,其余一切格位的脱落不发生,astu 亦如是,唯第五格除外;upakumbhaṃ,何谓“第五格除外”?Upakumbhā ānaya。巴利
Amādekatthā pubbaṃ yadekatthamakārantaṃ tato parāsaṃ sabbāsaṃ vibhattīnaṃ lopo na hoti astu bhavatyapañcamyā; upakumbhaṃ, apañcamiyāti-kiṃ? Upakumbhā ānaya.
或 taniyāsattaminaṃ——巴利
Vā taniyāsattaminaṃ-
或当先前为单一义、以 a 结尾时,其后第三格与第七格词尾或为 aṃ;upakumbhena kataṃ、upakumbhaṃ kataṃ、upakumbhe nidhehi、upakumbhaṃ nidhehi。巴利
Amādekatthā pubbaṃ yadekatthamakārantaṃ tato parāsaṃ tatiyāsattaminaṃ vā aṃ hoti; upakumbhena kataṃ, upakumbhaṃ kataṃ, upakumbhe nidhehi, upakumbhaṃ nidhehi.
于 nāmhi——前,rāja 词干变为 rājassi。巴利
Rājassi nāmhi-.
于名词词尾中,rājassi 亦可;以 sabbadattena rājinā;或如 varaññā。巴利
Nāmhi rājassi vā hoti; sabbadattena rājinā; vātve varaññā.
Sunaṃhisū——.巴利
Sunaṃhisū-.
rāja 的 ū 可替换于 sunaṃhisu 之前;rājūsu、rājesu,rājūnaṃ、raññaṃ,rājūbhi、rājebhi。巴利
Rājassa ū hoti vā sunaṃhisu; rājūsu rājesu, rājūnaṃ raññaṃ, rājūbhi rājebhi.
于此,阴性中,ṭe-。巴利
Imassānitthiyaṃ ṭe-.
ima 此词在非阴性中,于 sunaṃhisu 等中,或为 ṭe;esu 或 imesu,esaṃ 或 imesaṃ,ehi 或 imehi——何谓“非阴性”?imāsu,imāyaṃ,imāhi。巴利
Imasaddassānitthiyaṃ ṭe hoti vā sunaṃhisu; esu imesu, esaṃ imesaṃ, ehi imehi–-anitthiyanti-kiṃ? Imāsu, imāyaṃ, imāhi.
Nāmbhanimi——。巴利
Nāmbhanimi-.
对于 ima 一词,在非阴性时,于 nā、mhi 之前,以 ana、imi 等替换——anena、iminā;若是阴性呢——imāya。巴利
Imasaddassānitthiyaṃ nāmhi anैmi iccādesā honti; anena, iminā; anitthiyaṃtveva-imāya.
于 si 中,非中性词的 ayaṃ——巴利
Sīmbhanapuṃsakassāyaṃ-.
imasadda 为非中性时,其 simhi 形式为 ayaṃ;ayaṃ puriso、ayaṃ itthī;若为非中性,则为何?imaṃ。巴利
Imasaddassānapuṃsakassa ayaṃ hoti simhi; ayaṃ puriso, ayaṃ itthī; anapuṃsakassāti-kiṃ?Imaṃ.
tya、ta、tānaṃ 的 tassa 变为 so——巴利
Tyatetānaṃ tassa so-
对于 tya、ta、eta 诸非中性词,其 tassa 在 simhi 时为 so;如 so puriso、sā itthi;同样地,so、sā、eso、esā——若为中性,则 tyaṃ、taṃ、etaṃ。巴利
Tyatetānamanapuṃsakānaṃ tassa so hoti simhi; syo puriso, syā itthi; evaṃ so, sā, eso, esā –-anapuṃsaka ssetvैva-tyaṃ, taṃ, etaṃ.
Massāmussa——。巴利
Massāmussa-.
非中性词 amu 的 ma 在 si 之前变为 so;asu puriso、asu itthi。巴利
Anapuṃsakassāmussa makārassa so hoti simhi; asu puriso, asu itthi.
amu 的词干中,ma 或变为 ke、so;asuko——amuko,asukā——amukā,asukaṃ——amukaṃ,asukāni——amukāni。巴利
Amussa massa ke vā so hoti; asuko amuko, asukā amukā, asukaṃ amukaṃ, asukāni amukāni.
于彼之 ta,在一切〔性〕中为 no——。巴利
Tatassa no sabbāsu-.
对于 ta 一词,其词干 ta 在所有变格中或变为 no;ne、te、nāyo、tāyo、naṃ、taṃ、nāni、tāni 等等。巴利
Tasaddassa tassa no vā hoti sabbāsuvibhattīsu; ne, te, nāyo, tāyo, naṃ, taṃ, nāni, tāni iccādi.
Ṭa 在 sasmā、smiṃ、ssā、yaya、ssaṃ、ssā、saṃ、mbhā、mhi、savi 以及 ma 之后,也(可)——巴利
Ṭa sasmāsmiṃssāyayassaṃssāsaṃmbhāmhisavimassa ca-.
于 sādi 等中,对 ima 和 ta 亦替换为 ṭo:assa 即 imassa,asmā 即 imasmā,asmiṃ 即 imasmiṃ,assāya 即 imissāya,assaṃ 即 imassaṃ,assā 即 imissā,āsaṃ 即 imāsaṃ,amhā 即 imamhā,amhi 即 imamhi;assa 即 tassa,asmā 即 tasmā,asmiṃ 即 tasmiṃ,assāya 即 tassāya,assaṃ 即 tassaṃ,assā 即 tassā,āsaṃ 即 tāsaṃ,amhā 即 tamhā,amhi 即 tamhi。举出 ssāyā 等,是为了不与其他替换形式相混淆。巴利
Sādisvimassa tatassa ca ṭo vā hoti; assैmassa, asmā, imasmā, asmiṃ imasmiṃ,assāya imissāya, assaṃ imassaṃ, assā imissā, āsaṃ imāsaṃ, amhā imamhā, amhi imamhi; assa tassa, asmā tasmā, asmiṃ tasmiṃ, assāya tassāya, assaṃ tassaṃ, assā tassā, āsaṃ tāsaṃ, amhā tamhā, amhi tamhi. Ssāyādiggahaṇa mādesantare mā hotutī.
Ṭā 于 sissisismā 之前——。巴利
Ṭā sissisismā-.
于 isi 之后,ssa 与 smā 可变为 ṭe;如“yonajja vinaye kaṅkhaṃ atthadhammavidū ise”所说——isi。巴利
Isismā sissa ṭe vā hoti;’ yonajja vinaye kaṅkhaṃ atthadhammavidū ise’ vātveva-isi.
关于第二格(宾格)词尾“yo”的规则——巴利
Dutiyassa yossa-.
于 isi 之后,第二格(dutiyā)的 yo 可变为 ṭe;即“samaṇe brāhmaṇe vande sampannacaraṇe ise”,否则呢?——isayo passa;为何说“第二格”?——isayo tiṭṭhanti。巴利
Isismā parassa duyāyossa ṭe vā hoti;’ samaṇe brāhmaṇe vande sampannacaraṇe ise’ vātveva-isayo passa; dutiyassāti-kiṃ?Isayo tiṭṭhanti.
Ekaccādigato——。巴利
Ekaccādigato-.
“Akārantehi ekaccādīhi yonaṃ ṭe hoti”者,谓“以-a结尾的某些词等,其-yon的替换形式成为-ṭe”;例如“ekacce tiṭṭhanti, ekacce passa”(有些人站立,有些人看)。若问:“何以如此?”答曰:“ekaccāyo(即ekacce的另一种形式)。”这便是上文第一例之训释。巴利
Akārantehi ekaccādīhi yonaṃ ṭe hoti; ekacce tiṭṭhanti, ekacce passa–-atoti-kiṃ? Ekaccāyo; evaṃ esasa paṭhama.
于 nissā 之后,ṭā 不〔发生〕——。巴利
Na nissa ṭā-.
在 ekacca 等词之后的 nissa 不变成 ṭā;ekaccāni。巴利
Ekaccādīhi parassa nissa ṭā na hoti; ekaccāni.
sabba 等词之后,ni 的 ṭā 不发生;sabbāni。巴利
Sabbādīhi parassa nissa ṭā na hoti; sabbāni.
Yeyānaṃ 的 eṭa——。巴利
Yeyānameṭa-.
以a为结尾的sabba等词,yo为eṭ;sabbe tiṭṭhanti,sabbe passa;但atā呢——sabbāyo。巴利
Akārantehi sabbādīhi yonameṭa hoti; sabbe tiṭṭhanti sabbe passa; atotveva-sabbāyo.
非其他,亦非以名称为主——巴利
Nāññañca nāmappadhānā-.
凡与名为体者及非主要者之一切等所说者,以及非一切等所作之任何者,皆不存在;彼等为 sabbā,彼等为 piyasabbā,彼等为 ati sabbā。巴利
Nāmabhutehi appadhānehi ca sabbādīhi yaṃ vuttaṃ yaṃ caññaṃ sabbādikāriyantaṃ na hoti; te sabbā, te piyasabbā, te ati sabbā.
第三格(具格)语义连用规则巴利
Tatiyatthayoge-.
与第三义结合时,sabba等词所说的那种形式,以及sabba等词的其他构形,都不成立;māsena pubbānaṃ——māsapubbānaṃ。巴利
Tatiyatthena yoge sabbādīhi yaṃ vuttaṃ yaṃ caññaṃ sabbādi kāriyantaṃ na hoti; māsenapubbānaṃ māsapubbānaṃ.
于第四格复合词中——。巴利
Catthasamāse-.
在第四格复合词的范围内,凡由sabba等词所说出的,以及其它以sabba等词为起首的构形,皆不适用;dakkhiṇuttarapubbānaṃ——于复合词中——何耶?Amusañca tesañca dehi。巴利
Catthasamāsavisaye sabbādīhi yaṃ vuttaṃ yaṃ caññaṃ sabbādi kāriyantaṃ na hoti; dakkhiṇuttarapubbānaṃ–-samāseti-kiṃ?Amusañca tesañca dehi.
在这些复合词的范围内,依“sabba”等词所说明的形式,有时也成立;pubbuttare、pubbuttarā。巴利
Catthasamāsavisaye sabbādīhi yasseṭa vutto tassa vā hoti; pubbuttare, pubbuttarā.
于前诸词等,jah-巴利
Pubbādīhi jahi-
由这些以 pubba 为首的六词,在各自范围内,有时 eṭa 替换。pubbe 成为 pubbā,pare 成为 parā,apare 成为 aparā,dakkhiṇe 成为 dakkhiṇā,uttare 成为 uttarā,adhare 成为 adharā——六词指何?即 ye。〔〕巴利
Etehi pubbādīhi chahi savisaye eṭa vā hoti?Pubbe pubbā, pare parā, apare aparā,dakkhiṇe dakkhiṇā, uttare uttarā, adhare adharā–-chahīti-kiṃ?Ye.[ ]
于manā等词之后,smiṃ、saṃ、nā、smā、naṃ的〔词尾〕为si、so、o、sā、sā——巴利
Manādīhi smiṃsaṃnāsmānaṃ sisoosāsā-.
以 mana 等词,于 smiṃ 等词尾,可有 sīsa、osāsa 等替换,依次为:manasi、manasmiṃ,manaso、manassa,mano、manaṃ,manasā、manena,manasā、manasmā——为何?Putto jāto avetaso, hitvā yāti sumedhaso; suddhuttaravāsasā, hemakapakpaṇavāsase——于各自词义中,以 ṇa 结尾者。巴利
Manādīhi samīmādīnaṃ sisoosāsā vā honti yathākkaṃ; manasi manasmiṃ, manaso manassa, mano manaṃ, manasā manena, manasā manasmā–-kathaṃ? Putto jāto avetaso, hitvā yāti sumedhaso; suddhuttaravāsasā, hemakapakpaṇavāsaseti-sakatthe ṇantā.
“心”有暗黑、热、光明、头、胸、语言、力量、血液、荣光、水等义。巴利
Mana tama tapa teja sira ura vaca oja raja yasa paya
“Saravayayāyavāsacetā”者,指一切及部分的恶念皆已灭尽,犹如水源断绝、铁熔于炉而消退。巴利
Saravayayāyavāsacetā jalāsayākkhayalohapaṭamanesu-().
Sato sabbhe——。巴利
Sato sabbhe-.
“santa”一词的“sa”在“bha”音之前,变为“sabba”——sabbhi。巴利
Santasaddassa saba bhavati bhakāre; sabbhi.
在以 ga、yo、nā、se 之前,由 bhavato 可变为 honto。巴利
Bhavato vā honto gayonāse-.
bhavanta一词在呼格与依格中,可有bhonta等替换形式;bhonta、bhavaṃ、bhonto、bhavanto、bhotā、bhavatā、bhoto、bhavato——bho这一不变词用于呼格,“kutonu āgacchatha bho tayo janā”,如此bhanteti——bhaddeti——由词间音素而成立;bhaddanta这一形式——由dassa的重叠而成。巴利
Bhavantasaddassa bhontādeso vā hoti gayonāse; bhonta, bhavaṃ, bhonto, bhavanto, bhotā, bhavatā, bhoto, bhavato–-bho iti-āmantaṇe nipāto’kutonu āgacchatha bho tayo janā’evaṃ bhanteti-bhaddeti-saddantarena siddhaṃ;bhaddanta iti-dassa dvibhāvena.
从弟子所依止的——ni-。巴利
Sissāggito ni-.
从 Aggismā 起,si 可有可无地成为 ni;agginī, aggi。巴利
Aggismā sissa ni hoti vā; agginī,aggi.
于si中,nt后缀可成为aṃ;gacchaṃ,gacchanto。巴利
Simhi ntappaccayassa aṃ hoti vā; gacchaṃ, gacchanto.
从‘bhū’界,于处格中,中性词尾转为 aṃ,恒常再生;即说为‘bhavaṃ’(存在)。巴利
Bhudhātuto ntassa aṃ hoti simhi niccaṃ punabbidhānā; bhavaṃ.
Mahantarahattānaṃ 的 ṭā 可——巴利
Mahantarahattānaṃ ṭā vā-.
于处格中,mahanta 与 arahant 的中性词尾或转为 ṭā;即成为 mahā、mahaṃ、arahā、arahaṃ。巴利
Simhi mahantārahantānaṃ ntassa ṭā vā hoti; mahā, mahaṃ, arahā, arahaṃ.
在主格单数中,词干 -nt 变为长音形式;例如 guṇavā(具功德者)。巴利
Simhi ntussaṭā hoti; guṇavā.
中性词主格单数的后缀为 -aṃ 或 -naṃ。巴利
Aṃṅaṃ napuṃsake-.
“具有”(-nt)词干在中性单数主格中采用“aṃ”或“naṃ”两种形式;例如“具德家族”的中性形式为“guṇavaṃ kulaṃ”,而以“-nt”结尾的中性形式为“guṇañca ntaṃ kulaṃ”。此处为何说明“中性”?因为若非中性,则作阳性形式,如“具戒比丘”(sīlavā bhikkhu)。巴利
Ntussa aṃṅaṃ honti simhi napuṃsake; guṇavaṃ kulaṃ, guṇañca ntaṃ kulaṃ–-napuṃsaketi kiṃ? Sīlavā bhikkhu.
Himavato 可〔有〕o——。巴利
Himavato vā o-.
Himavato 于 si 词尾前,ntu 词尾可变为 o——himavanto、himavā。巴利
Himavato simhi ntussa o vā hoti; himavanto, himavā.
从 rājā 等及 yuva 等之后,sissa 的 ā 变为——巴利
Rājādiyuvāditvā -.
于 rājā 等及 yayuva 等之后,sissa 的 ā 发生;rājā、yayuvā——rāja brahma sakha atta ātuma。巴利
Rājādīhi yayuvādīhi ca sissa ā hoti; rājā, yayuvā–-rāja brahma sakha atta ātuma.
Dhammo vāññatthe〔或于他义时〕——()。巴利
Dhammo vāññatthe-().
坚固法者:我即是(坚固法)。巴利
Daḷhadhammā; (daḷhadhammo) asmā.
Imo,于状态中——()。巴利
Imo bhāve-().
所谓“无形”,即无形相;所谓“轻妙”,即轻细敏捷。《优婆苏摩经》中说,人若具此二种德行,则为殊胜。巴利
Aṇimā, laghimā–-yuva sā suvā maghava puma vattaha.
Vāmbhānaddha——。巴利
Vāmbhānaddha -.
rāja 等与 yuva 等词干,在 vā 语尾中可变为 ānaṅ;〔〕rājānaṃ、rājaṃ、yuvānaṃ、yuvaṃ。巴利
Rājādīnaṃ yuvādīnaṃ cānaṅi hoti vāmhi; [ ] rājānaṃ, rājaṃ, yuvānaṃ, yuvaṃ.
以 yuvan 为词干的词,在接 yonaṃ 等词尾时,变为 yonamāno——巴利
Yonamāno-.
对于 rājā 等词与 yuvā 等词,以 āno 替换 yonaṃ 亦可;rājāno、yuvāno——抑或只是 rājā、rāje、yuvā、yuve。巴利
Rājādīhi yuvādīhi ca yonamāno vā hoti; rājāno, yuvāno–-vātveva-rājā,rāje, yuvā, yuve.
Āyo 与 no 不用于 sakhā——巴利
Āyo no ca sakhā-.
从 sakha 之后,yona 与 māyo 变为 no,或者也变为 āno——sakhāyo、sakhino、sakhāno?抑或仅是——sakhā、sakhe。巴利
Sakhato yonamāyono honti vā āno ca; sakhāyo, sakhino, sakhāno?Vātveva-sakhā, sakhe.
从sakha一词,在smi等词尾中,ṭe替代;sakhe,此为常义之开端。巴利
Sakhato smino ṭe hoti; sakhe niccattho’yamārambho.
于 no、nā、ssa 之前,i ——巴利
Nonāsesvi-.
sakhā 的词干于非呼格中变为 i;sakhino、sakhinā、sakhissa。巴利
Sakhassa i hoti nonāsesu; sakhino, sakhinā, sakhissa.
于 Smānaṃsu 诸尾之前,可〔vā〕——巴利
Smānaṃsu vā-.
sakha 的词干于 smā 与 naṃsu 前可变为 i;sakhismā、sakhasmā、sakhīnaṃ、sakhānaṃ。巴利
Sakhassa vā i hotī smānaṃsu; sakhismā, sakhasmā, sakhīnaṃ, sakhānaṃ.
于 yo、svaṃ、hi、su 之前,又有 āraṅi——巴利
Yosvaṃhisu cāraṅi-.
sakhā 在与 -yo、-svaṃ、-hi 及从格、复数属格相连时,亦出现以 -āraṅ 替代的情况;sakhāro——sakhāyo,sakhāresu——sakhesu,sakhāraṃ——sakhaṃ,sakhārehi——sakhehi,sakhārā——sakhārasmā,sakhārānaṃ——sakhānaṃ。巴利
Sakhassa vā āraṅi hoti yosvaṃhisusmānaṃsu ca; sakhāro sakhāyo, sakhāresu, sakhesu,sakhāraṃ, sakhaṃ, sakhārehi, sakhehi, sakhārā, sakhārasmā, sakhārānaṃ, sakhānaṃ.
Latupitā 等的属格——巴利
Latupitādinamase-.
以-tu后缀结尾的词和以pitu等为首的词,在sat之外的〔各格位〕中,〔词干末尾〕变为āra;kattāro、pitaro、kattāraṃ、pitaraṃ、kattārā、pitarā、kattari、pitari——那么,在sat中如何?Kattuno、pituno。巴利
Latuppaccayantānaṃ pitādīnaṃ cāraṅi bhoti sato’ññatra; kattāro, pitaro, kattāraṃ, pitaraṃ, kattārā, pitarā, kattari, pitari–-aseti-kiṃ?Kattuno, pituno.
于 nam 之后,可接 vā-。巴利
Namhi vā-.
于 namhi 之后,latupitā 等词的 āraṅ 可(vā)发生;kattārānaṃ、kattunaṃ、pitarānaṃ、pitunnaṃ。巴利
Namhi latupitādīnamāraṅi vā hoti; kattārānaṃ, kattunaṃ, pitarānaṃ, pitunnaṃ.
Namhi 中,latu、pitu 等词的 āraṅi 可有;kattārānaṃ、kattunaṃ、pitarānaṃ、pitunnaṃ。巴利
Ā-1
在 -naṃ 之前,对以 latu、pitā 等为首的词干,可变为 ā;kattānaṃ、kattūnaṃ、pitānaṃ、pitunnaṃ。巴利
.
于 nam 之后,latu、pitu 等词的〔词尾〕ā 可(vā)成为〔……〕;kattānaṃ、kattūnaṃ、pitānaṃ、pitunnaṃ。巴利
Namhi latupitādīnamā vā hoti; kattānaṃ, kattūnaṃ, pitānaṃ, pitunnaṃ.
以 latu、pitu 等词之后,sassa 可脱落;kattu、kattuno、sakamandhātu、sakamandhātuno、pitu、pituno。巴利
Latupitādīhi sassa lopo vā hoti; kattu, kattuno, sakamandhātu, sakamandhātuno, pitu, pituno.
Suhisvāraṅi〔于 Suhisu 的 āraṅi〕——巴利
Suhisvāraṅi-.
于 Suhi 等词中,latupita 等词的 ara 可变为 i;在 kattāresu、kattusu、pitaresu、pitusu、kattārehi、kattuhi、pitarehi、pituhi 中。巴利
Suhisu latupitādīnamaraṅi vā hoti; kattāresu, kattusu, pitaresu, pitusu, kattārehi, kattuhi, pitarehi, pituhi.
于 najjāyo 等中,āma-巴利
Najjāyosvāma-.
在体格复数〔yo〕上,nadī〔河流〕一词的词干末尾元音有时变为 āmi;najjāyo、nadiyo〔诸河流〕。巴利
Yosu nadīsaddassa āmi vā hoti; najjāyo, nadiyo.
Ṭi 于 katimhā 后——巴利
Ṭi katimhā-.
于katimhā之后,yo变为ṭi;kati tiṭṭhanti,kati passa。巴利
Katimhā yonaṃ ṭi hoti; kati tiṭṭhanti, kati passa.
ṭa 这个词尾适用于以“五”为首的十四个数词之后。巴利
Ṭa pañcādihi cuddasahi-.
从“五”起到“十八”为止,共有十四个数词;与这些数词结合时,其阳性复数词尾(yo)变成“ṭo”。例如“五”“五”,乃至“十八”都是如此。为什么说“从五开始”?因为“二、三、四”不在此规则内。为什么说“共十四个”?因为“二十二”同样不适用。巴利
Pañcādīhi cuddasahi saṃkhyāhi yonaṃ ṭo hoti; pañca pañca, evaṃ yāva aṭṭhārasā–-pañcādīhīki-kiṃ? Dve tayo cattāro; cuddasabhīti-kiṃ? Dvevīsatiyo.
于 Ubhagohi 之后,为 ṭo——巴利
Ubhagohi ṭo-.
ubha 与 go 两词之后,格尾 yo 变为 ṭo;例如:ubho(两者)、ubho(两者)、gāvo(诸牛)、gāvo(诸牛)——这是什么缘故?如在“imekarattiṃ ubhayo vasāma”(今夜我等二人共住)句中,于 ṭo 格尾前插入 ya 音。巴利
Ubhagohi yonaṃ ṭo hoti; ubho, ubho, gāvo, gāvo–-kathaṃ? Imekarattiṃ ubhayo vasāmāti- ṭomhi yakārāgamo.
以 āra 等为词尾的词,其后的阳性复数主格词尾 yonaṃ 变为 ṭo;如 sakhāro(诸友)、kattāro(诸作者)、pataro(他们)。巴利
Āraṅādesato paresaṃ yonaṃ ṭo hoti; sakhāro, kattāro, pataro.
以“āra”等结尾的词干,其复数主格词尾“yona”可依次变为“ṭo”或“ṭe”;例如:sakhāro(友人们)、sakhāre(友人们)、sakhāro——此处特意标出“ṭo”,是为表述简洁。巴利
Āraṅādesamhā yonaṃ ṭoṭe vā honti yathākkamaṃ; sakhāro, sakhāre, sakhāro–-ṭoggahaṇaṃ lāghavatthaṃ.
“ṭā”者,即代替“nas”与“āsma”(第一人称复数属格、与格)之词尾。巴利
Ṭā nāsmānaṃ-.
从 āra 等的替换,于 nā 词干之后,ṭā 发生;kattārā、kattārā,有时可发生,于 bahakula 等词之后;etādisā 从 sakhāra 之后——巴利
Āraṅādesamhā nāsmānaṃ ṭā hoti; kattārā, kattārā, kvaci vā hoti bahakulādhikārā; etādisā sakhārasmā
“ṭi”代替“smin”(第七格单数)的词尾。巴利
Ṭi smino-.
从 āra 等词干之后,smi 的词尾变为 ṭi;在 kattar 中,在 pitar 中。巴利
Āraṅādesamhā smino ṭi hoti; kattari, pitari.
以 div 等名词,smin 变为 ṭi;divi、bhuvi——恒常插入 v。巴利
Divādīhi nāmehi smino ṭi hoti; divi, bhuvi–-niccaṃ vakārāgamo.
于 smim 之前,āra 变为短音;kattari、nattari。巴利
Smimhi āro rasso hoti; kattari, nattari.
Pitā 等而非 nattu 等的〔词干〕——巴利
Pitādīnamanattvādīnaṃ-.
除natt等之外的pit等词干,其ā在所有词尾变化中变为短音;pitaro、pitaraṃ——为何说“除natt等之外”?nattāro。巴利
Nattvādivajjitānaṃ pitādīnamāro rasso hoti sabbāsu vibhattisu; pitaro, pitaraṃ–-anattvādīnanti kiṃ? Nattāro.
于 yuvā 等词的 suhi 等词尾前,āna 变为 aṅ。巴利
Yuvādīnaṃ suhisvānaṅi-.
于su、hi等词尾前,yuv等词的ā变为āna;yayuvānesu、yuvānehi。巴利
Suhisu yuvādīnaṃ ānaṅi hoti; yayuvānesu, yuvānehi.
于非“nāna”诸词中,可(用)——巴利
Nonānesvā-.
于这些〔词尾〕前,yuvā 等词的〔词干〕变为 ā;yuvāno, yuvānā, yuvāne。巴利
Esu yuvādīnamā hoti; yuvāno, yuvānā, yuvāne.
于 smā 与 smiṃ 之后,nā 与 ne——巴利
Smāsminnaṃ nāne-.
从 yuva 等词,nā 与 ne 依次由 smā 和 smiṃ 变来,即成 yuvānā、yuvāne。巴利
Yuvādīhiṃ smāsminnaṃ nāne honti yathākkamaṃ; yuvānā, yuvāne.
复数属格词尾“yonaṃ”可替换为“no”或“ne”。巴利
Yonaṃ none vā-.
以yuva等结尾者,其复数属格词尾yonaṃ可依次替换为no与ne;yuvāno、yuvāne——为何说“或”?Yuve passa;不取no,是为简省。巴利
Yuvādīhi yonaṃ none vā honti yathākkamiṃ; yuvāno yuvāne–-vāti-kiṃ?Yuve passa;noggahaṇaṃ lāghavatthaṃ.
在此处所讲的义项之外,其余义项用阳性——巴利
Ito’ññatthe pume-.
表示其他词义时,以i结尾的阳性名词,其复数属格词尾yonaṃ可依次替换为no与ne,例如tomaraṃkusapāṇino、tomaraṃkusapāṇine。仅此而已吗——tomaraṃkusapāṇayo;为何说“表示其他词义时”?Pāṇayo。巴利
Aññapadatthe vattamānā ikārantato nāmasmā yonaṃ none vā honti yathākkamaṃ pulliṅge, tomaraṃkusa pāṇino, tomaraṃkusapāṇine, vātveva-tomaraṃkusapāṇayo; aññattheti-kiṃ?Pāṇayo.
smino(位格词尾)在 kvavi- 时变为 Ne。巴利
Ne smino kvavi-.
当表示其他词义时,从以 ikāra 结尾的名词,smino 有时可替换为 ne;kataññumhi ca posamhi sīlavante ariyavuttine——亦可作 ariyavuttimhi;仅阳性——ariyayavuttiyā。巴利
Aññapadatthe vattamānā ikārantato nāmasmā smino ne hoti vā kvaci;’ kataññumhi ca posamhi sīlavante ariyavuttine’ vātveva-ariyavuttimhi; pumetveva-ariyayavuttiyā.
从puma一词的处格词尾,凡所说者,彼即可;pumāne、pume。巴利
Pumasaddato smino yaṃ vuttaṃ taṃ vā hoti; pumānepume.
于阳性词干接 nāmhi 词尾时,凡所说者亦可成立;pumānā、pumena。巴利
Pumassa nāmhi yaṃ vuttaṃ taṃ vā hoti; pumānā pumena.
从 sumhā 也可(vā)——巴利
Sumhā ca-.
阳性词在 sumhi 中所述者,可变为 ā,亦可不变;pumānesu、pumesu、pumāsu。巴利
Pumassa sumhi yaṃ vuttaṃ taṃ ā ca vā hoti; pumānesu, pumesu, pumāsu.
阳性词干“gassa”后加“aṃ”而成,如:bho pumaṃ(喂,男子)、bho puma(喂,男子)、bho itthipumaṃ(喂,女中男子)、bho itthipuma(喂,女中男子)。巴利
Pumasaddato gassa aṃ vā hoti; bho pumaṃ, bho puma, bho itthipumaṃ, bho itthipuma.
sā 于 assaṃ 与 se 中为 ānaṅi——巴利
Sāssaṃse cānaṅi-.
sā 词干之后,在 aṃsa 与 ga 之后,ānaṅ 替换;sānaṃ、sānassa、bho sāna。巴利
Sāsaddassa ānaṅi hoti aṃse ge ca; sānaṃ, sānassa, bho sāna.
Vattahā 的 sanannaṃ 与 nonānaṃ——巴利
Vattahā sanannaṃ nonānaṃ-.
Vattahā 依序变为 sanannaṃ 与 nonānaṃ——vattahāno、vattahānānaṃ。巴利
Vattahā sanannaṃ nonānaṃ honti yathākkama; vattahā no, vattahānānaṃ.
于 brahma 诸词中,vā——巴利
Brahmassu vā-.
brahmassa 的元音 u 在 sanaṃsu 中可有;brahmuno、brahmassa、brahmūnaṃ、brahmānaṃ。巴利
Brahmassu vā hoti sanaṃsu; brahmuno, brahmassa, brahmūnaṃ brahmānaṃ.
Brahmassu 在 nāmhi 中出现;brahmunā,巴利
Brahmassu hoti nāmhi; brahmunā,
puma、kamma、thāma、addhāna 在 sa 与 smā 词尾前亦可选用——巴利
Pumakammathāmaddhānaṃ vā sasmāsu ca-.
在属格与工具格中,可选用‘u’形式或其他形式。例如:‘pumu’(男子)属格为‘pumuno’或‘pumassa’;工具格与离格为‘pumunā’或‘pumānā’。‘kamma’(业)属格为‘kammuno’或‘kammassa’;工具格与离格为‘kammunā’或‘kammasmā’;工具格亦可用‘kammunā’或‘kammanā’。‘ṭhāma’(力)属格为‘ṭhāmuno’或‘ṭhāmassa’;工具格与离格为‘ṭhāmunā’或‘ṭhāmasmā’;工具格亦可用‘ṭhāmunā’或‘ṭhāmena’。‘addha’(道/半)属格为‘addhuno’或‘addhassa’;工具格与离格为‘addhunā’或‘addhasmā’;工具格亦可用‘addhunā’或‘addhanā’。巴利
Pudīnamu hoti vā sasmāsu nāmhi ca; pumuno, pumassa; pumunā, pumānā, pumunā, pumānā; kammuno, kammassa; kammunā kammasmā; kammunā, kammanā; ṭhāmuno, ṭhāmassa;ṭhāmunā, ṭhāmasmā; ṭhāmunā, ṭhāmena; addhuno, addhassa; addhunā, addhasmā;addhunā, addhanā.
Yuvā 的 -ssa 转为 -no——巴利
Yuvā sassano-.
‘yuvan’(青年)一词在属格中取‘ino’词尾,故其属格形式为‘yuvino’或‘yuvassa’。巴利
Yuvā sassavā ino hoti, yuvino, yuvassa.
于 atta、ātuma 之后,sassa 或变为 no;attano、attassa;ātumano、ātumassa。巴利
Attātumehi sassa no hoti vā; attano, attassa; ātumano, ātumassa.
于 Suhisu 之前,naka——巴利
Suhisu naka-.
Atta、ātumāna 于 suhi 中,或为 naka;于 attana、atta、ātumana、ātuma 中;以 attana、atta;以 ātumana、ātuma——如何?于 verinesu 中——naka 依结合与分离。巴利
Attaātumānaṃ suhisu vā naka hoti; attanesu, attesu, ātumanesu, ātumesu; attanehi, attehi; ātumanehi, ātumehi–-kathaṃ?Verinesūti-naka iti yogavibhāgā.
smā 的 nā,以及 brahmā——巴利
Smāssanā brahmā ca-.
梵天神没有由自我或因自我而起的忿恨与恚怒;这忿恨与恚怒不从梵天神自身、不从自我、不从生起者自身而生起。巴利
Brahma attaātumehi ca smāssa nā hoti; brahmunā, attanā, ātumanā.
此处的 imetānaṃ 等词,在 āṇvādesa 中,于第二格——巴利
Imetānamenāṇvādese dutiyāyaṃ-.
ima与eta词干于已说复说之境中,有第二格以ena替换;令imaṃ bhikkhuṃ vinayamajjhāpaya,复令enaṃ dhammamajjhāpaya,令ime bhikkhū vinayamajjhāpaya,复令ene dhammamajjhāpaya;如是eta亦应相应。巴利
Imaetasaddānaṃ kathitānukathanavisaye dutiyāyamenādeso hoti; imaṃ bhikkhuṃ vinayamajjhāpayaatho enaṃ dhammamajjhāpaya, ime bhikkhū vinayamajjhāpaya atho ene dhammamajjhāpaya; evame tassa ca yojanīyaṃ.
kissa 于一切〔阴性词〕中〔变为〕ko——巴利
Kissa ko sabbāsu-.
于一切词尾中,kissa 变为 ko;即 ko、ke、kā、kāyo、kaṃ、kāni、keneccādi 等。巴利
Sabbāsu vibhattisukissako hoti; ko, ke, kā, kāyo, kaṃ, kāni, keneccādi.
Ki 于 sasmiṃsu 与非阴中性中可有——巴利
Ki sasmiṃsuvānitthiyaṃ-.
anitthiyaṃ 一语中,kissa 与 ki 可有何变化?sasmiṃsu 一语中:kissa、kassa、kismiṃ、kasmiṃ;anitthiyanti 一语,是何义?Ko、kaṃ。巴利
Anitthiyaṃ kissa ki vā hoti sasmiṃsu; kissa, kassa, kismiṃ, kasmiṃ; anitthiyanti-kiṃ? Ko, kaṃ.
Imassidaṃ 可——巴利
Imassidaṃ vā-.
与 aṃsisu 一起时,tehi 之后 imassa 的 idaṃ 在中性中可成为;idaṃ, imaṃ;idaṃ, imaṃ。巴利
Aṃsisu saha tehiimassidaṃ hoti vā napuṃsake; idaṃ, imaṃ; idaṃ,imaṃ.
Amussāduṃ——。巴利
Amussāduṃ-.
Aṃsisu中,与那些一起时,amussa变为aduṃ;或者在中性时;aduṃ,amuṃ;aduṃ,amuṃ。巴利
Aṃsisu saha tehi amussa aduṃ hoti vā napuṃsake; aduṃ, amuṃ; aduṃ, amuṃ.
Sumbhāmbhassāsmā-巴利
Sumbhāmbhassāsmā-
Amha 的 asmā 可(vā)于 sumhi;bhatti 与 asmāsu 中,那属于你的;或仅于 amhesu。巴利
Ahmassa asmā hoti vā sumhi; bhattīrasmāsu sā tava; vātveva-amhesu.
在naṃ词尾中,ti与catu的阴性形式为tissā、catassā——巴利
Namhi ticatuntamitthiyaṃ tissacatassā-.
于 namhi 时,ti 与 catu 的 ti、catu 之 ssavatassa 依 yathākkamaṃ 于阴性中成为 tissa、vatassa;tissannaṃ、vatassannaṃ;“于阴性中”为何?Tiṇṇaṃ、catunnaṃ。巴利
Namhi ticatunnaṃ tissavatassā hontitthiyaṃ yathākkamaṃ; tissannaṃ, vatassannaṃ; itthiyanti-kiṃ? Tiṇṇaṃ, catunnaṃ.
tisso、catasso 于 yo 词尾时,带词尾变化的——带词尾变化的 ti、catu 二词,于 yo 词尾时,在阴性中依次成为 tisso、catasso;tisso、catasso巴利
Tissocatasso yomhi savibhattīnaṃ-. Vibhattisahitānaṃ tivatunnaṃ yomhi tisso catasso hontitthiyaṃ yathākkamaṃ; tisso,catasso
中性中用“tīṇi”“cattāri”——巴利
Tīṇicattāri napuṃsake-.
于yo格中,带格尾的ti与catu二词,中性依次变为tīṇi、cattāri;tīṇi、cattāri。巴利
Yomhisavibhattīnaṃ ticatunnaṃ yathākkamaṃtīṇi cattāri honti napuṃsake; tīṇi, cattāri.
阳性时为tayo、cattāro——巴利
Pume tayocattāro-.
在 yomhi 中,带有格尾的 ti 与 catu 依序在阳性中变为 tayo 与 cattāro;即 tayo、cattāro。巴利
Yomhi savibhattīnaṃ ticatunnaṃ tayocattāro honti yathākkamaṃ pulliṅge; tayo, cattāro.
Caturo 或 catussa——巴利
Caturovā catussa-.
catu 一词带格尾时,在 yo 词尾中,阳性也可成为 caturo;caturo janā saṃvidhāya;为何?Caturo nimittenāddasāsiṃ 是由于性别的转换。巴利
Catusaddassa savibhattissa yombhi caturo vā hoti pulliṅge; caturo janā saṃvidhāya; kathaṃ? Caturo nimittenāddasāsinti liṅgavipallāsā.
mayam asmā amhassa——。巴利
Mayamasmāmhassa-.
于 ye 等〔词尾〕中,带格尾的 amha 依次变为 asmākaṃ、mamaṃ;或者依次变为 asmākaṃ、amhākaṃ;mamaṃ、mama。巴利
Yeyāsvamhassa savibhattissaasmākaṃmamaṃ honti vā yathākkamaṃ; asmākaṃ, amhākaṃ; mamaṃ, mama.
Simbhahaṃ——。巴利
Simbhahaṃ-.
在si中,带格变化的amha变为ahaṃ;ahaṃ。巴利
Simhi amhassa savibhattissa ahaṃ hoti; ahaṃ.
tumha 的 si 与 amhi 词尾中,有 tuvaṃ 与 tvaṃ——。巴利
Tumhassa tuvaṃtvamamhi ca-.
于 Amhī 与 simhi 中,带词尾的 tuhma 依次变为 tuvaṃ 与 tvaṃ;tuvaṃ、tvaṃ。巴利
Amhī simhi ca tuhmassa savibhattissa tuvaṃtvaṃ honti yathākkamaṃ; tuvaṃ, tvaṃ.
于 tayā、tayī 之后,tassa 的 ta 可变为 tvaṃ——巴利
Tayātayīnaṃ tvaṃ vā tassa-.
tumha 的 tayā、tayi 两形中,ta 的 t 可变为 tv;即 tvayā、tayā;tvayi、tayi。巴利
Tumhassatayātayīnaṃ takārassatva hoti vā; tvayā, tayā; tvayi, tayi.
于smā中,为tvamhā——巴利
Smāmhi tvamhā-.
在 smā 词尾中,带词尾的 tumha 变为“tvamhā”,可;pattā nissaṃsayaṃ〔〕“tvamhā”——“vātveva”——“tvayā”。巴利
Smāmhi tumhassa savibhattissa tvamhā hoti vā; pattā nissaṃsayaṃ [ ] tvamhā–-vātveva-tvayā.
nta 与 ntu 词干在 paṭhame yomhi 中变为 nto——巴利
Ntantunaṃ nto yomhi paṭhame-.
于第一格 yomhi 中,带词尾的 ntanta 与 ntu 词干,其词尾可替换为 nto;gacchanto,gacchantā;guṇavanto,guṇavantā。巴利
Paṭhame yomhi ntantunaṃ savibhattinaṃ nto iccādeso vā hoti; gacchanto, gacchantā; guṇavanto, guṇavantā.
于namhi之前可变为taṃ——巴利
Taṃ namhi-.
于namhi中,以nta结尾的词干连同其格尾,可变为taṃ;gacchataṃ,gacchantānaṃ;guṇavataṃ,guṇavantānaṃ。巴利
Namhi ntantunaṃ savibhattinaṃ taṃ vā hoti; gacchataṃ, gacchantānaṃ; guṇavataṃ, guṇavantānaṃ.
to、tā、ti、tā 于 sa、smā、smiṃ、nā 之前——巴利
Totātitā sasmāsmiṃnāsu-.
以 sa 等开头的格位中,以 nta 结尾的词干连其格尾,可按次第替换为 to、tā、ti、tā;gacchato,gacchantassa;guṇavato,guṇavantassa;gacchatā,gacchantamhā;guṇavatā,guṇavantamhā;gacchati,gacchante;guṇavati,guṇavante;gacchatā,gacchantena;guṇavatā,guṇavantena。巴利
Sādisuntantunaṃ savibhattinaṃ totātitā honti vā yathākkamaṃ; gacchato, gacchantassa; guṇavato, guṇavantassa; gacchatā, gacchantamhā; guṇavatā, guṇavantamhā; gacchati, gacchante;guṇavati, guṇavante; gacchatā, gacchantena; guṇavatā, guṇavantena.
Ṭaṭāaṃ 于 ge 之后——。巴利
Ṭaṭāaṃ ge-.
于 ge 之后时,nta 与 ntu 连同其格尾,替换为 ṭa、ṭā、aṃ;bho gaccha, bho gacchā, bhoka gacchaṃ; bho guṇava, bho guṇavā, bho guṇavaṃ.巴利
Ge pare ntantunaṃ savibhattīnaṃ ṭaṭāaṃ iccādesā honti; bho gaccha, bho gacchā, bhoka gacchaṃ; bho guṇava, bho guṇavā, bho guṇavaṃ.
在 yomhi 中,dvinnaṃ 变成 duve 和 dve——巴利
Yomhi dvinnaṃ duveñce-.
于 yomhi 中,带各格语尾的 dvi 分别成为 duve dve;duve、dve。巴利
Yomhi dvissa savibhattissa duvedve honti paccekaṃ; duve, dve.
在带 naṃ 词尾时,或作 duvinnaṃ——巴利
Duvinnaṃ namhi vā-.
于 naṃ 位格中,带格尾的 dvi 可成为 duvinnaṃ;duvinnaṃ、dvinnaṃ。巴利
Namhi dvissa savibhattissa duvinnaṃ hoti vā; duvinnaṃ, dvinnaṃ.
rājassa 变为 raññaṃ——巴利
Rājassa raññaṃ-.
在 Namhi 中,rājasadda 的带词尾的〔形式〕变为 raññaṃ,可选;raññaṃ,rajānaṃ。巴利
Namhi rājasaddassasavibhattissaraññaṃ hoti vā; raññaṃ, rajānaṃ
于 nā、smāsu 中,变为 raññā——巴利
Nāsmāsu raññā-.
于 nā、smā 等格位中,rāja 连同其格尾变为 raññā——raññā kataṃ、raññā nissaṭaṃ。巴利
Nāsmāsu rājassa savibhattissaraññā hoti, raññā kataṃ, raññānissaṭaṃ.
在 rājan 词干的属格单数中,rañño、raññassa、rañjino 之后接 se-。巴利
Raññoraññassarājino se-.
属格单数中,带格尾的‘rāja’(王)一词可变作‘rañño’、‘raññassa’或‘rājino’三种形式。巴利
Se rājassa savibhattissa raññoraññassarājino hontī; rañño, raññassa, rājino.
于 Smimhi,raññerājini——巴利
Smimhi raññerājini-.
于位格中,rāja 的带格尾形式为 raññe、rājini;即 raññe、rājini。巴利
Smimhi rājassa savibhattissa raññerājini honti; raññe,rājini.
“Samāse vā”意为“于复合词中亦然”,指前述词义在复合语中同样适用。巴利
Samāse vā-.
在复合词的范围内,这些是 rājā(国王)的替代形式:kāsiraññā 与 kāsirājena 表示“由迦尸王国王”;kāsiraññā 与 kāsirājasmā 表示“从迦尸王国王”;kāsirañño 与 kāsirājassa 表示“迦尸王国王的”;kāsiraññe 与 kāsirāje 表示“在迦尸王国王处”。巴利
Samāsavisaye ete ādesā rājassavā honti; kāsiraññā, kāsirājena; kāsiraññā, kāsirājasmā; kāsirañño, kāsirājassa; kāsiraññe, kāsirāje.
“斯密姆希”乃属“你们、我们”诸词之格位语尾变化(属格、位格等)。巴利
Smimhi tumhāmhānaṃtayimayi-.
于smim中,tumha与amha词干的带格尾形式依次为tayi与mayi;tayi、mayi。巴利
Smimhi tumhaamhasaddānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ tayimayi honti yathākkamaṃ; tayi,mayayi.
于 Amhi 之前,taṃ、maṃ、tavaṃ、mamaṃ——巴利
Amhi taṃmaṃtavaṃmamaṃ-.
于amhi中,带格尾的tumha、amha词干依次成为taṃ、maṃ、tavaṃ、mamaṃ;即taṃ、maṃ、tavaṃ、mamaṃ。巴利
Amhi tumhaamhasaddānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ taṃmaṃtavaṃmamaṃ honti yathākkamaṃ; taṃ, maṃ, tavaṃ, mamaṃ.
在 Nāsmāsu 中 tayāmayā——巴利
Nāsmāsutayāmayā-.
于nā、smā、su中,tumha与amha词干带格尾的形式依次变为tayā与mayā;tayā kataṃ,mayā kataṃ;tayā nissaṭaṃ,mayā nissaṭaṃ。巴利
Nāsmāsu tumhaamhasaddānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ tayāmayā honti yathākkamaṃ; tayā kataṃ, mayā kataṃ; tayā nissaṭaṃ, mayā nissaṭaṃ.
tava mama tuyhaṃ mayhaṃ se——。巴利
Tavamamatuyhaṃmayhaṃ se-.
于 se 词尾,带格尾的 tumha 与 amha 词干依次变为 tava、mama、tuyhaṃ、mayhaṃ;tava、tuyhaṃ;mama、mayhaṃ。巴利
Setumhaamhasaddānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ tavamamatuyhaṃmayhaṃ honti yathākkamaṃ; tava, tuyhaṃ; mama,mayhaṃ.
ṅaṃ 与 ṅakaṃ 于业格——巴利
Ṅaṃṅakaṃ namhi-.
于 namhi 之前,带格词尾的 tumha、amha 词干分别变为 ṅaṃ、ṅākaṃ——tumhaṃ、tumhākaṃ、amhaṃ、amhākaṃ——此处不依次第对应。巴利
Namhi tumhaamhasaddānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ ṅaṃṅākaṃ honti paccekaṃ; tumhaṃ, tumhākaṃ, amhaṃ, amhākaṃ–-yathāsaṅkhyamatra na vivacchate.
于第二格中,yomhi 亦可——巴利
Dutiye yomhi vā-.
tumha 与 amha 词,连同各自的格尾,在带 yoṃ 的第二格中,分别变为 ṅaṃ 或 ṅākaṃ;tumhaṃ、tumhākaṃ、tumhe;amhaṃ、amhākaṃ、amhe。巴利
Tumhaamhasaddānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ paccekaṃ ṅaṃṅākaṃ vā honti yomhi dutiye; tumhaṃ’tumhākaṃ, tumhe; amhaṃ,amhākaṃ,amhe.
词非句首,同在一句之中。巴利
Apādādo padatekavākye-.
此应知为上文;pajjate’nenatthoti——pada,即以si等结尾者与以ti等结尾者;padasamūho即vākya。巴利
Idamadhikataṃ veditabbaṃ; pajjate’nenatthoti-padaṃ, syādyantaṃ tyādyāntañca; padasamūho vākyaṃ.
在 yo、naṃ、hi、su 之后,若非第五格,则变为 vo、no——巴利
Yonaṃhisvapañcamyā vono-.
非第五格时,tumha与amha词若有词尾变化,且处于同一句中、位于yonaṃhi等词之后,则其vo与no可按顺序分别替代它们;tiṭṭhatha vo,tiṭṭhatha tumhe;tiṭṭhāma no,tiṭṭhāma mayaṃ;passati vo,passati tumhe;passati no,passatiamhe;dīyate vo,dīyate tumhaṃ;dīyate no,巴利
Apañcamiyā yonaṃhisvapādādo vattamānānaṃ padasmā paresaṃ ekavākye ṭhitānaṃ tumhaamhasaddānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ vo no honti vā yathākkamaṃ; tiṭṭhatha vo, tiṭṭhatha tumhe; tiṭṭhāma no, tiṭṭhāma mayaṃ; passati vo, passati tumhe; passati no, passatiamhe; dīyate vo, dīyate tumhaṃ; dīyate no,
Dīyate amhaṃ; dhanaṃ vo, dhanaṃ tumhaṃ; dhanaṃ no, dhanaṃ amhaṃ; kataṃ vo, kataṃ tumhehi; kataṃ no, kataṃ amhehi——何谓“非从格”?Nissaṭaṃ tumhehi, nissaṭaṃ amhehi;而唯是非从格。巴利
Dīyate amhaṃ; dhanaṃ vo, dhanaṃ tumhaṃ; dhanaṃ no, dhanaṃ amhaṃ; kataṃ vo, kataṃ tumhehi; kataṃ no, kataṃ amhehi–-apañcamyāti-kiṃ?Nissaṭaṃ tumhehi, nissaṭaṃ amhehi; apādādotveva
“ Balañca bhikkhūnamanuppadinnaṃ,〔而力量也被施予了比丘们〕
你们所造的福德不少。”巴利
‘‘Balañca bhikkhūnamanuppadinnaṃ, Tumhehi puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappakaṃ’’;
于词分别时——tumhe tiṭṭhatha;于同一句中——devadatto tiṭṭhati gāme, tumhe tiṭṭhatha nagare;于带格尾者——arahati dhammo tumhādinaṃ;arahati dhammo amhādisānaṃ。巴利
Padatotveva- tumhe tiṭṭhatha; ekavākyetveva- devadatto tiṭṭhati gāme, tumhe tiṭṭhathanagare; savibhattīnaṃtveva- arahati dhammo tumhādinaṃ; arahati dhammo amhādisānaṃ.
于具格 nā 与属格 se,依次变为 te 与 me——巴利
Teme nāse-.
当 tumha 与 amha 词干连同其格尾出现在 nā 与 se 的场合中,紧跟在 apādāda 等词之后,并与该词同处一句时,它们可依次成为 te 与 me;例如 kataṃ te,kataṃ tayā;kataṃ me,kataṃ mayā;dīyate te,dīyate tava;dīyate me,dīyate mama;dhanaṃ te,dhanaṃ me,dhanaṃ mama。巴利
Nāmhi se ca apādādo vattamānānaṃ padasmā paresaṃ eka vākye ṭhitānaṃ tumhaambhasaddānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ teme vā honti yathākkamaṃ; kataṃ te, kataṃ tayā; kataṃme, kataṃ mayā; dīyate te, dīyate tava; dīyate me, dīyayate mama; dhanaṃ te, dhanaṃme, dhanaṃ mama.
于回指〔anvādese〕时——。巴利
Anvādese-.
在已说与复说的情况下,tumha、amha 词干的替代形式于再次提及之时必定出现;gāmo tumhaṃ pariggaho,atho janapado vo pariggaho。巴利
Kathitānukathanavisaye tumhaamhasaddānamādesā niccaṃ bhavanti punabbidhānā; gāmo tumhaṃ pariggaho, atho janapado vo pariggaho.
或为带前缀者,或以第一格结尾者——巴利
Sapubbā paṭhamantā vā-.
后接的 tumha 与 amha 词,若其前面有先行词、且该先行词以第一格结尾,则可用替代形式,在复指时亦然;例如:gāme paṭo tumhākaṃ, atho nagare kambalo vo;atho nagare kambalo tumhākaṃ;何谓“有先行词”?paṭo tumhākaṃ, atho kambalo vo;何谓“以第一格结尾”?paṭo nagare tumhākaṃ, atho kambalo gāme vo。巴利
Vijjamānapubbasmā paṭhamantā paresaṃ tumhaamhasaddānamā desā vā honti anvādese’pi; gāme paṭo tumhākaṃ, atho nagare kambalo vo; atho nagare kambalo tumhākaṃ; sapubbāti-kiṃ? Paṭo tumhākaṃ, atho kambalo vo; paṭha mantāti-kiṃ-paṭo nagare tumhākaṃ, atho kambalo gāme vo.
在 va、vā、hā、he、va 结合时不〔发生替代〕。巴利
Na vavāhāhevayoge-.
与ca等连用时,第二、第一人称词的替代形式便不采用:村庄是你的领地,也是我的领地;村庄或是你的领地,或是我的领地;村庄既是你的领地,又是我的领地;村庄本就是你的领地,本就是我的领地——如此,一切处皆应如是举例。为何说“连用”?答:村庄是你的领地,城镇是我的领地。巴利
Cādīhi yoge tumhaamhasaddānamādesā na honti; gāmo tava ca pariggaho, mama ca pariggaho; gāmo tava vā pariggaho, mama vā pariggaho; gāmo tavaha pariggaho, mamaha pariggaho; gāmo tavāha pariggaho, mamāha parigga ho; gāmā taveva pariggaho, mameva pariggaho; evaṃ sabbattha udāhararitabbaṃ–-yogeti kiṃ? Gāmoca te pariggaho, nagarañca me pariggaho.
以“见”之义为眼——巴利
Dassanatthenālocane-.
于表“见”义、离“观察”义而用时,tumha、amha 词干的替换形式不出现;gāmo tumhe uddissāgato,gāmo amhe uddissāgato——何谓“非观察”?gāmo vo āloveti,gāmo no āloceti。巴利
Dassanatthesu ālocanavajjitesu payujjamānesu tumha amhasaddānamādesā na honti; gāmo tumhe uddissāgato, gāmo amhe uddissāgato–-anālocaneti-kiṃ? Gāmo vo āloveti, gāmo no āloceti.
呼格在前,如同不存在一般。巴利
Āmantaṇaṃ pubbamasantaṃva-.
呼格如同先前不存在,于 tumha、amha 词的替换范围中;devadatta tava pariggaho——何以说“呼格”?Kambalo te pariggaho;何以说“先前”?“Mayetaṃ sabba makkhātaṃ tumhākaṃ dvijapuṅgavā”,于他确实不存在故,则不应有“从格”之遮止?何以说“如”?Savanaṃ yathā siyā。巴利
Āmantaṇaṃ pubbamavijjamānaṃ viya hoti tumhaamhasaddāna mādesavisaye; devadatta tava pariggaho–-āmantaṇantikiṃ? Kambalo te pariggaho; pubbanti-kiṃ?’Mayetaṃ sabba makkhātaṃ tumhākaṃ dvijapuṅgavā’ parassa hi [ ] avijjamānantā apādādoti-paṭisedhona siyā? Ivāti-kiṃ? Savanaṃ[ ] yathā siyā.
非“sāmañña”一词表示同一意义——巴利
Na sāmaññavacanamekatthe-.
于所依相同时,紧随其后的共同称呼语,如同不存在那样,不成为呼格;māṇavaka jaṭilaka te pariggaho——即使他人原本并无此称呼,也依托前一种形式而发生替换;何谓“共同称呼语”?Devadatta māṇavaka tava pariggaho;何谓“同一事物”?Devadatta yaññadatta tumhaṃ pariggaho。巴利
Samānādhikaraṇe parato sāmaññavacanamāmantaṇamasantaṃ viya na hoti; māṇavaka jaṭilaka tepariggaho–-parassā vijjamānatte’pi pubbarūpamupādāyādeso hoti; sāmañña vacananti-kiṃ? Devadatta māṇavaka tava pariggaho; ekatthetikiṃ? Devadatta yaññadatta tumhaṃ pariggaho.
于多数时,可作 vā——。巴利
Bahusu vā-.
于复数中现存的呼语,通称于同一义中,如不存在那样,可不存在;brāhmaṇā guṇavanto tumhākaṃ pariggaho;brāhmaṇā guṇavanto vo pariggaho。巴利
Bahusu vattamānamāmantaṇaṃ sāmaññavacanamekatthe avijjamānaṃ viya vā na hoti; brāhmaṇā guṇavanto tumhākaṃ pariggaho; brāhmaṇā guṇavanto vo pariggaho.
如是目犍连语法 vutti 中 syādi 篇为第二。巴利
Iti moggallāne vyākaraṇe vuttiyaṃ syādikaṇḍo dutiyo.
Syādi 等语尾,即是 syādi 等之同一义——巴利
Syādi syādinekatthaṃ-.
凡具格尾之词与另一具格尾之词共成一义——此即应知的附加要义;而将那些原本意义各别的词合为同一义,即称为复合词。巴利
Syādyantaṃ syādyāntena sahekatthaṃ hotīti-idamadhikataṃ veditabbaṃ; so ca bhinnatthānamekatthibhāvo samāsoti vuccate.
Asaṃkhyaṃ 于词尾、具足、近、全、无、如、后、同时之义——巴利
Asaṃkhyaṃ vibhattisampattisamīpasākalyābhāvayathā pacchāyugapadatthe-.
Asaṃkhyaṃ 以 syā 等结尾、用于 vibhatti 等意义时,与以 syā 等结尾者成为同一意义;其中,于 vibhatti 义,首先在阴性词中论述——adhitthi——sampatti 有两种:attasampatti 与 samiddhi。sampannaṃ brahmaṃ sabrahmaṃ,licchavīnaṃ;samiddhi bhikkhānaṃ subhikkhaṃ。Samīpe——kumbhassa samīpamupakumbhaṃ——sākalye——satiṇamajjho harati;sāggyadhīte——abhāvo 因 sambandhi 分别而多种多样;其中 iddhābhāve——vigatā iddhi saddikānaṃ dussaddikaṃ;atthābhāve——abhāvo makkhikānaṃ nimmakkhikaṃ;atikkamābhāve——atigatāni tiṇāni nittiṇaṃ;sampatābhāve——atigataṃ lahupāpuraṇaṃ ati lahupāpuraṇaṃ;lahupāpuraṇassa nāyamupabhogakāloti attho。Yayathāttho 有多种;其中 yoggatāyaṃ——anurūpaṃ surūpo vahati;vicchāyaṃ——anvaddhamāsaṃ;atthānativattiyaṃ——yathāsatti;sadisatte——sadiso kikhiyā sakikhi;ānupubbiyaṃ——anujeṭṭhaṃ;pacchātthe——anurathaṃ;yugapadatthe——sacakkaṃ nidhi。巴利
Asaṃkhyaṃ syyādyantaṃ vibhatyādīnamatthe vattamānaṃ syādyantena sahekatthaṃ bhavati; tattha vibhatyatthe tāva-itthisu kathā pavattā adhitthi–-sampatti dvidhā attasampatti samiddhi casampannaṃ brahmaṃ sabrahmaṃ, licchavīnaṃ; samiddhi bhikkhānaṃ subhikkhaṃ. Samīpe-kumbhassa samīpamupakumbhaṃ–-sākalye-satiṇamajjho harati; sāggyadhīte–-abhāvo sambandhibhedā bahuvidho; tatra iddhābhāve-vigatā iddhi saddikānaṃ dussaddikaṃ; atthābhāve-abhāvo makkhikānaṃ nimmakkhikaṃ; atikkamābhāve-atigatāni tiṇāni nittiṇaṃ; sampatābhāve-atigataṃ lahupāpuraṇaṃ ati lahupāpuraṇaṃ; lahupāpuraṇassa nāyamupabhogakāloti attho. Yayathāttho’nekavidho; tatra yoggatāyaṃ-anurūpaṃ surūpo vahati; vicchāyaṃ -anvaddhamāsaṃ; atthānativattiyaṃ- yathāsatti; sadisatte- sadiso kikhiyā[ ] sakikhi; ānupubbiyaṃ- anujeṭṭhaṃ; pacchātthe [ -]anurathaṃ; yugapadatthe-sacakkaṃ nidhi.
yathā 不用于不相等中——巴利
Yathā na tulye-.
“如”(yathā)一词用于同等义时,不与带名词格尾的词构成同义复合词;例如:如 devadatta,亦如 yaññadatta。巴利
Yathāsaddotulyatthe vattamāno syādyantena sahekattho na bhavati; yathā devadatto tathā yaññadatto.
Yāva 在限定中——巴利
Yāvāvadhāraṇe-.
yāva一词表限定时,与带有格尾的词一起构成同义复合词;限定即以量界别;yāvāmattaṃ brāhmaṇe āmantaya;yāvajīvaṃ——何谓限定?yāva dinnaṃ tāva bhuttaṃ nāvadhārayāmi kittakaṃ mayā bhuttanti。巴利
Yāvasaddo’vadhāraṇe vattamāno syādyantena sahekattho bhavati; avadhāraṇamettakatā paricchedo; yāvāmattaṃ brāhmaṇe āmantaya; yāvajīvaṃ–-avadhāraṇeti-kiṃ, yāva dinnaṃtāva bhuttaṃ nāvadhārayāmi kittakaṃ mayā bhuttanti.
Payya、pā、bahi、tiro、pure、pacchā 之后,于第五格——巴利
Payyapābahitiropurepacchāvā pañcamyā-.
pari 等词与第五格尾词一起构成同义复合词,或(vā);pari pabbataṃ vassi devo,paripabbatā;apapabbataṃ vassi devo,apa pabbatā;āpāṭaliputtaṃ vassidevo,āpāṭaliputtā;bahigāmaṃ,bahigāmā;tiropabbataṃ,tiropabbatā;purebhattaṃ,purebhattā;pacchābhattaṃ,pacchābhattā——vetādhikāro巴利
Pariādayo vañcamyantena sahekatthā honti vā; pari pabbataṃ vassi devo, paripabbatā; apapabbataṃ vassi devo, apa pabbatā; āpāṭaliputtaṃ vassidevo, āpāṭaliputtā; bahigāmaṃ, bahigāmā; tiropabbataṃ, tiropabbatā; purebhattaṃ, purebhattā; pacchābhattaṃ, pacchābhattā–-vetādhikāro
anu- 表邻近义与延伸义。巴利
Samīpāyāmesvanu-.
“anu”一词,在表示“附近”和“延伸”义时,与有格尾的词一起构成同一义复合词,可(vā);anuvanamasani gatā;anugaṅgaṃ bārāṇasī——samīpāyāmesviti——kiṃ,rukkhamanuvijjotate vijju。巴利
Anusaddo sāmīpye āyāme ca vattamāno syādyantena sahekattho hotī vā; anuvanamasani gatā; anugaṅgaṃ bārāṇasī–-samīpāyāmesviti-kiṃ, rukkhamanuvijjotate vijju.
tiṭṭhagv 等——。巴利
Tiṭṭhagvādini-.
‘tiṭṭhagu’等词,在表达单一含义时,以约定俗成的方式构成复合词:如‘牛站立之时’合为‘tiṭṭhagu’,指时节;‘牛负重之时’合为‘vahaggu’,指时节;又如‘āyatigavaṃ’(未来的牛群)、‘khaleyavaṃ’(谷场上的大麦)、‘lūnayavaṃ’(已割的大麦)、‘lūyamānayavaṃ’(正在割的大麦)等——此处末尾音节亦有脱落;又如‘kesākesi’(发对发,即揪发相斗)、‘daṇḍādaṇḍi’(棒对棒,即持棒相斗)——同样,也有表示时间关系的用法;如‘早晨沐浴’合为‘pātanahānaṃ’,‘傍晚沐浴’合为‘sāyanahānaṃ’;又如‘pātakālaṃ’(清晨时分)、‘sāyakālaṃ’(傍晚时分);‘pātameghaṃ’(清晨之云)、‘sāyameghaṃ’(傍晚之云);‘pātamaggaṃ’(清晨之路)、‘sāyamaggaṃ’(傍晚之路)。巴利
Tiṭṭhaguppabhutīni, ekatthibhāvavisaye nipātīyante;’tiṭṭhantī gāvo yasmiṃ kāle’tiṭṭhagu, kālo; vahaggu, kālo; āyatigavaṃ, khaleyavaṃ, lūnayavaṃ, lūyamānayavamiccādi–-vyanto’pettha; kesākesi; daṇḍādaṇḍi–-tathā velāppabhāvanattho’pi; pāto nahānaṃ pātanahānaṃ; sāyaṃ nahānaṃ sāyanahānaṃ; pātakālaṃ, sāyakālaṃ; pātameghaṃ, sāyameghaṃ; pātamaggaṃ, sāyamaggaṃ.
“此岸、周边、彼岸、中间、下方、上方、底下”等词,可替代第六格(属格)。巴利
Oreparipaṭipāremajjheheṭhuddhādhonto vā chaṭṭhīyā-.
此岸等词与第六格(属格)词相结合,共同表达同一意义;因语法规则强制其词尾为长元音‘ā’,故无词形变化。例如:oregaṅgaṃ(此岸之恒河)、uparisikharaṃ(峰顶之上)、paṭisotaṃ(逆流)、pāreyamunaṃ(彼岸之耶穆那河)、majjhegaṅgaṃ(恒河中段)、heṭṭhāpāsādaṃ(殿堂之下)、uddhagaṅgaṃ(恒河上游)、adhogaṅgaṃ(恒河下游)、antopāsādaṃ(殿堂之内)。又因另有规定,也可有‘gaṅgāoraṃ’(恒河此岸)等双重形式。巴利
Orādayo saddā chaṭṭhiyantena sahekatthā vā honti; ekārantattaṃ nipātanato–-oregaṅgaṃ; uparisikharaṃ; paṭi sotaṃ; pāreyamunaṃ; majjhegaṅgaṃ; heṭṭhāpāsādaṃ; uddhagaṅgaṃ; adhogaṅgaṃ; antopāsādaṃ–-puna vāvidhānā gaṅgāoramiccā dipi hoti.
凡是这类未超越常规的复合词,应知其为中性;如所举例;又依“bahula”(通常)规则,有时亦非如此——yathāparisaṃ, yathā parisāya;意为“各自的团体”。巴利
Yadetamatakkantamekatthaṃ taṃ napuṃsakaliṅgaṃ veditabbaṃ; tathā vevodāhaṭaṃ; vā kvaci bahulādhikārā–-yathāparisaṃ, yathā parisāya; sakāya sakāya parisāyāti attho.
以“a”等结尾的词,与带有格尾的词,通常复合为一词;gāmaṃ gato——gāmagato;muhuttaṃ sukhaṃ——muhuttasukhaṃ。依惯用语,在依主释复合词中——kumbhakāro;sapāko;tantavāyo;carā haro——以“nta”、“māna”、“ktavantu”结尾者仍是独立的句子;dhammaṃ suṇanto;dhammaṃ suṇamāno;odanaṃ bhuttavā。巴利
Amādisyādyantaṃ syādyāntena saha bahulamekatthaṃ hoti;’gāmaṃ gato’ gāmagato;’muhuttaṃ sukhaṃ’ muhuttasukhaṃ. Vuttiye vopapadasamāse-kumbhakāro; sapāko; tantavāyo; carā haro–-ntamānaktavantuhi vākyameva; dhammaṃ suṇanto; dhammaṃ suṇamāno; odanaṃ bhuttavā.’
“被王杀”合成“王杀”;“被剑斩”合成“剑斩”;“似父”;“如父”;“伴随乐”;“以酪浇淋之食”合成“酪食”;“以糖块混合之粥”合成“糖粥”。依语法,由词本身即可表达浇淋等动作之义,故无意义不相应之失。巴利
Raññā hato’ rājahato;’asinā chinno’ asicchinno; pitusadiso; pitusamo; sukhasahagataṃ;’dadhinā upasittaṃ bhojanaṃ’dadhibhojanaṃ;’guḷena misso odano’ guḷodano. Vutti padenevopasittādikriyāyākhyāpanato natthāyuttatthatā.
有时仅是词形变化;如urago pādapo——有时仅是句子;如pharasunā chinnavā;dassanena pahātabbā。巴利
Kvavi vuttiyeva; urago pādapo–-kvavi vākyameva; pharasunā chinnavā; dassanena pahātabbā.’
“应施予佛者”合为“佛应施”;“柱用之木”合为“柱木”;“染用之槽”合为“染槽”;此处不成立者:“应施予僧团”——为何?此义即彼义——将属于他词之义而成立。巴利
Buddhassadeyyaṃ’ buddhadeyyaṃ;’yūpāya dāru’ yūpadāru;’rajanāya doṇi’ rajanadoṇi; idha na hoti-saṅghassa dātabbaṃ–-kathaṃ, etadattho etadatthanti-aññapadatthe bhavissati.’
“因野兽而生恐”合为“野兽恐”;“出村”;“离欲”。某些情况下依文法即可:“业生”、“心生”——此处不成立者:“从树而堕”。巴利
Savarehi bhayaṃ’ savarabhayaṃ; gāmaniggato, methunāpeto. Kvaci vuttiyeva; kammajaṃ, cittajaṃ–-idha na hoti-rukkhā patito.’
rañño puriso’ rājapuriso——依 bahula 主导规则,在 ntamāna、niddhāriya、pūraṇa、bhāva、tittattha 等义中不〔合成〕;mamānukubbaṃ;mamānu kurumāno;gunnaṃ kaṇhā sampannakhīratamā;sissānaṃ pañcamo;paṭassa sukkatā——于某些情况下确实发生;vattamānasāmīpyaṃ——kathaṃ brāhmaṇassa sukkā dantāti:因 sāpekkhatā 而不〔合成〕——但此处却确实发生:candanagandho;nadīghoso;kaññārūpaṃ;kāyasamphasso?Phalarasoti〔——〕phalāna巴利
Rañño puriso’ rājapuriso–-bahulādhikārā ntamāna niddhāriyapūraṇabhāvatittatthehi na hoti; mamānukubbaṃ; mamānu kurumāno; gunnaṃ kaṇhā sampannakhīratamā; sissānaṃ pañcamo; paṭassa sukkatā–-kvaci hoteva; vattamānasāmīpyaṃ–-kathaṃ brāhmaṇassa sukkā dantāti-sāpekkhatāya na hoti–-idha panahoteva candanagandho; nadīghoso; kaññārūpaṃ; kāyasamphasso?Phalarasoti [ –-]phalānaṃtitto; phalānamāsito[ ] phalānaṃ suhito; brāhmaṇassौccaṃ gehanti; sāpekkha tāya na hoti–-raññopāṭaliputtakassadhananti–-dhana sambandhe chaṭṭhīti pāṭaliputtakैnasambandhābhāvā nahessati; rañño’gova asso ca puriso cā’ti bhīnnatthatāyaṃ [ ] vākya meva–-’rañño gavāssapurisā rājagavāssapurisāti vutti hotevekatthibhāve.’Dānesoṇḍo’ dānasoṇḍo; dhammarato; dānabhirato–-kvacivuttiyeva; kucchisayo; thalaṭṭho; paṅkajaṃ; saroruhaṃ idha na hoti bhojane mattaññutā; indriyesu guttadvāratā; āsane nisinno āsane nisīditabbaṃ.
修饰语与被修饰语同指一物。巴利
Visesanamekatthena-.
修饰语与所修饰者同义时,与所修饰者同义、同格、同数,成为同义结合:“nīlañca taṃ uppalañce”即niluppala,“chinnañca taṃ parūḷhañce”即chinnaparūḷha;如satthi与satthī,“satthī ca sāsāmā ce”即satthisāmā;如sīha与sīho,“muni ca so sīho vā”即munisīho;“sīlameva dhanaṃ”即sīladhanaṃ——有时仅是句子,如puṇṇo mantāṇiputto;citto gahapati。——有时仅是词尾变化;kaṇhasappo;lohitasāli。Visesana是什么?Tacchako sappo。Ekatthena是什么?Kāḷamhā añño——如何,patta jīviko āpannajīviko[ ] māsajāto——于不同词义时将会成立。巴利
Visesanaṃ syādyantaṃ visessena syādyāntena samānādhikaraṇenasahekatthaṃ hoti;’nīlañca taṃ uppalañce’ti niluppalaṃ,’chinnañca taṃ parūḷhañce’ti chinnaparūḷhaṃ; satthiva satthī,’satthī ca sāsāmā ce’ti satthisāmā; sīhova sīho,’muni ca sosīho vā’timunisīho;’sīlameva dhanaṃ’ sīladhanaṃ–-kci vākyameva, puṇṇo mantāṇiputto; citto gahapati.–-Kvaci vuttiyeva; kaṇhasappo; lohitasāli. Visesananti-kiṃ? Tacchako sappo. Ekattheneti-kiṃ? Kāḷamhā añño–-kathaṃ, patta jīviko āpannajīviko[ ] māsajātoti-aññapadatthe bhavissati.
此否定词与有语尾变化之词一起,与有语尾变化之词成为同一意义;na brāhmaṇo abrāhmaṇo——由于多为权宜之说,与无能力义者某些情况下亦有;apunageyyā, gāthā——anokāsaṃ kāretvā amūlāmūlaṃ gantvā——īsakaḷāro īsapiṅgaloti——有语尾变化之词与有语尾变化之词成为同一意义,是为复合词;或只是句子,因无过度扩展之故。巴利
Nañiccetaṃ syādyantaṃ syādyantena sahekatthaṃ hoti; na brāhmaṇo abrāhmaṇo–-bahulādhikārato asamatthehipi kehici hoti; apunageyyā, gāthā–-anokāsaṃ kāretvā amūlāmūlaṃ gantvā–-īsakaḷāro īsapiṅgaloti-syādi syādinekatthanti samāso; vākyameva vātippasaṅgābhāvā.
Kupādayo〔ku 等〕常于 asyādi〔非格尾〕规则中。巴利
Kupādayo niccamasyādividhimhi-.
Kusadda 与 pāda 等,依 syādi 结尾,恒常与有同一义者结合,除 syādi 规则范围之外;“kucchito brāhmaṇo”为 kubrāhmaṇo,“īsakaṃ uṇhaṃ”为 kaduṇhaṃ;panāyako、abhiseko、pakarittvā、pakataṃ、duppuriso、dukkataṃ、supuriso、sukataṃ、abhitthutaṃ、atitthutaṃ、ākaḷāro、ābaddho。Pāda 等,于 gata 等义,依第一格;“pagato ācariyo”为 pācariyo;pantevāsī——acca 等,于 kanta 等义,依第二格;“atikkanto macaṃ”为 atimañco;atimālo。Ava 等,于 kuṭṭha 等义,依第三格;“avakuṭṭhaṃ kokilāya vanaṃ”为 avakokilaṃ;avamayayūraṃ。Pari 等,于 gilāna 等义,依第四格;“parigilāno jjhenāya”为 pariyajjheno——nyā 等,于 kanna 等义,依第五格;“nikkhanto kosambiyā”为 nikkosambi——asyādi 规则中,kiṃ 为何 rukkhaṃ pati vijjotate。巴利
Kusaddo pādayo ca syādyantena sahekatthā honti niccaṃ syadividhivisayato’ññattha;’kucchito brāhmaṇo’ kubrāhmaṇo,’īsakaṃ uṇhaṃ’ kaduṇhaṃ; panāyako, abhiseko, pakarittvā, pakataṃ, duppuriso, dukkataṃ, supuriso, sukataṃ, abhitthutaṃ, atitthutaṃ, ākaḷāro, ābaddho. Pādayo gatādyatthe paṭhamāya()’ pagato ācariyo’ pācariyo; pantevāsī–-accādayo kantādyatthe dutiyāya;()’atikkanto maca’matimañco; atimālo. Avādayo kuṭṭhādyatthe tatiyāya;()’avakuṭṭhaṃ kokilāya vana’mavakokilaṃ; avamayayūraṃ. Pariyādayo gilānādyatthe catutthiyā; ()’parigila no’jjhenāya’ pariyajjheno–-nyādayo kannādyatthe pañcamiyā()’nikkhantokosambiyā’ nikkosambi–-asyādividhimhīti kiṃrukkhampati vijjotate.
Cī〔后缀〕于表动作意义之〔词干〕之后——。巴利
Cī kriyatthehi-.
以-ci结尾的词,与表示“做”之义的词、以及有sya等词尾的词一起时,含有“一起”之义;如malinī kariya。巴利
Cīppaccayanto kriyatthehi syadyantehi sahekattho hoti; malinī kariya.
于 Bhusana、ādara、anādara 诸义中 alaṃ sā sā——巴利
Bhusanādarānādaresvalaṃsāsā-.
在bhusana等义(即“装饰”等意义)中,alaṃ等词与带syādi结尾的动词义(kriyātthe)结合时,具有共同之义;如alaṃkariya(装饰之后)、sakkacca(恭敬地)、asakkacca(不恭敬地)。那么bhusanādi(饰物等)指什么?如“alaṃ bhutvā gato”(吃够了之后去的)、“sakkatvā gato”(恭敬之后去的)、“asakkatvā gato”(不恭敬之后去的);pariyattaṃ(完全)即sobhana(美)与asobhana(不美)之义。巴利
Bhusanādisvatthesvalamādayo saddā kriyātthehi syādyantehi sahekatthā honti; alaṃkariya; sakkacca; asakkacca–-bhusanādīsūti-kiṃ? Alaṃ bhutvā gato; sakkatvā gato; asakkatvā gato; pariyattaṃ sobhanamasobhananti attho.
另有一些词,与表示动作并以 syādi 结尾的词结合时,大多表示同一意义;purobhuya;tirobhuya;tirokariya;urasikariya;manasikariya;majjhekariya;tuṇhibhuya。巴利
Aññe ca saddā kriyatthehi syādyantehi saha bahulamekatthā bhavanti; purobhuya; tirobhuya;tirokariya; urasikariya; manasikariya; majjhekariya; tuṇhibhuya.
可于多种他义中——。巴利
Vānekaññatthe-.
多数的词,若其义为“具有”且末尾为 syā 等,则可为另一词的“具有”义,或为单一义;许多财宝属于他,故为 bahudhano;耳朵下垂属于他,故为 lambakaṇṇo;金刚在手中属于他,故为 vajirapāṇi;此处有许多醉象,故为 mattabahumātaṅgaṃ,vanaṃ;登上树者,此人为 ārūḷhavānaro;诸根已被他征服,故为 jitindriyo;食物已被施与属于他,故为 dinnabhojano;黑点已离去,从布上,故为 apagatakāḷako;已到达十岁属于他们,故为 upadasā;近十岁;不远十岁?超过十岁;三与十为他们的量,故为 tidasā——如何?dasā 一词在“数”义中依“量”词之邻近而转用,如:五为他们的量,故为 pañcakā sakuṇā;或二或三为他们的量,故为 dvattayo;或于 vā 之义中——ve 或 tayo 或——dvattayo——东南方与东方之间者,为 dakkhiṇapubbā,dinā;或南方与东方,故为 dakkhiṇā vasā pubbā ca;与儿子同来者,为 saputto salomako,义为“有毛者存在”,如是 sapakkhako;有乳者,atthikhīrā,brāhmaṇi——atthi 一词在“存在”义中为不变词——有时因义已成就,故不用中间词,喉中有黑者属于他,为 kaṇṭhekāḷo;唇与面为他的面,故为 oṭṭhamukho;发聚为他的髻,故为 kesacūḷo;金所作之饰为他的饰,故为 suvaṇṇālaṅkāro;叶已落下属于他,故为 papatitapaṇṇo,papaṇṇo;不存在的儿子属于他,故为 avijjamānaputto;没有儿子属于他,故为 aputto——有时“不存在”于他,为 pañcabhuttavanto;兄弟之子属于他,义为“存在”,因多分增上故。巴利
Anekaṃ syādyantamaññassa padassatthe ekatthaṃ vā hoti; bahūni dhanāni yassaso’bahudhano;’lambā kaṇṇā yassa so’ lambakaṇṇo;’vajiraṃ pāṇimhi yassaso’yaṃ’ vajirapāṇi;’mattābahavo mātaṅgā ettha’ mattabahumātaṅgaṃ, vanaṃ;’ārūḷho vānaroyaṃ rukkhaṃ so’ ārūḷhavānaro;’jitāni indriyāni yenaso’ jitindriyo;’dinnaṃ bhojanaṃ yassaso’ dinnabhojano;’apagataṃ kāḷakaṃ yasmā paṭā so’ya’ mapagatakāḷako;’upagatādasa yesaṃ te’ upadasā; āsannadasā; adūradasā? Adhika dasā;’tayo dasa parimāṇamesaṃ) tidasā–-kathaṃ, dasasaddosaṃ khyāne vattate parimāṇasaddasannidhānā, yathā-pañcaparimāṇa mesaṃ’ pañcakā sakuṇāti; dve vā tayo vāparimāṇamesa’dvattayo;vāsaddatthe vā-’ve vā tayo vā’ dvattayo–-’dakkhiṇassā ca pubbassā ca disāya yadantarāḷaṃ’ dakkhiṇapubbā, dinā;’dakkhiṇā vasā pubbā cā’ti vā;’saha puttenāgato’ saputto salomako, vijjamānalomakoti attho evaṃ sapakkhako; atthikhīrā, brāhmaṇiti-atthisaddo vijjamānatthe nipāto–-kvaci gatatthatāya padantarānamappayogo, kaṇṭhaṭṭhā kāḷā assa kaṇṭhekāḷo; [ ] oṭṭhamukhamica mukhamassaoṭṭhamukho; kesasaṅghāto cūḷā assa kesacūḷo; suvaṇṇavikāro alaṅkāro assasuvaṇṇālaṅkāro;’ papatitaṃ paṇṇamassa’ papatitapaṇṇo, papaṇṇo;’avijjamānā puttā assa’ avijjamānaputto;’na santi puttā assa’ aputto–-kvaci na hotipañcabhuttavanto assa, bhātuno putto assa atthiti bahulādhikārato.
于彼处执取后,以彼击打,在战斗中显现其形。巴利
Tattha gahetvā tena paharitvā yuddhe sarūpaṃ-.
第七格结尾与第三格结尾的多个同形词,于彼处表示“取彼并以彼击打”的战斗等义时,可合为一义;“抓住头发与头发而进行的战斗”——kesākesi;“以棍棒与棍棒击打而进行的战斗”——daṇḍādaṇḍi;muṭṭhāmuṭṭhi。“ci vīti hāre”ti。ci位于复合词末;cismi。ntyākāro——于彼处“tena”指什么?抓住身体与身体而进行的战斗;“抓住并击打”指什么?站在战车与战车上而进行的战斗;“战斗”指什么?抓住手与手而行的友好行为;“同形式”指什么?以棍棒与杵击打而进行的战斗。巴利
Sattamyantaṃ tatiyantañca sarūpamanekaṃ tattha gahetvā tena paharitvā yuddhe’ññapadatthe ekatthaṃ vā hoti;’kesesu ca kesesu ca gahetvā yuddhampavattaṃ’ kesākesi;’daṇḍehi ca daṇḍehi ca paharitvā yuddhampavattaṃ’ daṇḍādaṇḍi; muṭṭhāmuṭṭhi ‘‘ci vīti hāre’ti. Ci samāsanto [’]cismi. Ntyākāro–-tattha teneti-kiṃ? Kāyadva kāyadva [ ] gahetvā yuddhaṃ pavattaṃ; gahetvā paharitvāti- kiṃ? Rathe ca rathe ca ṭhatvā yuddhaṃpavattaṃ; yuddhetikiṃ? Hatthe ca hatthe ca gahetvā sakhyaṃ pacattaṃ; sarūpantikiṃ? Daṇḍehi ca musalehica paharitvā yuddhaṃ pavattaṃ.
ca一词的含义有多种:集合、拆散、相互搭配与组合,以及聚集。其中,集合与拆散等处存在统一义。在这些中,集合指的是彼此无关、以各自为主的行为差别,如在达维树、卡迪拉树、帕拉瑟树等处分别砍断的动作;拆散则指某一词以主要方式被施行,另一词则兼有附带性质,如“比丘行乞,牵牛而去”。其他则为相互依赖而存在,彼此间的部分差别相继而成相互搭配,如“舍利弗、目犍连”,因其各部分为主,故用复数;相互依赖者,其部分差别隐没,以整体为主,则为组合,如“伞与鞋”,因其以整体为主,故用单数。而这些组合与相互搭配,多为严格限定的对象分类,其内容在文法释义中被收入各藏部。巴利
Anekaṃ syādyantaṃ catthe ekatthaṃ vā bhavati–-samuccayo’ṇvācayo itarītarayogo samāhāro ca casaddatthā, tattha samuccayāṇvācayesu nekatthibhāvo sambhavati- tesu hi samuccayo aññamaññanirapekkhānamattappadhānānaṃ katthaci kriyāvisese cīyamānatā-yathā-dhave ca khadire ca palāse ca chindāti; anvācayova yattheko padhānabhāvena vidhiyate aparo caguṇabhāvena-yathā-bhikkhaṃ cara gāvo vānayeti–-itarañcayaya tu sambhavati, tesu hi aññamaññasāpekkhānamava yavabhedānugato itarītarayogo- yathā- sāriputtamoggallānātiassāvayavappadhānattā bahuvacanameva; aññamañña sāpekkhānameva tirohitāvayavabhedo samudāyappadhāno samāhāro-yathā-chattupāhananti-assa pana samudāyappadhānattā ekavacanameva; te ca samāhārītarītarayogā bahulaṃ vidhānā niyatavisayāyeva honti, tatrāyaṃ visayavibhāgo nirutti piṭakāgato.
Pāṇituriyayoggasenaṅgānaṃ;niccaverīnaṃ;saṃkhyāpari māṇasaññānaṃ;khuddajantukānaṃ;pacanavaddhālānaṃ;caraṇasādhāraṇānaṃ;ekjhāyanapāvacanānaṃ;liṅgavisesānaṃ;vividhaviruddhānaṃ;disānaṃ;nadīnañca;恒于集合〔复合〕中成一义。巴利
Pāṇituriyayoggasenaṅgānaṃ; niccaverīnaṃ; saṃkhyāpari māṇasaññānaṃ; khuddajantukānaṃ; pacanavaddhālānaṃ; caraṇasādhāraṇānaṃ; ekjhāyanapāvacanānaṃ; liṅgavisesānaṃ; vividhaviruddhānaṃ; disānaṃ; nadīnañca; niccaṃ samāhārekatthaṃ bhavati.
草、木、畜生、鸟、财、谷、文、国土等,或依其他已说未说之相应规则。巴利
Tiṇarukkhapasusakuṇadhanadhaññavyañjanajanapadānaṃvā aññe samitarītarayogova.
有手足的——眼与耳;口与鼻;颚与颈;皮肉血;名色;老死;——乐器的——alasatāḷa与ambara;muraja与gomukha;saṃkha与deddhi;[ ] maddavika与pāṇavika;歌与吹奏?Sammatāḷa——轭的肢分——phāla与pācana;yuga与naṅgala——军队的肢分——剑、矛、tomara、piṇḍa;[ ] asicamma;bīḷāra与mūsika;kāka与ulūka;nāga与supaṇṇa——数、量、想的——一与二、二与三;三与四、四与五;十与十一——小生物的——kīṭa与paṭaṅga;kuttha与kipillika;ḍaṃsa与makasa;makkhika与kipillika——pavana与vaddhāla的——orarabgika与sukarika;sākuntika与māgavika;sapāka与vaddhāla;vena巴利
Pāṇyaṅgānaṃ–-cakkhusotaṃ; mukhanāsika; hanugīvaṃ; chavi maṃsalohitaṃ; nāmarūpaṃ; jarāmaraṇaṃ;–-turiyaṅgānaṃ–-alasatāḷambaraṃ;murajagomukhaṃ; saṃkhadeddhimaṃ; [ ] maddavikapāṇavikaṃ; gītavādataṃ?Sammatāḷaṃ–-yoggaṅgānaṃ–-phālapācanaṃ; yuganaṅgalaṃ–-senaṅgānaṃ–-asisattitomarapiṇḍaṃ;[ ] asicammaṃ; bīḷāramūsikaṃ; kākolūkaṃ; nāgasupaṇṇaṃ–-saṃkhyāparimāṇa saññānaṃ–-ekakadukaṃ, dukatikaṃ; tikacatukkaṃ, catukkapañcakaṃ; dasekādasakaṃ –- khuddajantukānaṃ–-kīṭapaṭaṅgaṃ; kutthakipillikaṃ; ḍaṃsamakasaṃ; makkhikakipillikaṃ–-pavanavaddhālānaṃ–-orarabgikasukarikaṃ; sākuntikamāgavikaṃ;sapākavaddhālaṃ;vena
战车制造者、清道夫,共通于行持者、极负重者,司祭者,持戒与智慧者,止与观,明与行,单一诵出者、佛语之一诵者,长部、中部,增支部、相应部,犍度、分别,性相之别,女与男,奴与婢,衣、钵食、坐卧处、病缘药资具。巴利
Rathakāraṃ; pukkusachavaḍāhakaṃ–-caraṇasādhāraṇānaṃ–-atisabhāradvājaṃ; kaṭhakālāpaṃ; sīlapaññāṇaṃ; samathavipassanaṃ; vijjācaraṇaṃ–-ekajjhāyanapāvacanānaṃ–-dīghamajjhimaṃ; ekuttarasaṃyuttakaṃ; khandhakavibhaṅgaṃ–-liṅgavisesānaṃ–-itthipumaṃ; dāsidāsaṃ; cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjapararikkhāraṃ; tiṇakaṭṭhasākhāpalāsaṃ; ‘‘lābhī hoti cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārāna‘‘ntipi dissati–-vividhaviruddhānaṃ–-kusalākusalaṃ; sāvajjānavajjaṃ; hīnappaṇitaṃ; kaṇbhasukkaṃ; chekapāpakaṃ; adharuttaraṃ–-disānaṃ–-pubbāparaṃ; dakkhiṇuttaraṃ; pubbadakkhiṇaṃ; pubbuttaraṃ; apara dakkhiṇaṃ; aparuttaraṃ–-nadīnaṃ–-gaṅgāyamunaṃ, mahīsarabhu.
草类各别——kāsakusaṃ、kāsakusā;usīrabīraṇaṃ、usīrabīraṇā;mujababbajaṃ、muñjababbajā——树木各别——khadirapalāsaṃ、khadirapalāsā;dhavāssakaṇṇaṃ、dhavāssakaṇṇā;pilakkhanigrodhaṃ、pilakkhanagrodhā;assatthakapitthanaṃ、assatthakapitthanā;sākasālaṃ、sākasālā——牲畜各别——gajagavajaṃ、gajagavajā;govahisaṃ、gomahisā;eṇeyyagomahisaṃ、eṇeyyagomahisā;eṇeyyavarāhaṃ、eṇeyyavarāhā;aje巴利
Tiṇavisesānaṃ–-kāsakusaṃ, kāsakusā; usīrabīraṇaṃ, usī rabīraṇā; mujababbajaṃ, muñjababbajā–-rukkhavasesānaṃ–-khadirapalāsaṃ, khadirapalāsā; dhavāssakaṇṇaṃ, dhavāssakaṇṇā; pilakkhanigrodhaṃ, pilakkhanagrodhā; assatthakapitthanaṃ, assattha kapitthanā; sākasālaṃ, sākasālā–-pasuvisesānaṃ–-gaja gavajaṃ,gajagavajā; govahisaṃ, gomahisā;eṇeyyagomahisaṃ, eṇeyyagomahisā; eṇeyyavarāhaṃ, eṇeyyavarāhā; aje
羊、羖羊,狗、猪,象、牛、马、牝马之类;特定鸟类者:天鹅、鹤,鸳鸯、赭翅鸭,苍鹭、白鹭之类;财物者:金、黄金,摩尼、螺贝、珍珠、琉璃之类;铜、铁之类;谷物者:稻、麦,芝麻、绿豆之类;调味品者:盐;畜生者:猪;水牛者:水牛;猪野猪者:猪野猪;鹿孔雀者:鹿孔雀;聚落者:迦尸聚落、萨拉聚落;拳士者:拳士;二十三者:二十三;鱼军者:鱼军;苦行者:毗舍苦行者。巴利
Ḷakaṃ, ajeḷakā; kukkurasūkaraṃ, kukkurasūkarā; hatthigavāssa vaḷavaṃ, hatthigavāssavaḷavā–-sakuṇavisesānaṃ–-haṃsabalāvaṃ, haṃsabalāvā; kāraṇḍavavakkavākaṃ, kāraṇḍavavakkavākā; bakabalākaṃ, bakabalākā–-dhanānaṃ–-hiraññasuvaṇṇaṃ, hirañña suvaṇṇā;maṇisaṃkhamuttāvephaphariyaṃ, maṇisaṃkhamuttāveḷuriyā; jātarūparajataṃ, jātarūparajatā–-dhaññānaṃ–-sāliyavakaṃ, sāliyavakā; tilamuggamāsaṃ, tilamaggamāsā; nipphāvakulatthaṃ, nipphāvakulatthā–-byañjanānaṃ–-sākasuvaṃ, sākasuvā; gabyamāhisaṃ, gabyamāhisā; eṇeyyavārāhaṃ, eṇeyyavārāhā; migamāyūraṃ, migamāyūrā–-janapadānaṃ–kāsikosalaṃ, kāsikosalā; vajjimallaṃ, vajjimallā; cetivīsaṃ, cetivīsā; macchasurasenaṃ, macchasūrasenā; kurupañcālaṃ, kurupañcālā.
例:itarītarayogo——yathā——vandimasūriyā、samaṇabrāhmaṇā、mātāpitaro 等。在此“合为一义”篇中,前所已述者,即依前次第而列,因无逾越次第的必要。有时亦有颠倒,多依主要规则而置。“dantānaṃ rājā”作“rājadanto”。有时因不重次第,后时之词亦置前。littavāsito、naggamusito、sittasammaṭṭho、bhaṭṭhaluñcito——在义合一处,某些前分有多种规定,此处为示其不定,故不述及,应作如是观。巴利
Itarītarayogo-yathā-vandimasūriyā, samaṇabrāhmaṇā, mātāpitaro, iccādi, etasmiṃ ekatthibhāvakaṇḍe yaṃ vuttaṃ pubbaṃ tadeva pubbaṃ nipatati kamātikkame payojanābhāvā kvavi vipallāso’pi hoti bahulādhikārato.’ Dantānaṃ rājā’ rājadanto. Katthaci kamampaccanādarā pubbakālassāpi paranipāto. Littavāsito, naggamusito, sittasammaṭṭho, bhaṭṭhaluñcito–-catthe yadekatthaṃ tattha keci pubbapadaṃ bahudhā niyamenti tadiha vyabhivāradassanā na vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在集合名词中,则有连同阳性词的用法。巴利
Samāhāre sapuṃsakaṃ-.
于衣之集合中,凡一处者,彼为中性;如是 vevodāhaṭaṃ——某些处则非有,sabhāparisāyāti 之示知者;ādhi paccaparivāro;chandapārisuddhi;paṭisandhippavattiyaṃ。巴利
Vatthe samāhāre yadekatthaṃ tannapuṃsakaliṅgamhavati; tathā vevodāhaṭaṃ–-katthaci na hoti sabhāparisāyāti ñāpakā; ādhi paccaparivāro; chandapārisuddhi; paṭisandhippavattiyaṃ.
于聚合义中,数词等成为中性;pañcagavaṃ;catuppathaṃ——因聚合义具单一性,故唯用单数;于聚合义中即如——pañcakapālo,pūvo;tiputto。巴利
Ekatthe samāhāre saṃkhyādi napuṃsakaliṅgambhavati; pañcagavaṃ; catuppathaṃ–-samāhārassekattā ekavacanameva hoti; samāhāretveva-pañcakapālo, pūvo; tiputto.
有时同一性亦由属格表达。巴利
Kvacekattañca chaṭṭhiyā-.
在属格单数义中,有时会出现中性形式,且是单数;例如“蝗虫之影”成为“蝗影”;同样,“鸟之影”成为“鸟影”。巴利
Chaṭṭhiyekatthe kvaci napuṃsakattaṃ hotekattañca;’salabhānaṃ chāyā’ salahacchāyaṃ; evaṃ’sakuntānaṃ chāyā’ sakuntacchāyaṃ;
所谓宫殿影者,由宫殿之影,以宅邸影者,由宅邸之影。非人众会中,有无男性者:婆罗门众会、天众会、帝释天神众会、夜叉众会、蛇众会、人众会、刹帝利众会、王众会等等。此谓何?即王公士族。巴利
Pāsādacchāyayaṃ, pāsādacchāyayā; gharacchāyayaṃ, gharacchāyā. Amanussā sabhāya napuṃsakekattambhavati; brahmasabhaṃ; devasabhaṃ; indasabhaṃ; yakkhasabhaṃ; sarabhasabhaṃ–-manussasabhāyaṃ–-khattiyasabhā, rājasabhā iccevamādi–-kvacīti kiṃ?Rājapuriso.
于 syā 等词尾前,短音——巴利
Syādisu rasso-.
中性词者,于 syādi 等中为短音;salabhacchāyaṃ——所谓“于 syādi 等中”是何义?salabhacchāye。巴利
Napuṃsake vattamānassa rasso hoti syādisu; salabhacchāyaṃ–-syādisūti-kiṃ?Salabhacchāye.
于 Ghapa 的末尾、非主要者——巴利
Ghapassāntassāppadhānassa-.
处于末尾且非主要的 gha,在 syādi 等语尾中发生短化;bahumālo、poso;nikkosambi;ativāmoru——所谓“末尾”是什么意思?kaññāpiyo;所谓“非主要”是什么意思?rājakumārī;brahmabandhū。巴利
Antabhutassāppadhānassaghapassasyādisurassohoti; bahumālo, poso; nikkosambi; ativāmoru–-antassāti-kiṃ? Kaññāpiyo; appadhānassāti-kiṃ? Rājakumārī; brahmabandhū.
于有“antabhūta”且非主要的“go”之后,在“si”等词尾前,“u”成为“o”;但只在“cittagu”非主要时——“sugo”;只在“anta”时——“gokulaṃ”。巴利
Antabhutassāppadhānassa gossa syādisu u hoti; cittagu–-appadhānassātveva - sugo;antassātvecagokulaṃ.
于阴性词中,atvā——巴利
Itthiyamatvā-.
于阴性中、从以 a 结尾的名词词干,有 āp 后缀,dhammadinnā。巴利
Itthiyaṃ vattamānato akārantato nāmasmā āppaccayo hoti, dhammadinnā.
从 nadādi 等词之后加 ṇḍī——巴利
Nadādito ṇḍī-.
对于nadā等词,在阴性中加后缀ṇḍī;如nadī(河)、mahī(大地)、kumārī(少女)、taruṇī(年轻女子)、vāruṇī(瓦鲁尼)、gotamī(果达弥)。巴利
Nadādīhi itthiyaṃ ṇḍīppaccayo hoti; nadī, mahī, kumārī, taruṇī, vāruṇī, gotamī.
在 Goto 之后可()。巴利
Goto vā().
‘Gāvī’源自‘go’,此处属同形类词——‘ṅakāro’为鼻音ṅ的用法,依“ntantunaṃ ṅimhi to vā”之规则,其义为限定义。巴利
Gāvī, go; ākatigaṇo’yaṃ–-ṅakāro ‘‘ntantunaṃ ṅimhi to vā‘‘ti. Visesanattho.
Yakkhādi 之后,阴性为 ī 与 ṅī,ca-巴利
Yakkhādittvitī ca-.
从 yakkhā 等词衍生阴性形式时,有 inī,也有 ṅī;yakkhinī、yakkhī;nāginī、nāgī;sīhinī、sīhī。巴利
Yakkhādito itthiyaminī hoti ṅī ca; yakkhinī, yakkhi; nāginī, nāgī; sīhinī, sīhī.
从 ārāmika 等词后——巴利
Ārāmikādīhi-.
从 ārāmika 等词构成阴性时,后缀 inī 出现;āramikinī;anantarāsikinī;rājinī。巴利
Ārāmikādito inī hotitthiyaṃ; ārāmikinī; anantarāsikinī; rājinī.
于想中为 mānuso。巴利
Saññāyaṃ mānuso().
mānusinī;除mānusī之外。巴利
Mānusinī; aññatra mānusī.
Yuvaṇṇohi 之后〔加〕nī——巴利
Yuvaṇṇohi nī-.
于阴性中,以 i 或 u 结尾的词干之后,通常有 nī;——sadāpayata pāṇinī;——daṇḍinī;——khattabandhunī;——paracittavidunī——从 mātu 等词之后,为何没有?因为即使没有阴性后缀,亦由阴性之表达。巴利
Itthiyamivaṇṇuvaṇṇantehi nī hoti bahulaṃ; sadāpayata pāṇinī; daṇḍinī; khattabandhunī; paracittavidunī–-mātu ādito kasmā na hoti? Itthippaccayaṃ vināpi itthattāhi dhānato.
于 Ktimhā 之后、在其他意义中——巴利
Ktimhāññatthe-.
于 kti 之后,仅当表示别义时,阴性中大多有 nī;sā ahaṃ ahiṃsāratinī;tassā muṭṭhassatiniyā;sā vacchagiddhinī——所谓“别义”是什么?Dhammarati。巴利
Ktimhāññattheyeva itthiyaṃ nī hoti bahulaṃ; sāhaṃ ahiṃsāratinī; tassā muṭṭhassatiniyā; sā vacchagiddhinī–-aññattheti-kiṃ? Dhammarati.
Ghara 等——巴利
Gharaṇyādayo-.
Gharaṇī 等词以 nī 结尾而无后缀,成为善语;gharaṇī;pokkharaṇī;īssattaṃ 依固定用法。巴利
Gharaṇīppabhutayo nīppaccayantā sādhavo bhavanti; gharaṇī; pokkharaṇī; īssattaṃ nipātanā.
无论是老师还是他的伴侣,女性就有教导者之称,分别称为教导者的女性及老师本人。巴利
Ācariyā vā yalopo ca(); ācarinī; ācariyā.
在 mātula 等之后,于妻子义中为 tvānī——巴利
Mātulāditvānī bhariyāyaṃ-.
从mātula等词后,为表示其妻子,有mānī;mātulānī;varuṇānī;gahapatānī;ācariyānī。巴利
Mātulādito bhariyāyamānī hoti; mātulānī; varuṇānī; gahapatānī; ācariyānī.
khattiyā若非bhariyā〔词干〕,则或为khattiyānī;khattiyā——nadā dīpāṭhā,若就bhariyā义而言,则为khattiyī。巴利
Abhariyāyaṃ khattiyā vā() khattiyānī; khattiyā –-nadā dīpāṭhā bhariyāyantu khattiyī.
例:upamā、saṃhita、sahita、saññata、saha、sapha、vāma、lakkhaṇa 等词之后的 ūru——巴利
Upamāsaṃhitasahitasaññatasahasaphavāmalakkhaṇāditurutu-.
“Ūrusaddā”一词,是带有比喻等前置成分的女性名词词基;诸如karahorū、saṃhitorū、sahitorū、saññatorū、sahorū、saphorū、vāmorū、lakkhaṇorū,其中“ū”通过词源分解而得;属于梵天亲属类词。巴利
Ūrusaddā upamānādipubbā itthiyamū hoti; karahorū; saṃhitorū; sahitorū; saññatorū; sahorū; saphorū; vāmo rū; lakkhaṇorū–-’ū’ti-yogavibhāgā ū; brahmabandhu.
“青年”一词,其阴性形式为“少女”。巴利
Yuvasaddatoti hotitthiyaṃ; yuvati.
在Ṅī中,Ntantunaṃ 的 to 可——巴利
Ntantunaṃ ṅīmhi to vā-.
在“ṅī”词尾中,位于“nt”和“n”词干之后时,有时变为“to”(即 -ī 形式):如“gacchatgacchantī”;“sīlavatsīlavantī”。巴利
Ṅīmhi ntantunaṃ to vā hoti; gacchatī, gacchantī; sīlavatī, sīlavantī.
bhavato 变为 bhoto——巴利
Bhavato bhoto-.
在Ṅī词尾之前,bhavant可替换为bhot;bhotī;bhavantī。巴利
Ṅīmhi bhavato bhotādeso hoti vā; bhotī; bhavantī.
gossa 的 āvaṅi——巴利
Gossāvaṅi-.
“go”一词在阴性词尾“ī”之前,词干替换为“gāv”的形式;故得“gāvī”。巴利
Gosaddassa ṅīmhāvaṅi hoti; gāvī.
Puthussa 的 pathavaputhavā——。巴利
Puthussapathavaputhavā-.
在“ī”之前,puthu 的替换形式为 pathava 与 puthava;pathavī;puthavī。——在“ṭha”之前为 pathavī。巴利
Ṅīmhi puthussa pathavaputhavā honti; pathavī; puthavī.–-Ṭhe pathavī.
Samāsantva-〔复合词末性〕巴利
Samāsantva-
“复合词末尾”者,即复合词末尾之“a”,是附加于此的。巴利
Samāsanto a iti vādhikarīyanti.
Pāpādīhi 与 bhumiyā 之复合——巴利
Pāpādīhi bhumiyā-.
在“恶”等词之后接“地”字时,复合词末转为 a,例如:恶地、生地。巴利
Pāpādīhi parā yā bhumi tassā samāsanto a hoti; pāpa bhumiṃ; jātibhumaṃ.
依数词,其后的 bhumi 在复合词中变为 a;dvibhumaṃ;tibhumaṃ巴利
Saṃkhyāhi parā yā bhumi tassā samāsanto a hoti; dvibhumaṃ; tibhumaṃ
Nadīgodāvarīnaṃ——。巴利
Nadīgodāvarīnaṃ-.
在数词以及表示“其他”的词之后,nadī 和 godāvarī 构成复合词时,a 出现,如 pañcanadaṃ、sattagodāvaraṃ。巴利
Saṃkhyāhi parāsaṃ nadīgodāvarīnaṃ samāsanto a hoti; pañcanadaṃ, sattagodāvaraṃ.
于非数词之后,且于 aṅgulyānaṃ 的非数义中——巴利
Asaṃkhyehi cāṅgulyānaññāsaṃkhyatthesu-.
于无量大数之数词,以及从后之aṅgula,作复合时,若不作他义之无量大数义,则无量大数义本身即复合词被使用。“Niggatamaṅgulīhi”为niraṅgulaṃ;accaṅgulaṃ;dve aṅguliyo samāhaṭā为dvaṅgulaṃ——anaññāsaṃkhyatthesūti——何耶?Pañcaṅgulihattho;upaṅguli——云何?dvaṅgulī pamāṇamassāti为dvaṅgulaṃ——非此复合词于他义中被立;matta等之lopa已作时,于彼处转起;aṅgula声或为量之表示声之间——如“senāṅgulappamāṇena aṅgulānaṃ sataṃ puṇṇaṃ catuddasa vā aṅgulānīti”。巴利
Asaṃkhyehi saṃkhyāhi ca parāya aṅgulyā samāsanto ahoti no ce aññapadatthe asaṃkhyattheva samāso vattite.’Niggatamaṅgulīhi’ niraṅgulaṃ; accaṅgulaṃ; dve aṅguliyo samāhaṭā’dvaṅgulaṃ–-anaññāsaṃkhyatthesūti-kiṃ? Pañcaṅgulihattho; upaṅguli–-kathaṃ, dvñaṅgulī pamāṇamassāti dvaṅgulanti-nātu samāso’ññapadatthe vihito mattādīnaṃ lope kate tatthavattate; aṅgulasaddovā pamāṇavācīsaddantaraṃ–-yathāsenāṅgulappamāṇena aṅgulānaṃ sataṃ puṇṇaṃ catuddasa vā aṅgulānīti.
与“长”“日”“年”“时节”“地方”等词,和“夜”结合,形成表示时间与地域的复合词。巴利
Dīghāhovassekadesehi ca ratyā-.
在 dīgha 等非数词与数词之后,以 ratti 结尾的复合词尾为 a;dīgharattaṃ;ahorattaṃ;vassārattaṃ;pubbarattaṃ;apararattaṃ;aḍḍharattaṃ;“atikkanto rattiṃ”为 atiratto;“dve rattī samāhaṭā”为 dvirattaṃ——依“多分”规则,有时亦作 ekarattaṃ;ekaratti——仅在非数词义中,为 dīgharatti、hemanto;uparatti——依“多分”规则,有时亦出现;yathārattaṃ。巴利
Dīghādīhi asaṃkhyehi saṃkhyāhi ca parāya rattiyā samāsanto a hoti; dīgharattaṃ; ahorattaṃ; vassārattaṃ; pubbarattaṃ; apararattaṃ; aḍḍharattaṃ;’atikkanto rattiṃ’ atiratto;’dve rattī samāhaṭā’ dvirattaṃ–-vā kvaci bahulādhikārāekarattaṃ; ekaratti–-anaññāsaṃkhyatthesutveva-dīgharatti, hemanto; uparatti–-kvaci hoteva bahulaṃ vidhānā;yathārattaṃ.
于 Gotva 义与不脱落中——巴利
Gotvacatthe cālope-.
由“牛”字,在不省略的范畴内,复合词成立;但若所指并非“牛”义、非他词之义、亦非数目之义时,则不然;rājagavo;paramagavo——pañcagavadhano;dasagavaṃ——不省略指什么?以五牛买得,即pañcagu;非牛义指什么?ajassagāvo——是否只限于非他数目之义时如此?cittagu;upagu。巴利
Gosaddā alopavisayā samāsanto ahoti na ve vatthe samāso aññapadatthe asaṃkhyyatthe ca; rājagavo; paramagavora pañcagavadhano; dasagavaṃ–-alopeti-kiṃ?Pañcahi gohi kīto pañcagu; acattheti-kiṃ? Ajassagāvo –-anaññāsaṃkhyatthesutveva-cittagu;upagu.
Rattindivadāragavacaturassā——巴利
Rattindivadāragavacaturassā-.
这些词以 a 结尾而被固定下来:“ratto ca divā ca”成为 rattindivaṃ;“ratti ca divā ca”成为 rattindivaṃ;“dārā ca gāvo ca”成为 dāragavaṃ;“vatasso assiyo assa”成为 caturasso。巴利
Ete saddā a antā nipaccante;’ratto ca divā ca’ rattindivaṃ;’ ratti ca divā ca’rattindivaṃ;’dārā ca gāvo ca’ dāragavaṃ;’ vatasso assiyo assa’ caturasso.
于Āyāme中〔构成〕’nugavaṃ——。巴利
Āyāme’nugavaṃ-.
“随牛”是在“随行”之义被理解时构成的;“随牛”,车——。“随行”是何义?即紧随牛后。巴利
Anugavanti nipaccate āyāme gamyamāne; anugavaṃ, sakaṭaṃ–-āyāmeti-kiṃ? Gunnaṃ pacchā anugu.
指“于眼等”义。巴利
Akkhismāññatthe-.
从 akkhi 构成复合词时,若复合词表他义,则成为 a;visālakkho。巴利
Akkhismā samāsanto a hoti aññatthe ce samāso; visālakkho.
Dārumbhyaṅgulyā——巴利
Dārumbhyaṅgulyā-.
以aṅguli结尾的词,在表示其他意义时,与dāru复合成为复合词;dvaṅgulaṃ——dāru;pañcaṅgulaṃ——具有类似手指分支、用来散扬谷物等的木器,称为dāru——而在度量意义上,如前已成立;sakharāja等词即以a结尾,也不见残余形式——gāṇḍīvadhatvā等则依其他规则成立。巴利
Aṅgulantā aññapadatthe dārumhi samāsanto a hoti; dvaṅgulaṃ, dāru; pañcaṅgulaṃ–-aṅgulisadisāvayavaṃ dhaññādīnaṃ vīkkhepakaṃ dārūti vuccate–-pamāṇe tu pubbe viya siddhaṃ; sakharājasaddāakārantāva, sisso’pi na dissati–-gāṇḍīvadhatvāti pakatantarenasiddhaṃ.
Dvi 表交互——巴利
Dvi vītihāre-.
当表示行为互相交替且用于他义时,则有词缀ci;如“kesākesi”(互相抓头发)、“daṇḍādaṇḍi”(互相棒打)——此处c即“cismin”等义。这是为了表示区别;如“sugandhi”(香)与“duggandhī”(臭)的用例则不见显现。巴利
Kriyāvyatihāre gamyamāne aññapadatthe vattamānato ci hoti; kesākesi; daṇḍādaṇḍi–-cakāro’cismi’nti. visesanattho; sugandhi duggandhīti-payogo nadissate.
于 Latvitthiyūhi 后,ko——。巴利
Latvitthiyūhi ko-.
在末尾为-latup后缀的词之后,以及在阴性中末尾为-ī或-ū的词之后,kapp后缀多用于表示他词(aññapadatthe)的意义;如‘多造作者’(bahukattuko)、‘多童女’(bahukumāriko)、‘多梵天亲属’(bahubrahmabandhuko),多(bahulaṃ)即如‘subbhu’。巴利
Latuppaccayantehi itthiyamīkārūkārantehi cabahulaṃ kappaccayo hoti aññapadatthe; bahukattuko; bahukumāriko; bahubrahmabandhuko, bahulaṃtveva-subbhu.
于他词中作他义时,常为 ko 或唯词干;bahu mālako;bahumālo。巴利
Aññehi aññapadatthe ko vā bahulaṃ hoti; bahu mālako; bahumālo.
当知,此为所说之义。巴利
Etamadhikataṃ veditabbaṃ.
imassa 变为 idaṃ——巴利
Imassidaṃ-.
于后位词(Uttarapade)之后,imassa 变为 idaṃ;idamaṭṭhitā;idappaccayā;随韵的消失(niggahītalopo)及 passa 的二重(dvibhāvo)。巴利
Uttarapade parato imassa idaṃ hoti; idamaṭṭhitā; idappaccayā; niggahītalopo passa ca dvibhāvo.
“‘puṃ’为‘puma’之〔替换〕,或可——。”巴利
Puṃ pumassa vā-.
于后分之前,Pumassa 的〔形式〕可选变为 puṃ;pulliṅgaṃ;puṃliṅgaṃ。巴利
Pumassa puṃhotuttarapade vibhāsā; pulliṅgaṃ; puṃliṅgaṃ.
对于以 n 结尾者,Ṭa——巴利
Ṭa nnantunaṃ-.
这些的 ṭa 变成 tta,在后接词中,有时可(vā);bhavam 与 patiṭṭhā 之后是 mayaṃ;bhāgavam 为根本的,我们的诸法——多分与 adhikārā,在 tara 等之后亦然;pageva mahattarī;rattaññumahattaṃ。巴利
Esaṃ ṭa hotuttarapadekvaci vā; bhavampatiṭṭhā mayaṃ; bhāgavamamūlakā no dhammā–-bahulādhikārā tarādisu ca; pageva mahattarī; rattaññumahattaṃ.
Esaṃ 的 ṭa 在 uttarapade 中有时可变为 ho;bhavampatiṭṭhā mayaṃ;bhāgavamamūlakā no dhammā——因 bahula 总则,在 tara 等中亦有;更不必说 mahattarī;rattaññumahattaṃ。巴利
.
这些词的〔词干〕在后续词为 a 时〔末尾〕变为 a;guṇavantapatiṭṭho’smi。巴利
Esaṃ a hotuttarapade; guṇavantapatiṭṭho’smi.
[Hhva page ]巴利
[Hhva page ]
当“mana”等词和“āpa”等词带有后缀“maya”时,它们替换为“o”——。巴利
Manādyāpādīnamo maye ca-.
mana 等词与 āpa 等词,在后分有 maya 时,也变为 o;mano seṭṭhā;manomayā;rajojallaṃ;rajomayaṃ;āpogataṃ;āpomayaṃ;anuyanti disodisaṃ。巴利
Manādīnamāpādīnañca o hotuttarapade maye ca; mano seṭṭhā; manomayā; rajojallaṃ; rajomayaṃ; āpogataṃ; āpomayaṃ; anuyanti disodisaṃ.
于表他者的数词之中。巴利
Parassasaṃkhyāsu-.
在数词后缀上,para- 变为 o,例如 parosataṃ(过百)、parosahassaṃ(过千)。为何说是数词?即 paradattupajīvino(受他人布施而活者)。巴利
Saṃkhyāsuttarapadesu parassa o hoti; parosataṃ, parosahassaṃ–-saṃkhyāsūti-kiṃ?Paradattupajīvino.
于jana作后分时,phutha的u发生;ariyehi puthagevāyaṃ janoti puthujjano。巴利
Jane uttarapade phuthassa u hoti; ariyehi puthagevāyaṃ janoti puthujjano.
So 于 chassāhāyatane 中可——。巴利
So chassāhāyatane vā-.
在表“处所”义、且后词已说明的情况下,“cha”的“ch”音可变为“s”,或保持原形;例如:“sāhaṃ”(六日)与“chāhaṃ”(六日);“saḷāyatanaṃ”(六处)与“chaḷāyatanaṃ”(六处)。巴利
Ahe āyatane vuttarapade chassa so vā hoti; sāhaṃ, chāhaṃ; saḷāyatanaṃ, chaḷāyatanaṃ.
对于 Ltu 与 pitā 等,āraṅaraṅi——巴利
Ltupitādīnamāraṅaraṅi-.
以tu为后缀的语基和pitu等词,作为后分时,依次转变为āra、aṅ、ara、aṅ,或;satthāradassanaṃ;kattāraniddeso;mārata pitaro——为何又说“或”——satthudassanaṃ;mātāpitaro。巴利
Latuppaccayantānaṃ pitādīnañca yathākkamamāraṅaraṅi vā hontuttarapade; satthāradassanaṃ; kattāraniddeso; mārata pitaro–-vātveva-satthudassanaṃ; mātāpitaro.
与 vijjā、yoni 相关联之〔词〕,于此第四格意义时,为 ā巴利
Vijjāyonisambāndhanamā tatra catthe-.
对于与vijjā有关、与yoni有关的latupitā等词,于这些latupitā等、即vijjā、yoni相关的后词中,于cattha义处,有ā;hotāpotāro;mātāpitaro——于latupitā等中,确实如此:puttabhātaro;其中“tatra”何用?Pitupitāmahā;“catthe”何用?mātu bhātā;“vijjāyonisambandhānaṃ”何用?Dātubhātaro。巴利
Latupitādīnaṃ vijjāsambandhīnaṃ yonisambandhīnañca tesveva latupitādisu vijjāyonisambandhisuttarapadesu catthavisaye ā hoti; hotāpotāro; mātāpitaro–-latupitādīnantvevaputtabhātaro; tatreti-kiṃ? Pitupitāmahā; cattheti-kiṃ; mātu bhātā; vijjāyonisambandhānanti-kiṃ?Dātubhātaro.
于“Putte”作为后分、表示此义时,对于latupitā等与明和起源相关联者,用“ā”;pitāputtā;mātāputtā。巴利
Putte uttarapade vatthavisaye latupitādīnaṃvijjāyoni sambandhānamā hoti; pitāputtā; mātāputtā.
以ci后缀结尾的后分中,ā存在;kesākesi;muṭṭhāmuṭṭhi。巴利
Cippaccayante uttarapade ā hoti; kesākesi; muṭṭhāmuṭṭhi.
于阴性中,当所说的是阳性与阴性〔同指〕一义时,〔该词〕唯是阳性——巴利
Itthiyamhāsitapumitthi pumevekatthe-.
于阴性词中表示同一意义、同一所指、且后词为 uttarapada 时,先前为阳性的词虽为阴性,也仍作阳性;kurabhariyo;dīgha——巴利
Itthiyaṃ vattamāne ekatthe samānādhikaraṇe uttarapade pare bhāsitapumā itthi pumeva hoti; kurabhariyo; dīgha
Jaṅgho; yuvajāyo–-itthiyanti-kiṃ?’Kalyāṇī padhānamesaṃ’ kalyyāṇippadhānā; bhāsitapumeti- kiṃ? Kaññābhariyo; itthiti-kiṃ? Gāmaṇikulaṃ diṭṭhi assa’ gāmaṇidiṭṭhi; ekattheti-kiṃ?’Kalyāṇiyā mātā’ kalyāṇīmātā.巴利
Jaṅgho; yuvajāyo–-itthiyanti-kiṃ?’Kalyāṇī padhānamesaṃ’ kalyyāṇippadhānā; bhāsitapumeti- kiṃ? Kaññābhariyo; itthiti-kiṃ? Gāmaṇikulaṃ diṭṭhi assa’ gāmaṇidiṭṭhi; ekattheti-kiṃ?’Kalyāṇiyā mātā’ kalyāṇīmātā.
于某些后缀之前,已说过的阳性、阴性〔词干〕有时仅作阳性;vyattatarā、vyyattatamā。巴利
Bhāsitapumitthi paccaye kvaci pumeva hoti; vyattatarā, vyyattatamā.
Sabbādayo 等词,依所说之义——巴利
Sabbādayo vuttimatte-.
表示女性的一切等词,于所说之义即成为阳性;tassā mukhaṃ——tammukhaṃ;tassaṃ tatra;tāya tato;tassaṃ velāyaṃ tadā。巴利
Itthivācakā sabbādayo vuttimatte pumeva honti; tassā mukhaṃ’ tammukhaṃ; tassaṃ tatra; tāya tato; tassaṃvelāyaṃ tadā.
于 patimhi 之前,Chāyāya 变为 jayaṃ——巴利
Chāyāya jayaṃ patimhi-.
当‘jāyā’(妻)后接‘pati’(夫)时,‘jāyā’变为‘jaya’;‘jayampatī’(夫妻)——这是依‘jānipatī’的通例而成立的;同理,‘dampatī’与‘jampatī’也是如此。巴利
Patimhi pare jāyāya jayaṃ hoti; jayampatī–-jānipatītipakatantarena siddhaṃ; tathā dampatī jampatīti.
于名称中,udodakassa 的——巴利
Saññāyamudodakassa-.
当“水”(udaka)作为复合词后分而构成专名时,其词首代之以“uda”;如“udadhī”(海洋,即水之容器)、“udapānaṃ”(井,即水之饮处)。巴利
Saññāyamudakassuttarapade udādeso hoti; udadhī; udapānaṃ.
于 kumbha 等可——巴利
Kumbhādisuvā-.
当“水”(udaka)后接“罐”等后续词时,可替换为“uda”;例如:水罐(udakumbho, udakakumbho)、水钵(udapatto, udakapatto)、水滴(udabindu, ukabindu)——此为不规则类。巴利
Kumbhādasuttarapadesu udakassa udādeso vā hoti; udakumbho, udakakumbho; udapatto, udakapatto; udabindu, ukabindu–-ākatigaṇo’yaṃ.
于 sotādi 等词中,〔有〕脱落——巴利
Sotādisūlopo-.
在“流”(sota)等后分词中,“水”(udaka)省略音节“us”;例如:dakasotaṃ(水流)、dakarakkhaso(水罗刹)。巴利
Sotādisuttarapadesuudakassa ussalopo hoti; dakasotaṃ; dakarakkhaso.
Ṭa 之后,na 与 assa 的 ṭa 脱落。巴利
Ṭa nañssa-.
在后分中,nañ 词的 ssa 变为 ṭa;abrāhmaṇo——ñakāro 何用?以免成为纯然之词;pāmanaputto。巴利
Uttarapadenañsaddassa ṭa hoti; abrāhmaṇo –-ñakāro kiṃ, kevalassamā hotu; pāmanaputto.
当后分以元音起首时,nañ 词变为 ana;anakkhātaṃ。巴利
Sarādo uttarapade nañsaddassaana hoti; anakkhātaṃ.
2 Ñakāroti——于一切处。巴利
2 Ñakāroti-sabbattha.
Nakhā 等词音在 akataṭādesa 时完成;“nāssa khamatthiti” 为 nakho;akhamaññaṃ——在 saññā 等词中,仅完成本身可随宜而作。巴利
Nakhādayo saddā akataṭādesā nipaccante;’nāssa khamatthiti’ nakho; akhamaññaṃ–-saññāsaddesu ca nipphattimattaṃ yathākathaci kattabbaṃ.’
无其家者名为 nakula;非他家者;nakha、nakula、napuṃsaka、nakkhatta、nāka 等。巴利
Nāssa kulamatthi’ti nakulo; akulamaññaṃ; nakha nakula napuṃsaka nakkhatta nāka evamādi.
“naga”,或用于无生命之物。巴利
Nago vāppāṇini-.
“Naga”一词,用于无生命物时,可任取一形:作 nagā 时指“树木”,亦指“山岳”;作 agā 时指“树木”,亦指“山岳”。为何须限定“无生命物”?因为“Ago vasalo sītena”(此卑贱者因寒冷而行)中,ago 指有生命者,故不适用此规则。巴利
Nagैccappāṇini vā nipaccate; nagā, rukkhā; nagā, pabbatā; agā, rukkhā; agā pabbatā–-appāṇinīti -kiṃ? Ago vasalo sītena.
在表示其他意义时,“与”(saha)的词末音变为so。巴利
Sahassa so’ññatthe-.
在复合词中,当后分表达附带之义时,“与”(saha)的词末音可任意变为so;例如“连同儿子”可写作saputto或sahaputto。为何要限定“其他意义”呢?因为像“共同地做”(sahakatvā)、“共同战斗”(sahayujjhitvā)等,saha保留其本义,故不发生此音变。巴利
Aññapadatthavuttimhi samāse uttarapade pare sahassa so vā hoti; saputto, sahaputto; aññattheti-kiṃ? Sahakatvā sahayujjhitvā.
于 saññā 中,当后词为 sahassa 时,其为 sa;sāssatthaṃ;sapalāsaṃ。巴利
Sahassuttarapade so heti saññāyaṃ; sāssatthaṃ; sapalāsaṃ.
于非现见时,后词中sahassa变为so;sāggi、kapoto;sapisāvā、vātamaṇḍalikā。巴利
Apaccakkhe gamyamāne sahassa so hotuttarapade; sāggi, kapoto; sapisāvā, vātamaṇḍalikā.
于非时,自义中——。巴利
Akāle sakatthe-.
以自义为主时,saha 一词在 akāla 的后分中成为 so;sampannaṃ brahmaṃ sabrahmaṃ;sacakkaṃ nidhehi,sadhuraṃ——akāla 是何?Sahapubbanahaṃ,sahāparanhaṃ。巴利
Sakatthappadhānassa sahasaddassa akāle uttarapade so hoti; sampannaṃ brahmaṃ sabrahmaṃ; sacakkaṃ nidhehi, sadhuraṃ–-akāleti-kiṃ? Sahapubbanahaṃ, sahāparanhaṃ.
于“Ganthānta”之后,若有多余的——巴利
Ganthāntādhikye-.
在 ganthānte 与 ādhikye 中,存在着的 sahassa 于后分中变为 so;sakalaṃ jotim adhīte;samuhuttaṃ——时间义为开始;在 ādhikye 中——sadoṇā、khārī;复合词 kahāpaṇo;此是恒常义的开始。巴利
Ganthānte ādhikya cैa vattamānassa sahassa so hotuttarapade; sakalaṃ jotimadhīte; samuhuttaṃ–-kālattho ārambho; ādhikye-sadoṇā khārī; samāsako kahāpaṇo; niccattho’yamāramho.
samāna 的 pakkha 等词尾可用 vā。巴利
Samānassa pakkhādisu vā-.
于‘翼’等前缀中,可有‘相同’之义;例如sapakkho(同翼)、samānapakkho(同翼);sajoti(同光)、samānajoti(同光)。——何谓‘翼等’?即‘同戒’;翼、光、国土、夜晚、妻子、子女、脐、亲族、梵行者、名、族姓、色、处所、颜色、年龄、言语、法、种类、衣服等。巴利
Pakkhādisuttarapadesu samānassaso hoti vā; sapakkho, samānapakkho; sajoti, samānajoti–-pakkhādisūti-kiṃ? Samānasīlo; pakkha joti janapada ratti pattinī pattī nābhī bandhu brahmacārī nāma gotta rūpa ṭhānavaṇṇa vayo vacana dhamma jātiya ghacca.
于 Udare 中,〔接后缀〕iye——巴利
Udare iye-.
于 udara 之后,当 iya 与 para 为后分时,对前面的 samāna 而言,则成为 so,或可;sodariyo;samānodariyo——iya 是指什么?即 samānodarataṃ。巴利
Udare iyapare parato samānassa so vā hoti; sodariyo; samānodariyo–-iyeti-kiṃ? Samānodarataṃ.
于 rīrikkhaka 等词中——巴利
Rīrikkhakesu-.
在这些〔词〕中,samāna 的〔词干〕变为 so;sarī;sarikkho;sariso。巴利
Etesusamānassa so hoti; sarī; sarikkho; sariso.
一切(sabba)等词的词干为 ā-。巴利
Sabbādinamā-.
在rīrikkha等词中,sabbādi等变为ā;yādī、yādikkho、yādiso。巴利
Rīrikkhakesusabbādīnamā hoti; yādī, yādikkho, yādiso.
对于以 nta、kiṃ、ima 结尾的词,依次替换为 ṭā、kī、ṭī——巴利
Ntakimimānaṃ ṭākīṭī-.
在“rīrikkhaka”(相似词)中,“nt”词、“kiṃ”词、“ima”词依次以“ṭ┓kṭī”替换;例如:bhavādī、bhavādikkho、bhavādiso;kīdī、kīdikkho、kīdiso;īdī、īdikkho、īdiso。巴利
Rīrikkhakesu ntasaddakiṃsaddaimasaddānaṃ ṭākīṭī honti yathākkamaṃ; bhavādī, bhavādikkho, bhavādiso; kīdī, kīdikkho, kīdiso; īdī, īdikkho, īdiso.
Tumha、amha 的 tā、mā 于单数时——巴利
Tumhāmbhānaṃ tāmekasmiṃ-.
在“rīrikkhaka”(相似词)类词中,若“tumha”(汝)与“amha”(我)为单数,则依次替换为“tā”和“mā”;例如:“tādtādikkho”“tādiso”;“mādmādikkho”“mādiso”。为何特指单数?因为复数形式仍保留原词,如:“tumhādamhādtumhādikkho”“amhādikkho”“tumhādiso”“amhādiso”。巴利
Rīrikkhakesu tumhāmhānaṃ tāmā hontekasmiṃ yathākkamaṃ; tādī, tādikkho, tādiso;mādī, mādikkho, mādiso; –-ekasminti-kiṃ? Tumhādī, amhādī, tumhādikkho, amhādikkho, tumhādiso, amhādiso.
taṃ、maṃ 于别处——巴利
Taṃmamaññatra-.
于 rīrikkha 词尾以外的其他后置词中,tumha 与 amha 在 ekasmiṃ 时依序变为 taṃ 与 maṃ;tandīpā;mandīpā;taṃ saraṇā, maṃ saraṇā;tayyogo mayyogoti——bindulopa。巴利
Rīrikkhakantato’ññasmiṃ uttarapade tumhāmhāname kasmiṃ taṃmaṃ honti yathākkamaṃ; tandīpā; mandīpā; taṃ saraṇā, maṃsaraṇā; tayyogo mayyogoti-bindulopo.
Vetassa的eṭa〔替换〕——巴利
Vetasseṭa-.
在 rīrikkha 等词中,etassa 的 e 有时变为 a;edī、etādī;edikkho、etādikkho;ediso、etādiso。巴利
Rīrikkhakesvetasseṭa vā hoti; edī, etādī; edikkho, etādikkho; ediso, etādiso.
于 vidhā 等词之后,dvi 的〔词尾〕为 du-。巴利
Vidhādisu dvissa du-.
dvi 在 vidha 等词前变为 du;duvidho、dupaṭṭaṃ;如是等。巴利
Dvissa du hoti vidhādisu; duvidho, dupaṭṭaṃ; evamādi.
Di 在 guṇa 等词前——巴利
Di guṇādisu-.
于 guṇa 等之前,dvi 的 di 出现;diguṇaṃ、dirattaṃ、digu;等等。巴利
Guṇādisu dvissa di hoti; diguṇaṃ, dirattaṃ, digu; evamādi
在 ti 等词之前,dvi 变为 a;dvattikkhattuṃ、dvattipattapūrā。巴利
Tīsu dvissa a hoti; dvattikkhattuṃ, dvattipattapūrā.
从数词至 asa 后缀者,除表示其他意义外,为 ā。巴利
Ā saṃkhyāyāsatādo’naññatthe-.
于数词中,后词为 dvissa 时,ā 代替 asatāda,若非他义;dvādasa、dvāvīsati、dvattiṃsa;“于数词中”何义?Dirattaṃ;“asatāda”何义?Dvisataṃ、dvisahassaṃ;“若非他义”何义?Dvidasā。巴利
Saṃkhyāyamuttarapade dvissaā hotasadādo’naññatthe; dvādasa, dvāvīsati, dvattiṃsa; saṃkhyāyanti-kiṃ?’Dirattaṃ; asatādoti-kiṃ? Dvisataṃ, dvisahassaṃ; anaññattheti-kiṃ?Dvidasā.
在数词中,后词为 tissa 时,tissa 由 ti 与 sata 等词尾替换,但非其他意义时;terasa、tevisa、tettiṃsa——仅在数词中——tirattaṃ;由 asata 等词尾替换时——tisataṃ;非其他意义时——tivatukā。巴利
Saṃkhyāyamuttarapade tissa ehotasatādo’naññatthe; terasa, tevisa, tettiṃsa–-saṃkhyāyantveva-tirattaṃ; asatādotveva-tisataṃ; anaññatthetveva-tivatukā.
于 cattālīsa 等之前可——巴利
Cattālisādo vā-.
以 tisseva 即成 cattālīsādo;tecattālīsa、ticattālīsa;tepaññāsa、tipaññāsa;tesaṭṭhi、tisaṭṭhi;tesattati、tīsattatī;tñasīti、tiyāsīti;tenavuti、tinavuti——asatādo 二者唯是——tisataṃ。巴利
Tissevā hoti cattālīsādo; tecattālīsa, ticattālīsa; tepaññāsa, tipaññāsa; tesaṭṭhi, tisaṭṭhi; tesattati, tīsattatī; tñasīti, tiyāsīti; tenavuti, tinavuti–-asatādotveva-tisataṃ.
非以“百”等开头且不表其他意义时,在从“四十”等开始的情形中,dvi 可变为 ā 及 va:dvecattālīsaṃ、dvācattāsaṃ、dvicattālīsaṃ;dvepaññāsaṃ、dvāpaññāsaṃ、dvipaññāsaṃ;等。巴利
Asatādo’naññatthe cattālīsādo dvisse vā hoti āva dvecattālīsaṃ, dvācattāsaṃ, dvicattālīsaṃ; dvepaññāsaṃ, dvāpaññāsaṃ, dvipaññāsaṃ; iccādi.
bā 于 cattālisa 等之前——。巴利
Bācattālisādo-.
“二”可变为“bā”,但不在“四十”等之前,且无其他意义;bārasa、dvādasa;bāvīsati、dvāvīsati;battiṃsa、dvattiṃsa——acattālīsādoti——为何?Dvicattālīsa。巴利
Dvissa bā vā hotacattālīsādo’naññatthe; bārasa, dvādasa; bāvīsati, dvāvīsati; battiṃsa, dvattiṃsa–-acattālīsādoti-kiṃ? Dvicattālīsa.
于二百及十位之后,pañca 的 paṇṇu 与 paṇṇa 可依次替换;巴利
Dvisatidasesu pañcassa paṇṇupannā -.
于 vīsati、dasa 等词之后时,pañca 可依次成为 paṇṇa 与 panna;paṇṇuvīsati、pañcavīsati;pannarasa、pañcadasa。巴利
Vīsatidasesu paresu pañcassa paṇṇupannā honti vā yathākkamaṃ; paṇṇuvīsati, pañcavīsati;pannarasa, pañcadasa.
dasa 在后时,Catussa 变为 cuto——巴利
Catussa cuto dase-.
当 dasa 词在后时,catussa 可有 cu 与 co;即 cuddasa、coddasa、catuddasa。巴利
Catussa cuco honti vā dasasadde pare; cuddasa, coddasa, catuddasa.
Chassa 的 so——。巴利
Chassa so-.
当 dasa 一词在后时,cha 替换为 so;如 soḷasa。巴利
Chassa so iccayamādeso hoti dasasadde pare; soḷasa.
eka 与 aṭṭha 的 ā——巴利
Ekaṭṭhānamā-.
eka 与 aṭṭha 在 dasa 之前时变为 ā;ekādasa、aṭṭhārasa。巴利
Ekaaṭṭhānaṃ ā hoti dase pare; ekādasa, aṭṭhārasa.
Ra 于数词之后可有——巴利
Ra saṃkhyāto vā-.
数词之后的 dasa 可变为 ra;ekārasa、ekādasa;bārasa、dvādasa;pannarasa、pañcadasa;sattarasa、sattadasa;aṭṭhārasa、aṭṭhādasa——在 panna、bā 替换之处必定如此,此处 catuddasa 不发生。巴利
Saṃkhyāto parassa dasassara hoti vibhāsā; ekārasa, ekādasa; bārasa, dvādasa; pannarasa, pañcadasa; sattarasa, sattadasa; aṭṭhārasa, aṭṭhādasa–-pannabādesesu niccaṃ, idha na hoti catuddasa.
于 Chatīhi 后,ḷ 且——巴利
Chatīhi ḷo ca-
于六之后,dasa 的 ḷa 与 ra 发生;soḷasa、sorasa;teḷasa、terasa。巴利
Chatīhi parassa dasassa ḷo hoti ro ca; soḷasa, sorasa; teḷasa, terasa.
于 catuttha、tatiya 之前,aḍḍha〔变为〕uḍḍha、tiyā——巴利
Catutthatatiyānamaḍḍhuḍḍhatiyā-.
aḍḍha 在后面的 catuttha 与 tatiya 之前时,依次成为 uḍḍha 与 aḍḍhatiya;“aḍḍha 加 catuttha”为 aḍḍhuḍḍha,“aḍḍha 加 tatiya”为 aḍḍhatiyo——如何?aḍḍhateyyo——于自身意义时加 ṇya,后词增长。巴利
Aḍḍhā paresaṃ catutthatatiyānaṃ uḍḍhatiyā honti yathākkamaṃ;’aḍḍhana catuttho’ aḍḍhuḍḍho,’aḍḍhena tatiyo’ aḍḍhatiyo–-kathaṃ?Aḍḍhateyyoti-sakatthe ṇye uttara padavuddhi.
dutiya 与〔aḍḍha〕相合,即变为 diyaḍḍha、divaḍḍha——。巴利
Dutiyassa saha diyaḍḍhadivaḍḍhā-.
“半”(aḍḍha)与紧接其后的“第二”(dutiya)连同“半”这个词,成为diyaḍḍha、divaḍḍha;“以半加第二”,成为diyaḍḍha,或divaḍḍha。巴利
Aḍḍhā parassa dutiyassa sahaaḍḍhasaddena diyaḍḍhadivaḍḍhā honti;’ aḍḍhena dutiyo’ diyaḍḍho, divaḍḍho vā.
在元音前,当 ku〔劣义〕处于后置词义时,kada——巴利
Sare kada kussuntaratthe-.
当 ku 处于“恶、劣”之义时,若后词以 sara 等开头,则在后词中替换为 kada;kadannaṃ、kadasanaṃ——为什么说“sara”?kuputto;为什么说“恶、劣之义”?kuoṭṭho;rājā。巴利
Kussuttarapadatthe vattamānassa sarādo uttarapade kadā desohoti; kadannaṃ, kadasanaṃ–-sareti-kiṃ? Kuputto; uttarattheti-kiṃ? Kuoṭṭho; rājā.
表“少”义的 ku 在后续词义中时,成为 kā;appakaṃ lavaṇaṃ——kālavaṇaṃ。巴利
Appatthe vattamānassa kussakā hotuttarapadatthe;’appakaṃ lavaṇaṃ’ kālavaṇaṃ.
于 purisa 词中,〔应作〕eva——巴利
Purisevā-.
在 purise〔人〕中,kussa 的 kā 可成为;kāpuriso, kupuriso——这是 appatta 分别;然而在 appatthe〔少义〕中,依前条规则则恒为 kā;“īsaṃ puriso” kāpuriso。巴利
Kussa purisekā hoti vā; kāpuriso, kupuriso–-ayamappattavibhāsā–-appatthe tupubbenaniccaṃhoti;’īsaṃ puriso’ kāpuriso.
于前等词之后的后者,其 ahassa 有 anhādesa;pubbanho;aparanho;ajajanho;sāyanho;majjhanho。巴利
Pubbādīhuttarapadassaahassa anhādeso hoti; pubbanho; aparanho; ajajanho; sāyanho; majjhanho.
如是,在目犍连语法之注释中,复合词品第三。巴利
Iti moggallāne vyākaraṇe vuttiyaṃ samāsakaṇḍo tatiyo.
从第六格结尾之名,于非后代义中,可加 ṇ 后缀;ṇ 字母是为增强语义;其他情况亦然。“vasiṭṭha 的后代”——vāsiṭṭho,或 vāsiṭṭhī;opagavo,或 opagavī——“vā”字是为语句与复合词的分别。此规则的适用范围,限于其自身意义所及。巴利
Chaṭṭhiyantā nāmasmā vā ṇappaccayo hotapacce’bhidheye; ṇakāro vuddhyattho; evamaññatrāpi,’vasiṭṭhassāpaccaṃ’ vāsiṭṭho, vāsiṭṭhī vā; opagavo, opagavī vā –-veti-vākya samāsavikappatthaṃ tassādhikāro sakatthāvadhi.
从 vaccha 等词之后,接 -āna 与 -aṇa 后缀,以及 -āyana 后缀——巴利
Vacchāditoṇānaṇāyanā-.
从 Vacchā 等词、以及不以 apacca 后缀结尾的 hottā 等词之后,若表 apacca 义,可加 ṇāna、ṇāyana 后缀。Vacchāno、vacchāyano;kaccāno、kaccāyano——于 y 的插入——kātiyāno;moggallāno、moggallāyano;sākaṭāno、sākaṭāyano;kaṇbhāno、kaṇbhāyano;如是等。巴利
Vacchādīhi apaccappaccayantehi hottādīhica saddehi ṇānaṇāyanappaccayā vā hontapacce. Vacchāno vacchāyano; kaccāno, kaccāyano–-yāgame-kātiyāno; moggallāno, moggallāyano; sākaṭāno, sākaṭāyano; kaṇbhāno, kaṇbhāyano; iccādi.
由 Kattika 等词及 vidhavā 等词之后,ṇeyya、ṇera 可依次用于 apacca 义。Kattikeyyo。Venateyyo;bhāgīneyyo 等——vedhavero;vandhakero;nāḷikero;sāmaṇero 等。巴利
Kattikādīhi vidhavādīhi ca ṇeyyaṇerā vā yathākkamaṃ hontapacce. Kattikeyyo. Venateyyo; bhāgīneyyo iccādi–-vedhavero; vandhakero; nāḷikero; sāmaṇero iccādi.
后缀 ṇya 用于 dicca 等词之后——巴利
Ṇya diccādīhi-.
从 ditī 等词之后,表非后代义时,可加 ṇya 后缀。decca;ādicca;koṇḍañña;gagya;bhātabba;等等——巴利
Ditippabhutīhi ṇyo vā hotapacce. Decco; ādicco; koṇḍañño; gaggyo; bhātabbo; iccādi
从以 a 结尾的〔词干〕,于后代义中可〔加〕后缀 ṇi:dakkhi;doṇi;vāsavi;vāruṇiccādi。巴利
Akārantato ṇi vā hotapacce dakkhi; doṇi; vāsavi; vāruṇiccādi.
于种姓义中,从 rāja 词干之后〔加后缀〕ñña——。巴利
Rājato ñño jātiyaṃ-.
当 jāti(出身)被理解为 apacca(后裔)之义时,在 rāja 一词之后可加 ñño。rājañño——jāti 是指什么?rājāpaccaṃ。巴利
Rājasaddato ñño vā hotapacce jātiyaṃ gamyamānāyaṃ. Rājañño–-jātiyanti kiṃ?Rājāpaccaṃ.
从 khatta 一词,以 ya 为后缀——从 khatta 一词,在表后代(apacca)与种姓(jāti)的意义上,所成形式为 khatyo;若只是就种姓义而言,则作 khatti。巴利
Khattā yiyā-. Khattasaddā yeyā hontapacce jātiyaṃ khatyo; khattiyo jātiyayantve-khatti.
Manu 之后接 ssasaṇi-。巴利
Manuto ssasaṇi-.
从 manu 一词,于表示出身时,ssa 与 saṇa 成为 apacca 后缀。manusso;mānuso?于阴性——manussā;mānusī——于表示出身时,正是——māṇavo。巴利
Manusaddato jātiyaṃ ssasaṇa hontapacce. Manusso; mānuso? Itthiyaṃ-manussā; mānusī–-jātiyantveva-māṇavo.
从国土名,对刹帝利和王,用 ṇa 后缀——巴利
Janapadanāmasmā khattiyā rañño ca ṇo-.
由地名而有的名称,从该名称派生刹帝利后裔及王族时,加后缀ṇo。Pañcālo;kosalo;māgadho;okkāko——为何要限定“由地名”?Dāsarathi;为何要限定“刹帝利”?“般遮罗婆罗门的后裔”pañcāla。巴利
Janapadassa yaṃ nāmaṃ tannāmasmā khattiyāpacce raññova ṇo hoti. Pañcālo; kosalo; māgadho; okkāko–-janapadanāmasmāti-kiṃ? Dāsarathi; khattiyāti-kiṃ?’Pañcālassa brāhmaṇassāpaccaṃ’ pañcāla.
ṇya——kurusivīhī——。巴利
Ṇya kurusivīhī-.
在kurusivīhi的后裔及王族中,有ṇya;korabyo、sebyo。巴利
Kurusivīhapacce raññe ca ṇyo hoti; korabyo sebyo.
在 rāgā 之后加后缀 Ṇa,表示 tena rattaṃ〔被此所染〕巴利
Ṇa rāgā tena rattaṃ-.
从表示 rāga 的第三格词形,在“被染色”(ratta)这一意义时,有 ṇo(词尾):“以 kasāva 所染者”即 kāsāvaṃ;kosumbhaṃ;hāliddaṃ——rāga 是指什么?如“被 Devadatta 所染的衣”;此处为何没有(ṇo)?因为 nīlaṃ、pītaṃ 等是性质形容词,即使没有 ṇa,也已表达该 ṇa 的意义。巴利
Rāgavācitatiyantato rattamiccetasmiṃ atthe ṇo hoti’kasāvena rattaṃ’ kāsāvaṃ;kosumbhaṃ; hāliddaṃ–-rāgāti kiṃ? Devadattena rattaṃ vatthaṃ; idha kasmā nahoti? Nīlaṃ pītanti–-guṇavacanattā vināpi ṇena ṇatthassābhidhānato.
于与月相合的星宿所标示的时节——巴利
Nakkhatteninduyuttena kāle-.
从第三格(具格)的nakkhatta(星宿)而来,由彼所标记的时间,有ṇo后缀;若那星宿与月亮相连。Phussī(普萨星宿的)、rattī(夜);phusso(普萨星宿的)、aho(日)——nakkhattena(以星宿)是什么意思?由星宿所标记的夜;induyuttena(与月亮相连)是什么意思?由Kattikā(迦提迦星宿)所标记的时刻;kāle(于时间)是什么意思?由Phussa(普萨星宿)所标记的成就——ajjakattikā(今日迦提迦)者,当月亮与Kattikā相连时,Kattikā一词适用。巴利
Tatiyantato nakkhattā tena lakkhite kāle ṇo hoti; taṃ ce nakkhantaminduyuttaṃ hoti. Phussī, rattī; phusso, aho–-nakkhatteneti-kiṃ? Gurunā lakkhitā ratti; indu yanutteneti-kiṃ? Kattikāya lakkhito muhutto; kāleti-kiṃ? Phussenalakkhitā atthasiddhi–-ajjakattikāti kattikā yutte cande kattikāsaddo vattate.
Sāssa devatā puṇṇamaṃsi-〔彼之天神即满月〕。巴利
Sāssa devatā puṇṇamaṃsi-.
Seti paṭhamantā assāti 于第六格之义,ṇo 存在;凡以 paṭhamanta 为词尾者,若彼为天神或 puṇṇamāsī——“Sugato devatā assā”故为 sogato;māhindo;yāmo;vāruṇo;“phussī puṇṇamāsī assa sambandhinī”故为 phusso、māgho;māgho;phagguno;citto;vesākho;peṭṭhamulo;āsāḷho;sāvaṇo;poṭṭhapādo;assayujo;kattiko;māgasiro——puṇṇamāsīti——何耶?phussi pañcamī assa——puṇṇamāsī 与 gatakamāsa 相关者非有;“puṇṇo mā assanti”依此词源——由此正是依固定用法 ṇo 及 sāgama,唯于 māsasuti 而非 pañcadasaratta 等之规则。巴利
Seti paṭhamantā assāti chaṭṭhatthe ṇo bhavati yaṃ paṭhamantaṃ sā ve devatā puṇṇamāsī vā.’Sugato devatā assā’ti sogato; māhindo; yāmo; vāruṇo; phussī puṇṇamāsī assa sambandhinī’ti phusso, māgho; māgho; phagguno; citto; vesākho;peṭṭhamulo; āsāḷho; sāvaṇo; poṭṭhapādo; assayujo; kattiko; māgasiro–-puṇṇamāsīti-kiṃ, phussi pañcamī assa–-puṇṇamāsīva gatakamāsasambandhinī na hoti;’puṇṇo mā assanti’ nibbacanā–-ato eva nipātanā ṇo, sāgamo ca, māsasutīyāva napapañcadasarattādo vidhi.
表“学习此”“知晓此”义时,加 ka、ṇika 后缀——巴利
Tamadhīte taṃ jānāti kaṇikā ca-.
依第二格语尾,于“学此、知此”等义上,有后缀ṇo与ṇiko。“学习或知晓语法者”——veyyākaraṇo;chāndaso;kamako;padako;venayiko;suttantiko——提及“二”是为了分别立制,显示知与学的对象范围,并摄受已成就者。巴利
Dutiyantato tamadhīte taṃ jānātīti etesphatthesuṇo hoti ko ṇikova.’ Vyākaraṇamadhīte jānāti vā’ veyyākaraṇo; chāndaso; kamako; padako; venayiko; suttantiko–-dvitaggahaṇaṃ puthageva vidhānatthaṃ jānanassaca ajjhenavisayabhāvadassanatthaṃ pasimbupasaṃgahatthañca.
Tassa visaye dese——于其范围、于其处所。巴利
Tassa visaye dese.-.
依第六格语尾,于范围与处所之义上,有后缀ṇo。“居民之范围或处所”——vāsāto——“处所”者何?眼之范围即色,devadatta之范围即随诵。巴利
Chaṭhiyantā visaye desarūpe ṇo hoti.’Vasātīnaṃ visayo deso’vāsāto–-deseti kiṃ? Cakkhussa visayo rūpaṃ, devadattassa visayo’nuvāko.
在“以彼为名的住处”之义中巴利
Nivāse tannāme-.
从第六格词尾,在表示住处、地点、以该名称之义时,有后缀ṇo;sivīnaṃ nivāso desosebyo;vāsāto。巴利
Chaṭṭhiyantā nivāse dese tannāme ṇo hoti;’sivīnaṃ nivāso desosebyo; vāsāto.
Adūrabhave〔于近处存在时〕——.巴利
Adūrabhave-.
从 chaṭṭhī 结尾的词表示“不远之处”时,为表示该意义,ṇo 成为(后缀);“vidasāya adurabhavaṃ”——vedisaṃ。巴利
Chaṭṭhiyantā adūrabhave desetannāme ṇo hoti;’vidasāya adurabhavaṃ’ vedisaṃ.
Tenatibbatte——〔于由彼所生之义〕。巴利
Tenatibbatte-.
从第三格词尾所生之处,于其名称有ṇo;由kusamba所生,kosambī,城;kākandī、mākandī,“由千所生”,sāhassī,壕沟——于因、作者与具格中,随应而用第三格。巴利
Tatiyantā nibbatte desetannāme ṇo hoti; kusambena nibbattā kosambī, nagarī; kākandī, mākandī,’sahassena nibbattā’ sāhassī, parikhā–-hetumhi kattarikaraṇe ca yathāyogaṃ tatiyā.
所谓“后接处所义之结尾词”,是在“此名称之处”的意义上,对以处所格结尾的词,附加上ṇ(即-a/-ika类)词缀。例如,若此处有优昙婆罗树,则称为“odumbaro(产优昙婆罗之地)”;正如“bādaro(产枣之地)”、“babbajo(生茅草之地)”。巴利
Tanti paṭhamantā idhāti sattamyatthe dese tannāme ṇo hoti, yantaṃ paṭhamantamatthi ce;’udumbarā asmiṃ dese santī’ti odumbaro, bādaro, babbajo.
在表示“处所中存在”的意义时,以第七格(位格)词尾结尾的词之后,接“ṇa”后缀。例如:“存在于水中”则称“odaka”(水中之),又如“orasa”(心腹之)、“jānapada”(地方之)、“māgadha”(摩揭陀之)、“kāpilavatthava”(迦毗罗卫之)、“kosamba”(憍赏弥之)。巴利
Sattamyantā bhavatthe ṇo hoti;’udake bhavo’odako, oraso, jānapado, māgadho, kāpilavatthavo, kosambo.
从 ajja 等词之后,〔接〕tato——。巴利
Ajjādīhi tato-.
在表示“时间中存在”的意义时,以“ajja”(今日)等词为首的一类词,接“tana”后缀。例如:“存在于今日”则称“ajjatana”(今日的),又如“svātana”(明日的)、“hiyyattana”(昨日的)。巴利
Bhavatthe ajjādīhi tano hoti;’ajja bhavo’ ajjatano, svātano, hiyyattano.
Purāto 之后,ṇo 与——巴利
Purāto ṇo ca-.
从“purā”起,表“存在”义时,加后缀“ṇa”及“tana”;成为“purāṇa”(古老的)、“purātana”(古昔的)。巴利
Purā iccasmā bhavatthe ṇo hoti tano ca; purāṇo, purātano.
Amātthacco——。于amā词之后,表存在义时,有acco;amacco。巴利
Amātthacco-. Amāsaddato acco hoti bhavatthe; amacco.
从 majjha 等词之后接 -ima——巴利
Majjhāditvimo-.
从majjhā等第七格词尾的词,于“存在”之义中,imo 存在;majjhimo、antimo——majkjdhaanta heṭṭhā upari ora pāra pacchā abbhantara paccanta。巴利
Majjhādīhi sattamyantehi bhavatthe imo hoti; majjhimo, antimo–-majkjdhaanta heṭṭhā upari ora pāra pacchā abbhantara paccanta.
Kaṇṇeyyaṇeyyakayiyā——。巴利
Kaṇṇeyyaṇeyyakayiyā-.
这些以第七格词尾结尾的词在表示“存在”的意义上成为(构词)条件:kaṇa-kusinārāyaṃ bhavo(在Kusinārā存在的)即kosinārako(拘尸那罗人);māgadhako(摩揭陀人);āraññake(林居者);vihāro(住处)——ṇeyya-gaṅgeyyo(恒河边的)、pabbateyyo(山中的)、vāneyeyyo(林中的)——ṇeyyaka-koleyyako(拘利族的)、bārāṇaseyyako(波罗奈的)、campeyyako(瞻波的);mithileyyako(弥梯罗的)即-eyyako——ya-gammo(村落)、dibbo(天界的);iyagāmiyo(?)、udariyo(?)、diviyo(?)、pañcāliyo(般遮罗的)、bodhapakkhīyo(菩提分的)、lokiyo(世间的)。巴利
Sattamyantā ete paccayā honti bhavatthe; kaṇa-’kusinārāyaṃ bhavo’ kosinārako, māgadhako, āraññake, vihāro–-ṇeyya-gaṅgeyyo, pabbateyyo, vāneyeyyā–-ṇeyyaka-koleyyako, bārāṇaseyyako, campeyyako; mithileyyakoti-eyyako–-ya-gammo, dibbo; iyagāmiyo, udariyo, diviyo, pañcāliyo, bodhapakkhīyo, lokiyo.
从第七格语尾,在“存在”之义上,有 ṇika 词尾;sāradiko,divaso;sāradikā,ratti。巴利
Sattamyantā bhavatthe ṇiko hoti; sāradiko, divaso; sāradikā, ratti.
Tamassa〔此是他的〕sippaṃ sīlaṃ paṇyaṃ paharaṇaṃ payojanaṃ——。巴利
Tamassa sippaṃ sīlaṃ paṇyaṃ paharaṇaṃ payojanaṃ-.
“第一格(词干)”指技艺等义。从“奏乐为其技艺”者,有琴师、鼓师、笛师;“着尘衣为其戒”者,有粪扫衣者、持三衣者;“香为其商品”者,有香商、油商、丸药商;“弓箭为其兵器”者,有弓手、矛手、锤手;“护具为其资具”者,有护具者、布衣者、千衣者。巴利
Paṭhamantā sippādivācakā asseti chaḍhatthe ṇiko hoti;’vīṇāvādanaṃ sippamassa’ veṇiko, modaṅgiko, vaṃsiko;’paṃsukūladhāraṇaṃ sīlamassa’ paṃsukūliko, tecīvariko;’gandhopaṇyamassa’ gandhiko, teliko, goḷiko’cāpo paharaṇamassa’ cāpiko, tomariko, muggariko;’upadhippa yojanamassa’ opadhikaṃ, sātikaṃ, sāhassikaṃ.
那杀者、行、拾、行——。从第二词尾的“杀”等如此等义中,有 ṇika 后缀;从鸟——“鸟杀”——有 pakkhiko、sākuṇiko、māyuriko——从鱼——macchiko、meniko——从兽——māgaviko、hāriṇiko——sūkariko——有 ika 后缀;“值得百”有 sātikaṃ、sandiṭṭhikaṃ;“来见法值得”有 ehipassiko、sāhassiko——sahassiyo 在此有 iyo 后缀;“行他妻”有 pāradāriko、maggiko、paññāsayojaniko;“拾枣”有 bādariko、sāmākiko;“行法”有 dhammiko、adhammiko。巴利
Taṃ hantarahati gacchatuñchati carati-. Dutiyantā hantīti evamādisvatthesu ṇiko hoti; pakkhīhi-’pakkhino hantī’ti pakkhiko, sākuṇiko, māyuriko–-macchehi- macchiko, meniko–-migehi māgaviko, hāriṇiko, - sūkarikoti- iko;’satamarahatī’ti sātikaṃ, sandiṭṭhikaṃ;’ehi passa vidhiṃ rahatī’ti ehipassiko, sāhassiko–-sahassiyotīdha iyo;’paradāraṃ gacchatī’ti pāradāriko, maggiko, paññāsayojaniko;’ badare uñchatī’ti bādariko, sāmākiko;’dhammaṃ caratī’ti dhammiko, adhammiko.
以彼所作、以彼所买、以彼所缚、以彼所造作、以彼所混合、以彼所杀、以彼杀、以彼所胜、以彼胜、以彼博戏、以彼掘、以彼渡、以彼行、以彼运、以彼活——巴利
Tena kataṃ kītaṃ baddhamahisaṅkhataṃ saṃsaḍhaṃ hataṃ hanti jitaṃ jayati dibbati khaṇati tarati carati vahati jivati-.
‘第三格’于所作等义中,有ṇika后缀:‘以身所作’者:身业、语业、意业;‘风所生病’者:风病;‘以百钱所买’者:百钱物、千钱物,但从根本上说,‘由提婆达多所买’则不成立,因不达其义故——‘以皮绳所缚’者:皮绳物、铁物、绳索物;——‘以棒所造作、所混合’者:棒物、球物、乳物、胡椒物——‘以网所杀,或能杀’者:网者、渔者——‘以骰子所赢’者:骰子物、杖物——‘以骰子赢、或赌博’者:骰子者——‘以锄所掘’者:锄者、铲者——由提婆达多以指所赢、所掘者则不成立,因不达其义故——‘以筏所渡’者:筏者;筏者,有ika后缀;牛尾者;船者——‘以车所行’者:车者。车者——有parappa者,有ika后缀——‘以肩所载’者:肩者、肩担者;头者,有ika后缀——‘以工资所活’者:工资者、雇者、买者、卖者;买卖者,有ika后缀。巴利
Tatiyantā katādisvatthesu ṇiko hoti;’kāyena kataṃ’ kāyikaṃ, vācasikaṃ, mānasikaṃ;’vātenakato ābādho’ vātiko–-’satena kītaṃ’ sātikaṃ, sāhassikaṃ, mūlatova-devadattena kītoti na hoti tadatthāppatītiyā–-’varattāya baddho’ vārattiko, āyasiko, pāsiko; –-’ghatena abhisaṅkhataṃ saṃsaṭṭhaṃ vā’ ghātikaṃ, goḷikaṃ, dādhikaṃ, māricikaṃ–-’jālena hato hantīti vā’ jāliko, bāḷisiko–-’akkhohi jita’makkhikaṃ, sālākikaṃ–-’akkhehi jayati dibbati vā’ akkhiko–-’khaṇittiyā khaṇatī’ti khāṇittiko, kuddāliko-devadattena jitamaṅgulyā khaṇatīti na hoti tadatthā navagamā–-’uḷumpena taratī’ti oḷumpiko; uḷumpikoti-iko; gopucchiko; nāviko–-’sakaṭena caratī’ti sākaṭiko. Rathiko–-parappikoti iko-’khandhena vahatī’ti khandhiko, aṃsiko; sīsikoti-iko–-’vetatena jīvatī’ti khandhiko, aṃsiko; sīsikoti-iko–-’vetanena jīvatī’ti vetaniko, bhatiko, kayiko, vikkayiko; kayavikkayayikoti-iko.
它导向那——巴利
Tassa saṃvattati-.
以第四格结尾的词,在“导致……”的意义上,有后缀 ṇika;“导致再生”者,为 ponobhaviko,阴性为——ponobhavikā;“导致世间”者,为 lokiko;“善妙之最”者,为 saggo;“导致天界”者,为 sovaggiko;依 sassāvैka tadaminādi 等读法——“导致财富”者,为 dhaññaṃ——yo。巴利
Catutthyantā saṃvattati asmiṃ atthe ṇiko hoti;’punabbhavāya saṃvattatī’ti ponobhaviko, itthiyaṃ-ponobhavikā;’lokāya saṃvattatī’ti lokiko,’ suṭṭhu aggo’ti saggo,’saggāya saṃvattatī’ti sovaggiko, sassāvैka tadaminādi pāṭhā–-’dhanāya saṃvattatī’ti dhaññaṃ-yo.
从彼 sambhutamāgataṃ——巴利
Tato sambhutamāgataṃ-.
当第五格(从格)词尾用于“出生自”“来自”等义时,加后缀“ṇika”构成形容词。例如:从母亲所生或来自母亲者,称为“母系的”、“父系的”——亦可见“ṇya”及“ṇryā”后缀——从香气所生者,称为“芳香物”;从乳房所生者,称为“乳汁”;从父亲所生者,称为“父系者”、“母系者”;或为“凡夫”。巴利
Pañcamyantā sambhutamāgatantietesvatthesu ṇiko hoti;’mātito sambhutamāgatanti vā’ mattikaṃ, pettikaṃ–-ṇyariyaṇryāpi dissanti–-’surabhito sambhutaṃ’ sorabhyaṃ;’thanato sambhutaṃ’ thaññaṃ;’pitito sambhuto’ pettiyo, mātiyo, mattiyo; macco vā.
“住于彼处”“为彼所知”“受彼供养”“委任于彼”——这些意义皆由第七格(处格)词尾所成。巴利
Tattha vasati vidito bhatto niyutto-.
第七格词尾用于“居住于”等义时,加“ṇika”后缀构成形容词:“居住于树根处”故称“住树根者”;“住阿兰若者”;“住墓园者”;“于世间所知”故称“世间的”;“侍奉四大天王”故称“四大天王天众”;“于门负责”故称“守门者”;如“dassoka”“tadamina”等读例,加“ika”成“库房管理者”;加“kiya”成“出生类”“盲人类”等。巴利
Sattamyantā vasatītvevamādisvatthesu ṇiko hoti;’rukkhamūle vasatī’ti rukkhamuliko,āraññiko, sosāniko;’loke vidito’ lokiko;’catumahārājesu bhattā’ cātummahārājikā;;dvāre niyutto’ dovāriko; dassoka tadaminādipāṭhā,bhaṇḍāgāriko;-iko navakammiko–-kiyo-jātikiyo, andhakiyo.
在第六格(属格)词尾之后,于此义项上,-ika 后缀发生;如“saṅghassa idaṃ”(这是僧团的)→ saṅghikaṃ(僧团的)、puggalikaṃ(个人的)、sakyaputtiko(释子的)、nāthaputtiko(主子的)、jenadattiko(净果弟子等的)——kiye-sakiyo、parakiyo;niye-attaniyaṃ;ke-sako、rājakaṃ、bhaddhaṃ。巴利
Chaṭṭhiyantā idamiccasmiṃatthe ṇiko hoti;’saṅghassa idaṃ’ saṅghikaṃ, puggalikaṃ, sakyaputtiko, nāthaputtiko, jenadattiko–-kiye-sakiyo, parakiyo; niye-attaniyaṃ;ke-sako, rājakaṃ, bhaddhaṃ.
从第六格结尾的词,在表示“这是属于……的”这一意义时,有 ṇa;kaccāyanassa idaṃ——kaccāyanaṃ,vyākaraṇaṃ;sogataṃ,sāsanaṃ;māhisaṃ,maṃsādi。巴利
Chaṭṭhiyantā idamiccasmiṃ atthe ṇo hoti;’kaccāyanassैdaṃ’ kaccāyanaṃ, vyākaraṇaṃ; sogataṃ, sāsanaṃ; māhisaṃ, maṃsādi.
从 gava 等词之后,有 yo。巴利
Gavādīhi yo-.
对于以 gavā 等词结尾的第六格词,在表达“此物属于彼”的意义时,加后缀 ya;“属于牛的”为 gabyaṃ,如肉等;kabyaṃ、dabbaṃ。巴利
Gavādīhi chaṭṭhiyantehi idamiccasmiṃ atthe yo hoti;’gunnaṃ idaṃ’gabyaṃ, maṃsādi; kabyaṃ, dabbaṃ.
从 pitṛ 词之后,于表“兄弟”之义时,加 reyyaṇa——。巴利
Pitito bhātari reyyaṇa-.
从pitu一词,在表示其兄弟时,有reyyaṇa;“父亲的兄弟”即petteyyo。巴利
Pitusaddā tassa bhātari reyyaṇa hoti;’pitubhātā’ petteyyo.
而对于母系之姊妹,则附加 cho 后缀。巴利
Mātito ca bhaginiyaṃ cho-.
在母方与父方,于他们姊妹的称谓上附加 cho 词缀:“母之姊妹”成为 mātucchā(姨母);“父之姊妹”成为 pitucchā(姑母)。那么,mātula(舅父)又是如何构成的呢?依据“mātulādi”等特例规则,这些属于约定俗成的不规则构词。巴利
Mātito pitito ca tesaṃ bhaginīyaṃ cho hoti;’mātu bhagini’ mātucchā;’pitubhaginī’ pitucchā–-kathaṃ mātulotu?’Mātulāditvānī’ti nipātanā.
Mātāpitusvāmaho——。巴利
Mātāpitusvāmaho-.
由 mātāpitūhi 有他们的 mātāpitusvāmaho;mātumātā 是 mātāmahī;mātupitā 是 mātāmaho;pitumātā 是 patāmahī;pitupitā 是 pitāmaho——并非依照数序各自结合。巴利
Mātāpitūhi tesaṃ mātāpitusvāmaho hoti;’mātumātā’ mātāmahī;’mātupitā’ mātāmaho;’pitumātā’ patāmahī;’pitupitā’ pitāmaho–-na yathāsaṃkhyaṃ paccekābhisambandhā.
于 Nahite,reyyaṇa——。巴利
Nahite reyyaṇa-.
由 mātā(母)、pitu(父)二词,在 hita(利益)之义上,有 reyyaṇa(后缀);matteyyo、petteyyo。巴利
Mātāpituhi hite reyyaṇa hoti; matteyyo, petteyyo.
于 nindā、aññātappa、paṭibhāga、rasa、dayā、saññā 之后,为 ko——巴利
Nindāññātappapaṭibhāgarassadayāsaññāsu ko-.
于nindā等义中,从名词有ko;于nindā中——muṇḍako、samaṇako;于aññāta中——“kassāyaṃ asso”者,assako——巴利
Nindādīsvatthesu nāmasmā ko hoti; nindāyaṃ-muṇḍako, samaṇako; aññāte-’kassāyaṃ asso’ti assako–-
依其功用、力用、关系及特殊等而得以区分:在“用途”义上,有油、罐;在“相似”义上,如“犹如象”而有象者、马者、牛者;在“细小”义上,有人者、树者、鸟者;在“爱怜”义上,有子者、犊者;在“认定”义上,如“犹如孔雀”而有孔雀者。巴利
Payogasāmatthiyā sambandhivisesānavagamo’vagamyate–-appatthe-telakaṃ, ghatakaṃ–-paṭibhāgatthe-’hatthi viya’ hatthiko, assako, balivaddako–-rasse-mānusako, rukkhako, pilakkhako–-dayāyaṃ-puttako, vacchako–-saññāyaṃ-’moroviya’ morako.
表示 Tamassa parimāṇaṃ〔此为其量度〕之义时,有 ṇiko 与——巴利
Tamassa parimāṇaṃ ṇiko ca-.
从第一格尾词起,在此义中,ṇika 与 ka 发生;若该第一格尾词是度量;“以此被衡量”故为度量——doṇo parimāṇamassa 为 doṇiko,vīhi;khārasatiko,khārasahassiko,āsītiko,vayo;upaḍḍhakāyikaṃ,bimbohanaṃ;pañcakaṃ,chakkaṃ。巴利
Paṭhamantā asseti asmiṃ atthe ṇiko hoti ko ca, taṃ ce paṭhamantaṃ parimāṇaṃ bhavati;’parimiyate’tene’ti parimāṇaṃ–-’doṇo parimāṇamassa’ doṇiko, vīhi; khārasatiko, khārasahassiko, āsītiko, vayo; upaḍḍhakāyikaṃ, bimbohanaṃ; pañcakaṃ,chakkaṃ.
Satetehi〔之后〕ttako——。巴利
Satetehi ttako-.
从 yādi 等第一格尾词之后,于属格意义中构成 ttaka 词缀;该第一格尾词确实为度量;其度量为何,即 yantaka、tattaka、ettaka;在 āvataka 处——yāvatako、tāvatako。巴利
Yādīhi paṭhamantehiasseti chaṭṭhatthettako hoti, taṃ ve paṭhamantaṃ parimāṇaṃ bhavati;’yaṃ paramāṇamassa yantakaṃ, tattakaṃ, ettakaṃ; āvatake-yāvatako, tāvatako.
由‘Sabbā’等词构成‘āvantu’词缀。巴利
Sabbā cāvantu-.
从 sabba 等词的第一词尾以及 yā 等词后,为表第六格(属格)之义,接 -āvantu;该第一词尾须是量度;“sabbaṃ parimāṇamassa”——sabbāvantaṃ、yāvantaṃ、tāvantaṃ、etāvantaṃ。巴利
Sabbato paṭhamantehi yādīhi ca asseti chaṭṭhatthe āvantu hoti, taṃ ve paṭhamantaṃ parimāṇaṃ bhavati;’sabbaṃ parimāṇamassa’ sabbāvantaṃ, yāvantaṃ, tāvantaṃ, etāvantaṃ.
从 kim 之后,接 rati、rīva、īvata、ka、rittaka——巴利
Kimhā ratirivarīvatakarittakā-.
于 kim 的第一格词尾之后接表属格意义的 assa 时,构成 rati、rīvarī、vataka、rittaka;若该第一格词尾表量度,则“其数几何、其量几何”——kati、ete;kiva、kīvatakaṃ、kittakaṃ——rīvanto 自性不可数。巴利
Kimhā paṭhamantā asseti chaṭṭhatthe ratirīvarīvatakarittakā honti, taṃ ce paṭhamantaṃ parimāṇaṃ bhavati;’kiṃ saṃkhyānaṃ parimāṇamesaṃ’ kati, ete; kiva, kīvatakaṃ, kittakaṃ–-rīvanto sabhāvato asaṃkhyo.
已生起 tārakāditvito——。巴利
Saṃjātaṃ tārakāditvito-.
由 tārakā 等词、以第一尾结尾者,为表第六格(属格)之义,有 ito,彼等确实成为 saṃjāta;tārakāsaṃjātā assa 即 tārakitaṃ, gaganaṃ;pupphīto, rukkho;pallavitā, latā。巴利
Tārakādīhi paṭhamantehiasseti chaṭṭhattheito hoti, te ve saṃjātā honti;’tārakāsaṃjātā assa’ tārakitaṃ, gaganaṃ; pupphīto, rukkho; pallavitā, latā.
于量度义中,加 matto 后缀。巴利
Māne matto-.
从第一词尾、依 māna 的用法,在“此物有如此之量”这一意义中,构成 matta;palaṃ ummānamassa——palamattaṃ,hattho pamāṇamassa——hatthamattaṃ,sataṃ mānamassa——satamattaṃ,doṇo parimāṇamassa——doṇamattaṃ——以不分离的转喻,也可构成 doṇo。巴利
Paṭhamantā mānavuttito asseti asmiṃ atthe mattohoti;’palaṃ ummānamassa’ palamattaṃ,’hattho pamāṇamassa’ hatthamattaṃ,’sataṃ mānamassa’ satamattaṃ,’doṇo parimāṇamassa’ doṇamattaṃ–-abhedopavārā doṇotipi hoti.
Taggho vuddhaṃ——。巴利
Taggho vuddhaṃ-.
基于上述规则所说的“assa”,在表达第六格(属格)的意义时,可用“taggha”和“matta”这两个词;例如:“jaṇṇutagghaṃ”(及膝高)、“jaṇṇumattaṃ”(膝量)。巴利
Uddhamānavuttito asseti chaṭṭhatthe tagghā hotīmैtto ca; jaṇṇutagghaṃ, jaṇṇumattaṃ.
“人”类名词添加后缀“ṇa”——巴利
Ṇo ca purisā-.
“purisa(男子)”一词,处于第一格语尾,基于“uddha”词基,其末尾的“na”变为“ṇo”;“mattā”等词也是如此;由此构成:“porisaṃ(男子价值)”“purisamattaṃ(男子量)”“purisatagghaṃ(男子等值)”等形式。巴利
Purisā paṭhamantā uddhamānavuttito ṇo hoti mattādayo ca; porisaṃ, purisamattaṃ, purisatagghaṃ.
从 ayu 与 bhavītī 的 haṃsa——巴利
Ayubhavītīhaṃse-.
以表示部分的“uba”与“vi”二词——均以第一格结尾——后接“assa”时,在第六格义中加词缀“ayo”;如“两肩属彼”(ubho aṃsā assa),便成“两者”(ubhaya)、“二者”(dvaya)、“三者”(taya)。巴利
Ubavitīhi avayavavuttīhi paṭhamantehi asseti chaṭṭhatthe ayo hoti;’ ubho aṃsā assa’ ubhayaṃ, dvayaṃ, tayaṃ.
在数词之后,于“sa”“cutīsa”“sada”“santa”“ādhaka”“āsmiṃ”“sata”“sahassa”等词中,接上词尾“eḍo-”。巴利
Saṃkhyāya saccutīsasadasantādhakāsmiṃ satasahasseḍo-.
对于以satyanta、utyanta、īsanta、āsanta、dasanta结尾的数词,当其以第一格结尾时,在第七格义中加“ḍo”。若数目更大,如百、千等,亦同此理。巴利
Satyantāya utyantāya īsantāya āsantāya dasantāya ca saṃkhyāya paṭhamantāya asminti sattamyatthe ḍo hoti, sā ce saṃkhyā adhikā hoti, yadasminti taṃ ce sataṃ sahassaṃsata
若为千数,则“二十较此百为多”即称为vīsaṃsataṃ(百二十),乃至有ekavīsaṃsataṃ(百二十一)、千、十万等;“三十较百为多”即tiṃsaṃsataṃ(百三十)、ekatiṃsaṃsataṃ(百三十一)……直至“九十较百为多”为navutaṃsataṃ(百九十)、千、十万等;“四十较百为多”为cattārīsaṃsataṃ(百四十)、千、十万等;“五十较百为多”为paññāsaṃsataṃ(百五十)、千、十万等;以及十一等。何以故?因百之上有“多”。所谓“多”是何义?即十五多于百。“asminti”是何义?即二十于此百。“一百多”是何义?即超出十一的二十之数。巴利
Sahassaṃ vā hoti;’vīsati adhikā asmiṃ sate’ti vīsaṃsataṃ, ekavīsaṃsataṃ, sahassaṃ satasahassaṃ vā–-tiṃsaṃsataṃ, ekatiṃsaṃ sataṃ –-utyantāya -navutaṃsataṃ, sahassaṃ satasahassaṃ vā –-īsantiya-cattārīsaṃsataṃ, sahassaṃ satasahassaṃ vā–-āsantāya-paññāsaṃsataṃ sahassaṃ satasahassaṃ vā–-dasantāya-ekādasaṃ sataṃ, sahassaṃ satasahassaṃ vā–-saccutīsāsadasanteti kiṃ?Chādhikā asmiṃ sate; adhiketi kiṃ? Pañcadasahīnā asmiṃ sate; asminti kiṃ? Vīsatyadhikā etasmāsatā; satasahasseti kiṃ? Ekādasaadhikā assaṃ vīsatiyaṃ.
于其,从 pūreṇekādasā 等之前起,或——巴利
Tassa pūreṇekādasādito vā-.
对于以第六格结尾、从十一等起始的数,用“ḍo”作为序数标记,此为可选规则;该数即表完整,所谓“完整十一”即ekādaso(第十一)、ekādasamo(第十一);vīso(二十)、vīsatimo(第二十);tiṃso(三十)、tīṃsatimo(第三十);cattālīso(四十)、paññāso(五十)。巴利
Chaṭṭhīyantāyekādasādikāya saṃkhyāya ḍo hoti pūraṇatthe vibhāsā; sā saṃkhyāpūrīyateyenataṃ pūraṇaṃ’ekādasannaṃ pūraṇo’ekādaso, ekādasamo; vīso, vīsatimo; tiṃso, tīṃsatimo; cattālīso, paññāso.
Ma 于 paṃcādikatīhi——。巴利
Ma paṃcādikatīhi-.
于以第六格结尾、从pañca等开始的数词,以及kati之后,mo 有“满”义;pañcamo、sattamo、aṭṭhamo;katimo、katimī。巴利
Chaṭṭhīyantāya paṃcādikāya saṃkhyāyakatismā ca mo hoti pūraṇatthe; pañcamo, sattamo, aṭṭhamo; katimo, katimī.
以 satādi 等词为末的(数词)亦(有 mo)——巴利
Satādīnami ca-.
凡以第六格结尾的“百”等数词,表序数义时,加词缀“mo”,且“百”等词的词尾发生替代;故成:“第百”“第千”。巴利
Satādikāya saṃkhyāya chaṭṭhiyantāya puraṇatthe mo hoti, satādinamicāntādeso; satimo, sahassimo.
Chā 为 ddhaddhamā——巴利
Chā ddhaddhamā -.
表序数义时,‘六’与‘八’的词形分别为chaṭṭho、chaṭṭhamo和aṭṭhamo等;其中chaṭṭho为第六,chaṭṭhamo亦为第六;阴性形式为chaṭṭhī、chaṭṭhamī。问:第二、第三、第四如何?答:第二dutiya、第三tatiya、第四catuttha,这些是约定俗成的词尾变化(nipātana)。巴利
Chasaddāṭṭhaṭṭhamāhonti tassa pūraṇatthe; chaṭṭho, chaṭṭhamo; itthīya-chaṭṭhi chaṭṭhami–-kathaṃ,dutiyaṃ tatiyaṃ catutthanti? Dutiyassa-catutthatatiyānanti-nipātanā.
于无助伴之义,由“ka”而成“ekā”。巴利
Ekā kākyasahāye-.
从 ekasmā 表示无伴之义时,可加 ka 或 ākī;ekako、ekāki、eko。巴利
Ekasmā asahāyatthe kaāki honti vā; ekako, ekāki, eko.
从 vaccha 等词,为表示幼小之义,加 taro——巴利
Vacchādīhi tanutte taro-.
Vacchādīnaṃ 本性的微细被理解时,taro 后缀存在;susutta 的微细——vacchataro;阴性——vacchatarī;yobbana 的微细——okkhataro;assabhāva 的微细——assataro;sāmatthiya 的微细——usabhataro。巴利
Vacchādīnaṃ sabhāvassa tanutte gamyamānetaro hoti; susuttassa tanutte-vacchataro; itthiyaṃ-vacchatarī; yobbanassatanuttै-okkhataro; assabhāvassa tanutte-assataro; sāmatthiyassa tanuttै-usabhataro.
于区分时,从 kim〔有〕ratararatamā——。巴利
Kimhā nidhāraṇe ratararatamā-.
kiṃ 词干在表示简择义时,有 ratara、ratama 后缀;kataro bhavataṃ devadatto;kataro bhavataṃ kaṭho;katamo bhavataṃ devadatto;katamo bhavataṃ kaṭho;bhāradvājānaṃ katamo'si brahme。巴利
Kiṃsaddā niddhāraṇe ratararatamā hontī; kataro bhavataṃ devadatto; kataro bhavataṃ kaṭho; katamo bhavataṃ devadatto; katamo bhavataṃ kaṭho; bhāradvājānaṃ katamo’si brahme.
由具格词干,在表示“所给”之义时,加 liyā 等后缀——巴利
Tena datte liyā-.
从具格结尾的词,在表示“所给”之义时,有 liya 等后缀;devenadatto;devalo;deviyo;brahmalo;brahmayo——sivā——sīvalo;sīviyo;sissa dīgho。巴利
Tatiyantā datte’bhidheye lैyā honti;’devenadatto; devalo; deviyo; brahmalo; brahmayo–-sivā-sīvalo; sīviyo; sissa dīgho.
于Tassa的bhāvakammesu〔状态与被动〕中,ttatāttanaṇyaṇeyya ṇiyaṇiyayā-。巴利
Tassa bhāvakammesu ttatāttanaṇyaṇeyya ṇiyaṇiyayā-.
以属格结尾的词,在表示状态与行为时,通常加 ttā 等后缀;然而并非所有后缀适用于一切词,唯除 ttā 与 tā 之外——bhavanti etasmā buddhisaddā 之状态,是词语生起的因由——nīlassa paṭassa bhāvo 为 nīlattaṃ、nīlatā,即属性的状态——nīlassa guṇassa bhāvo 为 nīlattaṃ、nīlatā,即蓝色属性之类;gottaṃ 为 gotā,即牛类——pācakattaṃ、daṇḍittaṃ、visāṇittaṃ、rājapurisattaṃ 表示作用等关系——devadattattaṃ、candattaṃ、sūriyattaṃ 表示他们特有状态的共相——ākāsattaṃ、abhāvattaṃ 表示假立差别的共相——ttana:puthujjanattanaṃ;vedanattanaṃ;jāyattanaṃ、jārattanaṃ——ṇya:ālasyaṃ、brahmaññaṃ、cāpalyaṃ、nepuññaṃ、pesuññaṃ、rajjaṃ、ādhipaccaṃ、dāyajjaṃ、vesammaṃ;vesamanti keci、sakhyaṃ、vāṇijjaṃ——ṇeyya:soceyyaṃ、ādhipateyyaṃ——ṇa:gāravaṃ、pāṭavaṃ、ajjavaṃ、maddavaṃ——iya:adhipatiyaṃ、paṇḍitiyaṃ、bahussutiyaṃ、naggiyaṃ、sūriyaṃ——ṇiya:ālasiyaṃ、kālusiyaṃ、mandiyaṃ、dakkhiyaṃ、porohitiyaṃ、veyyattiyaṃ——kathaṃ、rāmaṇīyakanti——sakatthe kantāṇena siddhaṃ——kammaṃ kriyā;tattha。“Alasassa kammaṃ”为 alasattaṃ、alasatā、alasattanaṃ;ālasyaṃ、ālasiyaṃ 或——“sakatthe”ti。sakatthe 亦如实 kāruññaṃ、pattakallaṃ、ākāsānañcaṃ、kāyapaguññatā。巴利
Chaṭṭhiyantā bhāve kamme ca ttādayo honti bahulaṃ; na ca sabbe sabbato honti,añaññatra ttatāhi–-’bhavanti etasmābuddhisaddā’ti bhāvo, saddassa pavattinittaṃ–-’nīlassapaṭassa bhāvo’ nīlattaṃ, nīlatāti guṇo bhāvo–-’nīlassaguṇassa bhāvo nīlattaṃ, nīlatātī nīlaguṇajāti; gottaṃ gotāti, gojāti–-pācakattaṃ daṇḍittaṃ visāṇittaṃ rājapurisattanti kriyādisambandhittaṃ–-devadattatta candattaṃ sūriyattantītadavatthāvisesasāmaññaṃ–-ākāsattaṃ abhācattanti upacaritabhedasāmaññaṃ–-ttana-puthujjanattanaṃ; vedanattanaṃ; jāyattanaṃ jārattanaṃ–-ṇya-ālasyaṃ brahmaññaṃ cāpalyaṃ nepuññaṃpesuññaṃ rajjaṃ ādhipaccaṃ dāyajjaṃ vesammaṃ; vesamanti keci, sakhyaṃ vāṇijjaṃ–-ṇeyya-soceyyaṃ, ādhipateyyaṃ–-ṇa-gāravaṃ pāṭavaṃ ajjavaṃ maddavaṃ–-iya-adhipatiyaṃ paṇḍitiyaṃ bahussutiyaṃnaggiyaṃ sūriyaṃ –-ṇiya-ālasiyaṃ kālusiyaṃ mandiyaṃ dakkhiyaṃ porohitiyaṃ veyyattiyaṃ–-kathaṃ, rāmaṇīyakanti-sakatthe kantāṇena siddhaṃ–-kammaṃ kriyā; tattha.’Alasassa kammaṃ’ alasattaṃ, alasatā, alasattanaṃ; ālasyaṃ ālasiyaṃvā–-’sakatthe’ti. Sakatthe’pi yathābhuccaṃkāruññaṃ pattakallaṃ ākāsānañcaṃ, kāyapaguññatā.
从vaddha与dāsa词干,加后缀Bya,亦可——巴利
Bya vaddhadāsā vā-.
以属格收尾的 vaddha、dāsa 等词,在表示状态或行为义时,可加 byo:vaddhakhyaṃ、vaddhatā;dāsabyaṃ;dāsatā——问:vaddhava 如何构成?加 ṇe 时插入 āgama。巴利
Chaṭṭhayantā vaddhā dāsā ca byo vāhoti bhāvakammesu; vaddhakhyaṃ, vaddhatā; dāsabyaṃ; dāsatā–-kathaṃ, vaddhavanti ṇe vāgamo.
Naṇa yuvā 则 cavassa——巴利
Naṇa yuvā kho cavassa-.
以属格收尾的 yuvasadda 等词,在表示状态或被动义时,可变为 ṇa,词干并变为 bo;例如 yobbanaṃ;或者呢——yuvattaṃ、yuvatā。巴利
Chaṭṭhiyantā yuvasdā bhāvakammesunaṇa vā hoti, vassabo ca; yobbanaṃ; vātveva-yuvattaṃ, yuvatā.
从aṇu等词之后的第六格词尾,在bhāva(状态)义中,这些(词尾)可(vā)出现;aṇimā;laghimā;mahimā;kasimā——或则正是aṇuttaṃ;aṇutā。巴利
Aṇvāditvimo-.
以 aṇu 等第六格结尾的词,在表状态时,可加 ime;aṇimā;laghimā;mahimā;kasimā——抑或是 aṇuttaṃ;aṇutā。巴利
Aṇuādīhi chaṭṭhiyantehi bhāve vā ime hoti; aṇimā; laghimā; mahimā;kasimā–-vātveva-aṇuttaṃ; aṇutā.
在“由彼状态所生起”之义中——。巴利
Bhāvā tena nibbatte-.
表示性质之词,若所指为“由彼所生”之义,则加“-ima”后缀;例如:“由烹煮所生者”名为烹煮所成物,“由浸泡所生者”名为浸泡所成物。巴利
Bhāvavācakā saddā tena nibbatte’bhidheye imo hoti;’pākena nibbattaṃ’ pākimaṃ; sekimaṃ.
从表示“更……”与“最……”的(词)以及表示“极其……”的(词)构成——巴利
Taratamissikiyiṭṭhātisaye-.
当处于超越的状态时,这些词缀便会生起。“以超越的方式而恶”,即“更恶”;“最恶”、“极恶”、“较恶”、“最极恶”——于阴性中则为“更恶者”——表示超越义的词缀亦可叠用;“以超越的方式为最极恶”,即“更为最极恶”。巴利
Atisaye vattamānato hontete paccayā;’atisayena pāpo’ pāpataro; pāpatamo, pāpissiko, pāpiyo, pāpiṭṭho–-itthiyaṃ-pāpatarā–-atisayantāpi atisayappaccayo;’atisayena pāpiṭṭho’ pāpiṭṭhataro.
依止于彼,则有 llo 后缀——。巴利
Tannissite llo-.
从第二格词尾起,有 lla 后缀,于“依止”之义;依止 vedanā 者——vedallaṃ;依止 duṭṭhu 者——duṭṭhullaṃ——illa——saṅkhārillaṃ。巴利
Dutiyantā llappaccayo hoti nissitatthe;’vedanissitaṃ’ vedallaṃ;’ duṭhunissitaṃ’ duṭṭhullaṃ–-ille-saṅkhārillaṃ.
其变化与支分中,有 ṇṇika、ṇeyya、maya——巴利
Tassa vikārāvayavesu ṇṇikaṇeyyamayā-.
从原本状态转变后的另一种状态为变化——从第六格结尾的名词,在变化与部分的意义上,可广泛有 ṇa 等后缀;ṇa——āyasaṃ,bandhanaṃ;odumbaraṃ,paṇṇaṃ;odumbaraṃ,bhasmaṃ;kāpotaṃ,maṃsaṃ;kāpotaṃ,satthi——ṇika——kappāsikaṃ,vatthaṃ;ṇeyya——eṇeyyaṃ,maṃsaṃ;eṇeyyaṃ,satthi;koseyyaṃ,vatthaṃ——maya——tiṇamayaṃ;dārumayaṃ,naḷamayaṃ;mattikāmayaṃ——“aññasmiṃ”。于牛粪中也可有 maya;gomayaṃ。巴利
Pakatiyā uttaramavatthantaraṃ vikāro–-chaṭṭhiyantā nāmasmā vikāre’vayave ca ṇādayohontibahulaṃ; ṇa-āyasaṃ, bandhanaṃ; odumbaraṃ, paṇṇaṃ; odumbaraṃ, bhasmaṃ; kāpātैṃ, maṃsaṃ; kāpotaṃ, satthi –-ṇika-kappāsikaṃ, vatthaṃ; ṇeyya-eṇeyyaṃ,maṃsaṃ; eṇeyyaṃ, satthi; koseyyaṃ, vatthaṃ–-maya-tiṇamayaṃ; dārumayaṃ, naḷamayaṃ; mattikāmayaṃ–-’aññasminti’. Gunnaṃkarīse’pi mayo; gomayaṃ.
Jatuto 之后,ssaṇ 可。巴利
Jatuto ssaṇvā-.
从属格词干来的(词)有 vikāra 与 avayava 的 ssaṇ 替换;有“jatuto 的 vikāra”即 jātu 的、jātumayaṃ——有“lopo”。在 phalapupphamūla 等中,paccaya 的 lopo 也常(有)于 vikāra 与 avayava 中;piyālassa phalāni——piyālāni;mallikāya pupphāni——pallikā;usīrassa mūlaṃ——usīraṃ——以 taṃ 一词,或那(事物的)名称。巴利
Chaṭṭhiyantā nāmasmājatuto vikāravayavesussaṇvā hoti;’jatuno vikāro’ jātussaṃjātumayaṃ–-‘‘lopo‘‘ti. Bahulaṃ paccayalopo’pi phalapupphamūlesuvikārāvayavesu;’ piyālassa phalāni’ piyālāni;’mallikāya pupphāni’ pallikā;’usīrassa mūlaṃ’usīraṃ–-taṃsaddenavā tadabhidhānaṃ.
于集合中——kaṇṇaṇikā——。巴利
Samūhe kaṇṇaṇikā-.
以第六格结尾的词在表示集合义时,有 kaṇa、ṇa、ṇikā;以种姓后缀结尾的词,kaṇa——rājaññakaṃ;mānussakaṃ——从 ukkhā 等词——okkhakaṃ;oṭṭhakaṃ;orabbhakaṃ;rājakaṃ;rājaputtakaṃ;hatthikaṃ;dhenukaṃ——ṇa——kākaṃ;bhikkhaṃ;ṇika——非有情类——āpūpikaṃ;saṃkulikaṃ。巴利
Chaṭṭhiyantā samūhe kaṇṇaṇikā honti; gottappaccayantā kaṇa-rājaññakaṃ; mānussakaṃ–-ukkhādīhi-okkhakaṃ; oṭṭhakaṃ; orabbhakaṃ; rājakaṃ; rājaputtakaṃ; hatthikaṃ; dhenukaṃ–-ṇa-kākaṃ; bhikkhaṃ; ṇika-acittā-āpūpikaṃ; saṃkulikaṃ.
由 janādi 等词,为 tā-。巴利
Janādīhi tā-.
于 janā 等词、以第六格(属格)结尾者,在集合义中,tā 出现;janatā;gajatā;bandhutā;gāmatā;sahāyatā;nāgaratā——凡以 tā 结尾者,本性为阴性——madanīya 一语,以 anīya 构成,表具格或位格——dhūmāyitatta 一语,以 tta 从名词性词根构成,为 ktānta。巴利
Janādīhi chaṭṭhiyantehi samūhe tā hoti; janatā; gajatā; bandhutā; gāmatā; sahāyatā; nāgaratā–-tāntā sabhāvato itthiliṅgā–-madanīyanti-karaṇe’dhikaraṇe vā anīyenasiddhaṃ –-dhumāyitattanti-ktāntā nāmadhātuto tettana siddhaṃ.
于 hite 之义,〔加〕iyo——巴利
Iyo hite-.
从以第六格结尾的词,在表示利益义时,有 iyo;upādāniyaṃ——此外,于“samānodare sayito”中,sodariyo。巴利
Chaṭṭhiyantā hite iyo hoti; upādāniyaṃ–-aññatrāpi’samānādैre sayito’ sodariyo.
从 cakkhavādi 等词后接 ssa-。巴利
Cakkhavādito sso-.
从第六格词尾的 cakkhu 等词,当接 hita 后缀时,sso 替换;cakkhūssaṃ;āyussaṃ。巴利
Chaṭṭhiyantehi cakkhuādīhi hite ssohoti; cakkhūssaṃ; āyussaṃ.
于彼为善者,加ṇya——巴利
Ṇyo tattha sādhu-.
以第七格结尾的词,在表示“于此善巧”这一意义时,有 ṇyya;sabbho;pārisajjo——sādhū 意为熟练、适宜或有益——另如“rathaṃ vahantī”即 racchā。巴利
Sattamyantā tattha sādhūti asmiṃ atthe ṇyyo hoti; sabbho; pārisajjo–-sādhūti-kusalo yoggo hito vā–-aññatrāpi-’rathaṃ vahantī’ti racchā.
于 Kamma 之后〔有〕niyaññā 后缀——巴利
Kammā niyaññā-.
以第七格结尾的 kamma 等词,在此义中为 niyaññā(堪任);“于行为善巧”为 kammaniyaṃ;kammaññaṃ。巴利
Sattamyantā kammasadadā tattha sādhūti asmiṃ atthe niyaññā honti;’ kamme sādhu’ kammaniyaṃ; kammaññaṃ.
Kathāditviko——巴利
Kathāditviko-.
以 kathā 等词,住于第七格、作“于此处善”之义时,即加 iko 后缀;例如 kathiko(能言者)、dhammakathiko(说法者)、saṅgāmiko(赴集会者)、pavāsiko(旅居者)、upavāsiko(近住者)等。巴利
Kathādīhi sattamyantehi tattha sādhūti asmiṃ atthe iko hoti; kathiko; dhammakathiko; saṅgāmiko; pavāsiko; upavāsiko.
以 patha 等词,加 ṇeyya 后缀。巴利
Pathādīhi ṇeyyo-.
以 patha 等词,住于第七格、作“于彼处善”之义时,即加 ṇeyya 后缀;例如 pātheyyaṃ(路资)、sāpateyyaṃ(己财)。巴利
Pathādīhi sattamyantehi tattha sādhūti asmiṃ atthe ṇeyyo hoti; pātheyyaṃ; sāpateyyaṃ.
于 Dakkhiṇāyārahe〔dakkhiṇā 之 araha 义〕——巴利
Dakkhiṇāyārahe-.
由 dakkhiṇā 一词衍生出后缀 ṇeyya,表“值得受”之义;“值得布施”者,即 dakkhiṇeyyo。巴利
Dakkhiṇāsaddato arahatthe ṇeyyo hoti;’dakkhiṇaṃ arahatī’ti dakkhiṇeyyo.
从 rāya 词干后接 tum 后缀——巴利
Rāyo tumantā-.
从 tum 结尾的词干,在表“值得”之义时,有 rāya;——“ghātetāyaṃ vā ghātetuṃ, jāpetāyaṃ vā jāpetuṃ, pabbājetāyaṃ vā pabbājetuṃ”。巴利
Tumantato arahatthe rāyohoti; ‘‘ghātetāyaṃ vā ghātetuṃ, jāpetāyaṃ vā jāpetuṃ, pabbājetāyaṃ vā pabbājetuṃ‘‘.
于此,其义为“有……者”时,则为 mantu-。巴利
Tametthassatthiti mantu-.
第一种说法:“assa atthiti”释为“存在于此处”;“etesvatthesu mantu hoti”意为“在此类义项中使用-mantu后缀”。例如:“gāmo ettha dese assa vā purisassa santīti” gomā——“村庄在此地,或此人归属此地”。然而,“gomā”并非因为过去或未来的牛而称为“gomā”(依现在时取义,故不以过去、未来之牛而称)。怎能说“gomā是牛,gomā将成为牛”呢?实际上,那时正是依现在之牛而称“gomā”;“是”与“将成为”只是词形的差别,表示时态的不同;由此便可明了语言的规则。巴利
Paṭhamantā ettha assa atthiti etesvatthesu mantu hoti;’gāmo ettha dese assa vā purisassa santīti’ gomā–-atthiti vattamānakālopādānato bhutāhi bhavissantīhi vā gohi na gomā. Kathaṃ gomā āsi gomā bhavissatīti? Tadāpi vattamānāhiyeva gohi gomā; āsi bhavissatīti padantarā kālantaraṃ; itikaraṇato visayaniyamo.
在表示“多”“赞叹”“呵责”“极甚”以及恒常联系的语境中,这些 mantu 等后缀便会出现。巴利
Pahūte ca pasaṃsāyaṃ nindāyañcātisāyane niccayoge ca saṃsagge hontime mantuādayo.
Goassoti——jāti 词等,因不具有表达实体之能力,故 mantu 等后缀不出现;同样,guṇa 词如 seto、paṭo 等亦不出现;凡 guṇa 词不具有表达实体之能力者,则彼等确实出现——budhimā、rūpavā、rasavā、gandhavā、essavā、saddavā;rasīrasiko;rūpi rūpiko;gandhī gandhiko。巴利
Goassoti-jātisaddānaṃ dabbābhidhānasāmatthiyā mantvā dayo nahonti; tathā guṇasaddānaṃ seto paṭoti; ye sattu guṇasaddānaṃ dabbābhidhānasāmatthiyaṃ natthi tehi honteva–-budhimā rūpavā rasavā gandhavā essavā saddavā; rasīrasiko; rūpi rūpiko; gandhī gandhikoti.
vantu,(接于)以 a 音(avaṇṇa)结尾者——巴利
Vantvavaṇṇā-.
从第一格词尾起、以 a 音结尾的词干,在表“具有”之义时,接 vantu;sīlavā;paññavā——为何说“以 a 音结尾”?Satimā;bandhumā。巴利
Paṭhamantato avaṇṇantā mantvatthe vantu hoti; sīlavā; paññavā–-avaṇṇāti-kiṃ? Satimā; bandhumā.
Daṇḍa 等〔词干〕后,ika、ī 可——巴利
Daṇḍāditvikaī vā-.
从daṇḍa等词依规则可构成ikaī词尾形式,亦可(在manttvattha义中);依vidhāna规则多数情况下从某词有二种形式;从某词仅一种。daṇḍako、daṇḍi、daṇḍavā;gandhiko、gandhī、gandhavā;rūpiko、rūpī、rūpavā——于uttami义中,从dhana构成iko()dhaniko;dhanī、dhanavāñño——于asannitñattha义中()atthiko、atthi;除atthavā之外巴利
Daṇḍādīhi ikaī honti vā manttvatthe; bahulaṃ vidhānā kutovi dve honti; kutocekamekaṃva. Daṇḍako, daṇḍi, daṇḍavā; gandhiko, gandhī, gandhavā; rūpiko, rūpī, rūpavā–-uttamiṇeva dhanā iko () dhaniko; dhanī dhanavāñño –-asannitñatthā () atthiko atthi; aññatra atthavā
——以 Tadanta 结尾者亦然;() puññatthiko、puññatthi——以 vaṇṇa 结尾者仅用 ī() brahmavaṇṇī、devavaṇṇī——由 hatthadanta 等词表“生类”() hatthī;dantī;除此之外 hatthavā;dantavā——由 vaṇṇa 表“梵行者”() vaṇṇī、brahmacārī;除此之外 vaṇṇavā——由 pokkhara 等词表“地方”() pokkharaṇī、uppalinī、kumudinī、bhisinī、muḷālinī、sālukinī——在 kvāvādesa 中亦作 padumanī、paduminīpaṇṇaṃ;除此之外 pokkharavā、hatthi——nāvāyiko () nāviko;——sukhadukkhā 用 ī() sukha、dukkhī——(sikha 等词亦可用 vā)() sikhi、sikhāvā、mālī、makālāvā、sīli、sīlavā、balī、balavā——balā 与 bāhūru 之前者亦() bāhubalī;ūrubalī。巴利
–-Tadantā ca;() puññatthiko, puññatthi–-vaṇṇantā īyeva() brahmavaṇṇī devavaṇṇī–-hatthadantehi jātiyaṃ () hatthī; dantī; aññatra hatthavā; dantavā–-vaṇṇato brahmacārimhi; () vaṇṇī, buhmacārī; vaṇṇavāñño–-pokkharādito dese() pokkharaṇī uppalinī kumudinī bhisinī muḷālinī sālukinī –-kvāvādese’pi-padumanī, paduminīpaṇṇaṃ; aññatra pokkharavā, hatthi–-nāvāyiko () nāviko; –-sukhadukkhā ī() sukha dukkhī–-(sikhādihī vā)() sikhi sikhāvā mālī makālāvā sīli sīlavā balī balavā –-balā bāhūrupubbā ca() bāhubalī; ūrubalī.
于 tapa 等词后,加 ssī——巴利
Tapādīhi ssī-.
从 tapā 等词干,在“具有”义上,可加 ssi;tapassi、yasassī、tejassī、manassī、payassī——那么 yasavā 呢?巴利
Tapādito mantvatthe vā ssi hoti; tapassi, yasassī, tejassī, manassī, payassī –-vātveva-yasavā.
从 mukhā 等词之后,〔接〕ro〔后缀〕——巴利
Mukhādito ro-.
从 mukhā 等词之后,ro 具有 mantu 之义;mukharo、susiro、ūsaro、madhuro、kharo、kujaro、nagaro——又,在 danta 中,当 uttata 与 danta()时,danturo。巴利
Mukhādīhi mantvattha ro hैoti; mukharo, susiro ūsaro, madhuro, kharo, kujaro, nagaro –-dantassu ca uttatadante () danturo.
由 tuṇḍi 等词,bho——巴利
Tuṇḍyādīhi bho-.
由 tuṇḍi 等词,在 mantu 之义中,bho 可(vā)成为;tuṇḍibho、sāḷibho、valibho,如 vā 那样——tuṇḍimā。巴利
Tuṇḍiādīhi mantvatthe bho vā hoti; tuṇḍibho, sāḷibho,valibho, vātveva-tuṇḍimā.
从 saddhā 等词之后——巴利
Saddhāditva-.
从saddhā等词干,在“具有”义上,可加a;saddho、pañño;阴性——saddhā;若不然——paññavā。巴利
Saddhādīhi mantvatthe a hoti vā; sanddho, pañño; itthiyaṃ-saddhā; vātveva-paññavā.
由 tapā- 等词后接 ṇa 后缀。巴利
Ṇo tapā-.
Tapā 之后接 ṇo,表示“具有……之义”;tāpaso;阴性中——tāpasī。巴利
Tapā ṇo hoti mantvatthe; tāpaso; itthiyaṃ-tāpasī.
于 abhijjhā 等词之后接 ālu——在 abhijjhā 等词之后 ālu 表示“具有……义”;abhijjhālu、sītālu、dhajālu、dayālu——那么 vā 呢——dayāvā。巴利
Ālvāhijjhādīhi-. Abhijjhādīhi ālu hotimantvatthe; abhijjhālu, sītālu, dhajālu, dayālu–-vātveva-dayāvā.
Picchāditvilo——巴利
Picchāditvilo-.
picchā等(词根)加ila,且与mantu同义;picchilo即picchavā(有粘性者);pheṇilo即pheṇavā(有泡沫者);jaṭilo即jaṭāvā(有结发者)——那么vāvāla(恶风)如何(构成)?因责难(nindā)中ila等(后缀)的省略,依‘paro kvaci’(他处某处)之规则。巴利
Picchādīhi ilo hoti cā mantvatthe; picchilo, picchavā; pheṇilo, pheṇavā; jaṭilo, jaṭāvā;–-kathaṃ vāvāloti? Nindāyamilassādilope ‘‘paro kvacī‘‘ti.
从 Silāditā 起 vo——巴利
Silāditā vo-.
从 sīla 等词之后,可附加 vo,表示“具有……”之义;sīlavo、sīlavā;kesavo、kesavā——aṇṇā niccaṃ;aṇṇavo——gāṇḍi rājīhi saññāyaṃ;gāṇḍivaṃ、dhanu;rājivaṃ、paṅkajaṃ。巴利
Sīlādihi vo hoti vā mैntvatthe; sīlavo, sīlavā; kesavo, kesavā–-aṇṇā niccaṃ;() aṇṇavo–-gāṇḍi rājīhi saññāyaṃ; () gāṇḍivaṃ, dhanu; rājivaṃ, paṅkajaṃ.
以 māyā 与 medhā 替换 vī——巴利
Māyāmedhāhi vī-.
在这二者之后加 vī,表示“具有……之义”;māyāvi、medhāvī。巴利
Etehi dvīhi vī hoti mantvatthe; māyāvi, medhāvī.
于sissara等词,有āmyu与vāmī——巴利
Sissare āmyuvāmī-.
有 sasadda 词尾的 āmyuvāmī 在表示被述说的意义、咒语的意义时为 hontissare;〔依〕“samassatthiti”〔规则〕为 sāmī、suvāmī。巴利
Sasaddā āmyuvāmī hontissare’bhidheye mantvatthe;’samassatthiti’ sāmī, suvāmī.
Lakkhyā 有 ṇo 与 a——巴利
Lakkhyā ṇo a ca-.
于lakkhī一词之后接ṇa,当有“具有……者”之义时;其末尾的a;ṇa即只成为ṇ;lakkhaṇo。巴利
Lakkhīsaddāṇo hota mantvatthe; a cantassa; ṇakāro’va savo; lakkhaṇo.
于kalyāṇe之义中,于Aṅgā之后附加词尾no——巴利
Aṅgā no kalyāṇe-.
在表示“前往 kalyāṇa”之义时,aṅga 之后,按 mantu 的意义,即成为……;aṅganā。巴利
Kalyāṇe gamyamānñaṅgasmānohoti mantvatthe; aṅganā.
“毛”者,表“具有”之义;故成“有毛者”;阴性则为“有毛女”。巴利
Lomā sohoti mantvatthe; lomaso; itthiyaṃ-lomasā.
‘imiyā-’:即以此构成相应的格位变化。巴利
Imiyā-.
于“认为”之义,ima 与 iyā 多如此;puttimo、kittimo、puttiyo、kappiyo、jaṭiyo、hānabhāgiyo、seniyo。巴利
Mantvatthe imaiyā honti bahulaṃ; puttimo, kittimo, puttiyo, kappiyo, jaṭiyo,hānabhāgiyo, seniyo.
以第五格结尾的词常带 to,也可不带;gāmato āgacchati,gāmasmā āgacchati;corato bhāyati,corehi bhāyati;satthato parihīno,satthā parihīno。巴利
Pañcavyantā bahulaṃ to hoti vā; gāmato āgacchati, gāmasmāāgacchati; corato bhāyati, corehi bhāyati; satthatoparihīno, satthā parihīno.
Itotettokuto——。巴利
Itotettokuto-.
于 to 词尾之前,ima 的 ṭi 被构成,eta 的 ṭa eta,kiṃ 词的 kutta 及;ito,从 imasmā;ato,etto,从 etasmā;kuto,从 kasmā。巴利
Tomhi imassa ṭi nipaccate etassa ṭa eta kiṃsaddassa kuttaca; ito, imasmā; ato, etto, etasmā; kuto, kasmā.
由‘abhi’等前缀引导,构成相关的派生形式。巴利
Abhyādīhi-.
以abhi等词起首时,to 成为词尾;abhito、parito、pacchato、heṭṭhato。巴利
Abhiādīhi to hoti; abhito, parito, pacchato, heṭṭhato.
从ādi等词起,to可(vā)成为(词尾);ādo、ādito;majjhato、antato、piṭṭhito、passato、mukhato——yatodakaṃ tadā dittaṃ,yaṃ udakaṃ tad eva ādittanti attho。巴利
Ādippabhutīhi to vā hoti; ādo, ādito; majjhato, antato, piṭṭhito, passato, mukhato–-yatodakaṃ tadā dittaṃ, yaṃ udakaṃ tadevādittanti attho.
在 “sabba” 等词之后,第七格(位格)词尾可替换为 “tratta”,表示处所之义。巴利
Sabbādito sattamyā tratthā-.
从 “sabba” 等词构成第七格(位格)时,词尾可替换为 “tratthā” 等。例如:“sabbatra”、“sabbattha”、“sabbasmiṃ”;“yatra”、“yattha”、“yasmiṃ”。因其使用广泛,不适用于 “tumha”(你们)和 “amha”(我们)等词干。巴利
Sabbādīhi sattamyantehi tratthā vā honti; sabbatra, sabbattha, sabbasmiṃ; yatra, yattha, yasmiṃ–-bahulādhikārā na tumhāmhehi.
于何处——ettha、kutra、atra、kva、iha、idha——。巴利
Katthettha kutrātrakvehidha-.
这些词为不规则变化;kasmiṃ 即 kattha、kutra、kva;etasmiṃ 即 ettha、atra;asmiṃ 即 iha、idha。巴利
Ete saddā nipaccante; kasmiṃ kattha, kutra, kva; etasmiṃ ettha, atra; asmiṃ iha, idha.
Dhi sabbā vā——巴利
Dhi sabbā vā-
从第七格词尾的一切词,dhi 可(替换);sabbadhi;sabbattha。巴利
Sattamyantato sabbasmādhi vā hoti; sabbadhi; sabbattha.
凡第七格词尾的 ya,可替换为 hiṃ;如 yahiṃ、yatra。巴利
Sattamyantā yato hiṃ vā hoti; yahiṃ, yatra.
Tā 之后 haṃ 和——巴利
Tā haṃ ca-.
从第七格词尾之后,可成为 haṃ 与 hiñca;tahaṃ、tahiṃ、tatra。巴利
Sattamyantā tato vā haṃ hoti hiñca; tahaṃ, tahiṃ, tatra.
Kuhiṃkahaṃ——巴利
Kuhiṃkahaṃ-.
从 kiṃ 词的第七格,hiṃ、haṃ 变为词尾,且 ki 变为 ku、ka;kihiṃ、kahaṃ,kathaṃ kuhidvananti 如何?canaṃ 是另一个不变词;kihidvīti——此处如同 vi 词。巴利
Kiṃsaddā sattamyantā hiṃhaṃ nipaccante kissa kukā ca; kihiṃ, kahaṃ, kathaṃ kuhidvananti? Canaṃ iti nipātantaraṃ; kihidvīti-ettha visaddoviya.
从所有“eka”“añña”“yata”等词干,于表示时间时,加“dā”——巴利
Sabbekaññayatehi kāle dā-.
以这些带第七格词尾的词,当表示“于时”之义时,即得“dā”字尾。于一切时,即“常时、随时”(sabbadā);“某一时”(ekadā)、“其余时”(aññadā)、“当某时”(yadā)、“彼时”(tadā)——〔问:〕为何限定为“时”?〔答:〕因为在适用于一切处所的情形中则不如此。巴利
Etehi sattamyantehi cattamānehi kāle dā hoti; sabbasmiṃ kāle sabbadā; ekadā, aññadā, yadā, tadā–-kāleti-kiṃ? Sabbatthadese.
Kadākudāsadādhunedāti——巴利
Kadākudāsadādhunedāti-.
这些词皆为不变化词:其中,“何时”、“何处时”表示彼时之义;“常时”表示一切时之义;“今”、“现在”表示此时之义。巴利
Ete saddā nipaccante; tasmiṃ kāle kadā, kudā; sambasmiṃ kāle sadā; imasmiṃ kāle adhunā, idāni.
今日、明日、他日、今日、此时、何时——巴利
Ajjasajjavaparajjvetarahikarahā-.
这些词都是不变格词。像 ekati 后缀、词形替换、时态差别这类变化,全都要靠不变格词才能得出。对 ima 来说,可以构成 vo、jjo 和 hani:在 asmiṃ ahani 里作 ajja。对 samāna 来说,可以构成 sabhāvo、jju 和 hani:在 samāne ahani 里作 sajju。从 apara 得出 jju,在 aparasmiṃ ahani 里作 aparajju。对 ima 来说,还有 eto 和 kāle rahi:在 imasmiṃ kāle 里作 etarahi。对 kiṃsadda 来说,则是 ko、raha 和 anajjatane:在 tasmiṃ kāle 里作 karaha。巴利
Ete saddā nipaccante; ekatippaccayo ādeso kāla visesoti sabbametaṃ nipātanā labbhati; imassa vo jjo cāhani nipaccate; asmiṃ ahani ajja–-samānassa sabhāvojju cāhani–-samāne abhani sajju–-aparasmā jju–-aparasmiṃ ahaniaparajju–-imassetokāle rahi va–-imasmiṃ kāle etarahi–-kiṃsaddassa ko raha cānajjatane–-tasmiṃ kāle karaha.
于sabba等词后,表方式时,加thā——巴利
Sabbādīhi pakāre thā-.
区别一般性的特殊者即是方式。当表达此义时,从 sabba 等词之后,后缀 thā 发生:sabbena pakārena——sabbathā;yathā,tathā。巴利
Sāmaññassa bhedako viseso pakāro, tattha vattamānehi sabbādīhi thā hoti sabbenapakārena sabbathā; yathā, tathā.
这些词在表示“方式”的意义上通过规则变化而成;对于“kim”与“ima”,其后缀为“thaṃ”,其词根依序分别变为“ka”与“i”;形成“kathaṃ”和“itthaṃ”。巴利
Ete saddā nipaccante pakāre; kimimehi thaṃ paccayo, kैcca tesaṃ yathākkamaṃ; kathamitthaṃ.
于数词后附加 dhā。巴利
Dhā saṅkhyāhi-.
于表示数目的词之后,在“方式”义上,dhā 后缀被使用;“以两种方式,或作两种方式”——vidhā karoti;bahudhā karoti;“将一堆作五种方式”——pañcadhā karoti? “将五种方式作为一种方式”——ekadhā karoti。巴利
Saṅkhyāvācīhi pakāre dhā paro hoti;’dvīhi pakārehi dve vā pakārekaroti’ vidhākaroti; bahudhā karoti;’ekaṃ rāsiṃ pañcappakāraṃ karoti’ pañcadhā karoti?Pañcappakāramekappakāraṃ karoti’ ekadhākaroti.
Vekājjhaṃ——。巴利
Vekājjhaṃ-.
从一种方式,jjhaṃ 为可选;ekajkvaṅkaroti;ekadhā karoti。巴利
Ekasmā pakāre jjhaṃ vā hoti; ekajkvaṅkaroti; ekadhā karoti.
Dvitīh 后有 edhā——。巴利
Dvitīhedhā-.
由 dvi 和 ti 表示方式时,可加 edhā;vedhā、tedhā;dvidhā、tidhā。巴利
Dvītihi pakāre edhāvā hoti; vedhā, tedhā; dvidhā, tidhā.
以 tabbati 表种类——巴利
Tabbati jātiyo-.
表示方式、且具此通称的词,成为种类词;paṭu jātiyo、mudujātiyo。巴利
Pakāravati taṃsāmaññavācakā saddājātiyo hoti; paṭu jātiyo, mudujātiyo.
于表示次数之数词之后〔有〕kkhattuṃ——巴利
Vārasaṃkhyāya kkhattuṃ-
与次数相关的数词后,kkhattuṃ 出现;“他吃两次”,即 dvikkhattuṃ divasassa bhuñjati;为何说“次数”?他吃五次;为何说“数词”?他吃许多次。巴利
Vārasambandhiniyā saṃkhyāya kkhattuṃ hoti;’dve vāre bhuñjati’ dvikkhattuṃ divasassa bhuñjati; vāraggahaṇaṃ kiṃ? Pañaca bhiñjati; saṅkhyāyāti-kiṃ? Pahūte vāre bhuñjati.
表次数的疑问数词 kati 后接 kkhattuṃ;“食几次?”即 katikkhattuṃ bhuñjati。巴利
Vārasambandhiniyā katisaṃkhyāya kkhattuṃ hoti;’kati vāre bhuñjani’katikkhattuṃ bhuñjati.
从 Bahumbhā 加 dhā,且在邻近时。巴利
Bahumbhā dhā ca paccāsattiyaṃ-.
于与 vāra 相关联的多数数词之后,有 dhā 与 kkhattuṃ;并且诸 vāra 之间有紧邻性时,有;bahudhā divasassa buñjati bahukkhattuṃ——paccāsatti 是什么意思?bahukkhattuṃ māsassa bhuñjati。巴利
Vārasambandhiniyā bahusaṃkhyāya dhāhoti kkhattuñca; vārānañce paccāsatti hoti; bahudhā divasassa buñjati bahukkhattuṃ–-paccāsattiyanti kiṃ? Bahukkhattuṃ māsassa bhuñjati.
在“ekaṃ vāraṃ”此义中,sakiṃ 可(vā)被派生;“ekaṃ vāraṃ bhuñjati”——vā 为何?Ekakkhattuṃ bhuñjati。巴利
Ekaṃ vāramiccasmiṃ atthe sakinti vā nipaccate;’ekaṃ vāraṃ bhuñjati’–-vāti kiṃ?Ekakkhattuṃ bhuñjati.
so 于遍取与方式中——巴利
So vicchāppakāresu-.
于逐一分配与方式中,so 常见;于逐一分配——khaṇḍaso、bilaso;于方式——puthuso、sabbaso。巴利
Vīcchāyaṃ pakāre ca so hoti bahulaṃ; vīcchāyaṃ-khaṇḍaso, bilaso; pakāre-puthuso,sabbaso.
于“abhitatabbhāva”中,与 karāsabhu 结合时,vikāra 也有 cī-。巴利
Abhitatabbhāve karāsabhuyoge vikārā cī-.
对于原本处于某种状态、尚未成为他种状态者,若要表示其变为该他种状态,当与 kara、sa、bhū 结合时,则使用表变化的 cī;adhavalaṃ dhavalaṃ karoti——dhavalī karoti;adhavalo dhavalo siyā——dhavalī siyā;adhavalo dhavalo bhavati——dhavalī bhavati——所谓“前非如此而成为如此”是指什么?ghaṭaṃ karoti、dadhi atthi、ghaṭo bhavati——所谓“与 kara、sa、bhū 相连”是指什么?adhavalā dhvaailo jāyate——所谓“表变化”是指什么?pakatiyā mā hotu;suvaṇṇaṃ kuṇḍalī karoti。巴利
Avatthāvato vatthantarenābhutassa tāyāvatthāya bhāve karāsabhuhi sambandhesati vikāravācakācī hoti;’adhavalaṃ dhavalaṃ karoti’ dhavalī karoti; adhavalo dhavalo siyā dhavalī siyā; adhavalo dhavalo bhavati dhavalī bhavati–-abhatatabbhāveti-kiṃ? Ghaṭaṃ karoti, dadhiatthi, ghaṭo bhavati–-karāsabhuyogeti kiṃ? Adhavalā dhvaailo jāyate–-vikārāti-kiṃ? Pakatiyā mā hotu; suvaṇṇaṃ kuṇḍalī karoti.
其他一些后缀也可见到——。巴利
Dissantaññe’pi paccayā-.
除已说之外,其他后缀亦见于已说与未说之义中;vividhā mātaro——vimātaro,tāsaṃ puttā——vemātīkā——rikaṇa;pathaṃ gacchantīti——pathāvino——āvī;issā assa atthiti——issukī——ukī?dhuraṃ vahantīti——dhorayhā——yhaṇa。——巴利
Vuttato’ññe’pi paccayā dissanti vuttāvuttatthesu;’vividhā mātaro’ vimātaro,’tāsaṃ puttā’ vemātīkā-rikaṇa;’pathaṃ gacchantīti’ pathāvino-āvī;’ issā assa atthiti’ issukī-ukī?’Dhuraṃ vahantīti’ dhorayhā-yhaṇa.-
已说者之外,于其他义中,已说之词缀亦可见;magadhānaṃ issaro——māgadho——ṇo;kāsīti sahassaṃ, tamagghatīti kāsiyo——iyo。巴利
Vuttato’ññasmimpi atthe vuttappaccayā dissanti;’magadhānaṃ issaro’ māgadho-ṇo;’kāsīti sahassaṃ, tamagghatīti kāsiyo-iyo.
于自义中亦见后缀;hīnako、potako、kicacayayaṃ。巴利
Sakatthe’pi paccayā dissanti; hīnako, potako, kicacayayaṃ.
亦可见后缀的脱落;buddhe ratanaṃ paṇītaṃ,cakkhuṃ suññaṃ attena vā attaniyeyana vāti——此为状态后缀的脱落。巴利
Paccayānaṃ lopo’pi dissati; buddhe ratanaṃ paṇītaṃ, cakkhuṃ suññaṃ attena vā attaniyeyana vāti bhāvappaccaya lopo.
当有 ṇ 随后附接时,诸元音等中先行的 a 类与 u 类依次替换为 ā——巴利
Sarānamādissāyuvaṇṇassāño ṇānubandhe-.
作为开头的元音a、i、u,于辅音连缀且伴有ṇ后缀时,依次变为ā、e、o;rāghavo、venateyyo、meniko、oḷumpiko、dohaggaṃ——何为“伴有ṇ后缀”?purātano。巴利
Sarānamādibhutā ye akārivaṇṇuvaṇṇā tesaṃ āño honti yathākkamaṃ ṇānubandhe; rāghavo, vैnateyyo, meniko, oḷumpiko, dohaggaṃ–-ṇānubandheti-kiṃ? Purātano.
于结合时,偶有。巴利
Saṃyoge kvaci-.
以 a、u 为开头的元音,在某些情况下,于辅音连缀中伴随 ṇ 后缀时,变为 ā、ñ;decco、koṇḍañño——为何说“某些”?kattikeyyo。巴利
Sarānamādibhutā ye ayuvaṇṇā tesaṃ āño honti kvaci deva saṃyogavisaye ṇānubandhe;decco, koṇḍañño –-kvacīti-kiṃ? Kattikeyyo.
居中的半元音,在某些情况下会变为ā、ñ;例如 aḍḍhateyyā、vāseṭṭho。巴利
Majjhe vattamānānampi ayuvaṇṇānaṃ āño honti kvaci; aḍḍhateyyā, vāseṭṭho.
指舒适安稳、清净雅致的床榻,柔软无风,并带有芳香等优良特征。巴利
Kosjैjājjavapārisajjasubhajjamaddavārissāsabhājañña theyyabāhusaccā-.
这些词以ṇ为后缀构成;“kusīta的状态”是kosajjajaṃ;“ujju的状态”是appavaṃ;“于众中善者”是pārisajjo;“suhadaya即是”suhajjo,“其状态则是”sohajjaṃ;“mudu的状态”是maddavaṃ;“isi的此者,或状态”是ārissaṃ;“usabha的此者,或状态”是āsabhaṃ;“ājānīya的状态”或即其本身为ājaññaṃ;“thena的状态,或行为”是theyyaṃ;“bahussuta的状态”是bāhusaccaṃ——其中,带有双重标志者,依特例而成。巴利
Ete saddā nipaccante ṇānubandhe;’kusītassa bhāvo’ kosajjajaṃ;’ ujuno bhāvo’ appavaṃ;’parisāsu sādhu’ pārisajjo;’suhadayoca’ suhajjo,’tassa pana bhāvo sohajjaṃ;’muduno bhāvo’maddavaṃ;’isino idaṃ, bhāvo vā’ ārissaṃ;’usabhassa idaṃ, bhāvo vā’ āsabhaṃ;’ājānīyassa bhāvo’ so eva vā’ ājaññaṃ;’thenassa bhāvo, kammaṃ vā’ theyyaṃ;’bahussutassa bhāvo’ bāhusaccaṃ–-etesu yamalakkhaṇikaṃ taṃ nipātanā.
于 mana 等词后的 saka-。巴利
Manādīnaṃ saka-.
mana等词在带ṇ后缀时,变为saka;“存在于意中者”是mānasa;“dummanas的状态”是domanassa;somanassa。巴利
Manādīnaṃ saka hoti ṇānubandhe;’manasi bhavaṃ’ mānasaṃ;’dummanaso bhāvo’ domanassaṃ; somanassaṃ.
以‘u’音替换‘va’前的字母。例如:‘rāghava’变为‘rāghavo’,‘jāmbava’变为‘jāmbavaṃ’。巴利
Uvaṇṇassāvaṅi hoti; rāghavo, jāmbavaṃ.
在 ya 后缀前,go 的词干亦发生变化——。巴利
Yamhi gossa ca-.
凡以 yakāra 开头的后缀,于 gossa 及 vaṇṇa 之后,ava 亦发生;gabyaṃ、gātabyo。巴利
Yakārādo paccaya gैossuvaṇṇassa ca avaṅi hoti; gabyaṃ, gātabyo.
avaṇṇa 与 ivaṇṇa 的脱落。巴利
Lopo’vaṇṇivaṇṇānaṃ-.
以 ya 等开头的后缀前,a 类音与 i 类音发生脱落,dāyajjaṃ、kāruññaṃ、ādhipaccaṃ、deppaṃ——由于“多”的规定,有时不发生;kiccayaṃ。巴利
Yakārādo paccaye avaṇṇivaṇṇānaṃ lāpo hoti, dāyjैjaṃ, kāruññaṃ, ādhipaccaṃ, deppaṃ–-bahakulaṃvidhānaṃ kvaci na hoti; kiccayaṃ.
以 r 为 anubandha〔标记字母〕的 rā 词缀,用于以 anta、sara 等结尾的〔词干〕。巴利
Rānubandhe’ntasarādissa-.
凡组成部分以词末元音为始端者,其元音于带有 r 的语尾前发生脱落;kittakaṃ、petteyyaṃ。巴利
Anto saro ādi yassāvayavassa tassa lopo hoti rānubandhe; kittakaṃ, petteyyaṃ.
Kisa 与 mahanta 的这两个词,依次成为 kasmahā——。巴利
Kisamahatamime kasmahā-.
kisa 与 mahant 二词,依次生成以下诸形:kasimā、mahimā。巴利
Kisassa mahato ime kasmahā honti yathākkamaṃ; kasimā, mahimā.
在“mantu”词基中,“āyus”替换为“āyasa”。巴利
Āyussāyasa mantumhi-.
当属格“āyu(寿命)”后接“manta”词缀时,以“āyas”替代之,构成“āyasmā”(具寿)。巴利
Āyussa āyasādeso hoti mantumhi; āyasmā.
于 vuddha 及 iḍha 等词中,jo 发生替换——巴利
Jo vuddhassiyiḍhesu-.
在表示“最胜”的“iya”与“iṭṭha”两词缀前,“vuddha(年长、尊贵)”之词干以“j”替换,构成“jeyyo”(较年长者)、“jeṭṭho”(最年长者)。巴利
Vuddhassa jo hoti iyaiṭṭhesu; jeyyo, jeṭṭho.
Bāḷhantikapasatthānaṃ sādhanedasā——巴利
Bāḷhantikapasatthānaṃ sādhanedasā-.
于 iya 与 iṭṭha 之前,bāḷha、antika、pasattha 依次成为 sādha、neda、sā;sādhiyo、sādhiṭṭho;nediyo、nediṭṭho;seyyo、seṭṭho——巴利
Iyeṭṭhesu bāḷhantikapasatthānaṃ sādhanedasā hontī yathākkamaṃ; sādhiyo, sādhiṭṭho; nediyo, nediṭṭho; seyyo, seṭṭho
Kaṇkanāppayuvānaṃ——。巴利
Kaṇkanāppayuvānaṃ-.
于 iya 与 iṭṭha 后缀之前,appa 与 yuva 依次变为 kaṇa 与 kanā;kaṇiyo、kaṇiṭṭho;kaniyo、kaniṭṭho。巴利
Iyeṭṭhesu appayuvānaṃ kaṇkanā honti yayathākkamaṃ; kaṇiyo, kaṇiṭṭho; kaniyo, kaniṭṭho.
vīmantuvattunaṃ 的脱落——。巴利
Lopo vīmantuvattunaṃ-.
vī、mantu、vantu 的词干在 iya 与 iṭṭha 后缀前发生脱落。“atisayena medhāvī”成为 medhiyo、medhiṭṭho;“atisayena satimā”成为 satiyo、satiṭṭho;“atisayena guṇavā”成为 guṇiyā、guṇiṭṭho。巴利
Vīmantuvantunaṃ lopo hoti iyैṭṭhesu?’Atisayena medhāvī’ medhiyo, medhiṭṭho;’atisayenasatimā’satiyo, satiṭṭho;’atisayena guṇavā’ guṇiyā, guṇiṭṭho.
Se stiaissa tissa——。巴利
Se stiaissa tissa-.
当‘sa’在后时,‘sati’词尾的‘t’音发生省略;vīsaṃ sataṃ、tiṃsaṃ sataṃ。巴利
Se pare satyantassa tikārassa lopo hoti; vīsaṃ sataṃ, tiṃsaṃ sataṃ.
“eta”(此)后接“ttaka”时,变为“eṭa”。巴利
Etasseṭa ttake-.
当“ttaka”在后时,“eta”的末音以“eṭa”替换;例如:ettakaṃ(如此之多)。巴利
Ttake pare etassa eṭa henāti; ettakaṃ.
Ṇikassiyo 或——巴利
Ṇikassiyo vā-.
ṇika 之后可转成 iyo;sakyaputtiyo,sakyaputtiko。巴利
Ṇikassavā iyo hoti; sakyaputtiyo, sakyaputtiko.
若词基不具元音,在“ke”等之前,自首音起,以“ghe”等替代“ssī”。巴利
Adhātussa ke’syādito ghe’ssī-.
当ghe在后时,非词根(adhātu)中k音之前的a多变为i,条件是gh之后不是以syādi为首的音;bālikā、kārikā——adhātu是什么意思?Sakā;ke是什么意思?Nandanā;不是以syādi开头是什么意思?Bahuparibbājakā、madhurā——bahucammikā,因k与syādi被隔开故成立——ghe是什么意思?Bālako;assa是什么意思?Bahukattukā、sālā。巴利
Ghe pare adhātussa yo kakāro tato pubbassa akārassa bakahulaṃ i hoti, save ghona syādito paro hoti; bālikā, kārikā–-adhātussāti-kiṃ? Sakā; keti-kiṃ?Nandanā; asyāditoti-kiṃ? Bahuparibbājakā, madhurā –-bahucammikāti kakārena syādino byavahitattā siddhaṃ–-gheti-kiṃ? Bālako; assāti-kiṃ? Bahukattukā,sālā.
如是,在目犍连的《声明》的用法中,ṇā 等篇章第四。巴利
Iti moggallāne vyākaraṇe vuttiyaṃ ṇādikaṇḍo catuttho.
在 khamā 与 vīmaṃsā 的意义中,于词根 tija 与 māna 之后,加 kha 与 sa 后缀。巴利
Tijamānehi khasā khamāvīmaṃsāsu-.
于忍耐义中,有tijā;于审察义中,有mānā与khasappaccayā,依次成为:titikkhā、vīmaṃsā——titikkhati、vīmaṃsati。Khamāvīmaṃsā与suti——是何?Tejanaṃ、tejo、tejayati、mānanaṃ、māno、māneti。巴利
Khantiyaṃ tijā vīmaṃsāyaṃ mānā ca khasappaccayā honti yathākkamaṃ; titikkhā, vīmaṃsā–-titikkhati, vīmaṃsati. Khamāvīmaṃsā suti-kiṃ? Tejanaṃ, tejo, tejayati, mānanaṃ, māno, māneti.
于kita之后,在疗治与疑惑之义中,jo——巴利
Kitā tikicchāsaṃsayesu jo-.
kitā在表治疗与疑惑时,成为jo——tikicchā、vicikicchā——tikicchati、vicikicchati——aññatraniketo、saṃketo、ketanaṃ、keto、ketayati。巴利
Tikicchāyaṃ saṃsaye ca vattamānā kitā jo hoti–-tikicchā, vicikicchā–-tikicchati, vicikicchati–-aññatraniketo, saṃketo, ketanaṃ, keto, ketayati.
于指责义中,gupabadhā 的 ba 变为 bha,且——巴利
Nindāyaṃ gupabadhā bassabho ca-.
于谴责之义中,由 gupa 与 badha 等〔词根〕变为 jo;并有 bassa、bho 以及 ca——jigucchā、bībhacchā——jigucchati、bībhacchati——aññatragopanaṃ、gope、popeti、badhako。巴利
Nindāyaṃ vattamānehi gupabadhehi jo hoti; bassa bho ca–-jigucchā, bībhacchā–-jigucchati, bībhacchati–-aññatragopanaṃ, gope, popeti, badhako.
于vicchā中,tuṃ脱落,而代之以te——巴利
Tuṃsmā lopo vicchāyaṃte-.
从以 tum 结尾的词形之后,于欲望之义中,多有 te、kha、sa、chā 出现;且因 sutatta,tum 词缀发生脱落——bubhukkhā、jigiṃsā、jighacchā——bubhukkhati、jigiṃsati、jighacchati——此处为何不作 bhottum icchati?因以别词表述。所谓 tuṃsmā,是何?Bhojanam icchati。所谓 icchāyaṃ,是何?Bhuñjituṃ gacchati。如何是 kulaṃ pipati satīti?如 kulaṃ patitum icchatīti 成为句子,如是所说不成;那么唯句子如何成?依世间如是说之欲。巴利
Tumantato icchāyamatthe te khasachā hontibahakulaṃ; lopo ca tuṃpaccayassahoti sutattā–-bubhukkhā, jigiṃsā, jighacchā–-bubhukkhati, jigiṃsati, jighacchati–-idhakasmā na hotibhottumicchatīti? Padantarenābhidhānā. Tuṃsmāti-kiṃ? Bhojanamicchati. Icchāyanti kiṃ? Bhuñjituṃ gacchati. Kathaṃ kulaṃ pipatisatīti? Yathā kulaṃ patitumicchatītivākyaṃ hoti, evaṃ vuttipi hessati; vākyamevacarahi kathaṃ hoti? Lokassa tathā vacanicchāya.
依欲业,于欲之义,有īya后缀;‘puttamicchati’为puttīyati——问:业是何?答:Aasinecchati;此处为何不成为rañño puttamicchati?因有所待;非能于顾念他者而与他者共同成就一义;此处亦当无attanoputtamicchati;此处实不应有;无有attanoputtiyati;如何而得知所说之attatiyatā?由闻他者,且欲以彼为所缘。巴利
Icchākammato icchāyamatthe īyappaccayo hoti;’puttamicchati’ puttīyati–-kammāti-kiṃ? Aasinecchati; idha kasmā na hoti rañño puttamicchatīti? Sāpekkhattā; na hi aññamapekkhamāno aññenasahekatthibhāvamanubhavituṃ sakkoti; idhāpi carahi na siyā attanoputtamicchatīti; nevettha bhavitabbaṃ; na hi bhavati attanoputtiyatīti; kathaṃ carahi vuttassa attatiyatāvagamyate? Aññassāsutattā, icchāya ca tabbisayattā.
从作业的譬喻,于行为义中成为īyo词尾;“他像对待儿子那样对待”puttīyati māṇavakaṃ;“从譬喻”是何义?即puttamācarati。巴利
Kammato upamānā āvāratthe īyo hoti;’puttamavā carati’ puttīyati māṇavakaṃ; upamānāti kiṃ? Puttamācarati.
而从所依与譬喻、于行义中,īyo 是;‘kuṭiyamivācarati’——kuṭiyati pāsāde,pāsādīyati kuṭiyaṃ。巴利
Ādhāratupamānāāvāratthe īyo hoti;’kuṭiyamivācarati’ kuṭiyati pāsāde, pāsādīyati kuṭiyaṃ.
Kattutāyo——。巴利
Kattutāyo-.
有“如作者”义的词在表示行为之义时,词尾是 āyo;“pabbatovā carati”即“pabbatāyati”。巴利
Kattatupamānā ācāratthe āyo hoti;’pabbatovā carati’pabbatāyati.
就作者而言,当非实有显现为有时,大多成为 āyo;bhusāyati、paṭapaṭāyati、lohitāyati——只就作者——bhusaṃ karoti;此处为何不成为 bhusi bhavati?因为其义已如上所说。巴利
Kattuto abhutatabbhāve āyo hoti bahulaṃ; bhusāyati, paṭapaṭāyati, lohitāyati–-kattutotveva-bhusaṃkarotīti; iha kasmā na hoti bhusi bhavatīti? Vuttatthatāya.
以“sadda”等词为词干而作——巴利
Saddādīti karoti-.
由 sadda 等词、带第二格词尾,在“作”这一意义中,有 āya 词尾;saddāyati、verāyati、kalahāyati、dhūpāyati。巴利
Saddādīhi dutiyantehi karotīti asmiṃ atthe āyo hoti; saddāyati, verāyati, kalahāyati, dhūpāyati.
而 namo 则 asso——。巴利
Namotvasso-.
在“作”这个意义中,Namo 之后成为 asso;namassati tathāgataṃ。巴利
Namo iccasmā karotīti asmiṃ atthe asso hoti; namassati tathāgataṃ.
于词根义中,名词〔有〕——巴利
Dhātvatthe nāmasmi-.
‘名’于界等义中多有所作:如‘以象越过’即‘象化(hatthayati)’;‘以琴伴唱’即‘琴化(upavīṇayati)’;‘使坚固’即‘律令坚固(vinayaṃ daḷahayati)’;‘成为清净’即‘夜清净(ratti visuddhayati)’;‘询问善’即‘善化(kusalayati)’。巴利
Nāmasmā dhātvatthe bahulami hoti;’hatthinā atikkamati’ati hatthayati;’ vīṇāya upagāyati’ upavīṇayati;’daḷahaṃ karoti’ vinayaṃ daḷahayati;’ visuddhā hoti’ ratti visuddhayati;’kusalaṃ pucchati’kusalayati.
从“真实”等词亦然。巴利
Saccādīhāpi-.
由 sacca 等词根表达词根义时,亦可接 āpi;saccāpeti、atthāpeti、vedāpeti、sukkhāpeti、sukhāpeti、dukkhāpeti。巴利
Saccādīhi dhātvatthe āpi hoti; saccāpeti, atthāpeti, vedāpeti, sukkhāpeti sukhāpeti, dukkhāpeti.
Kriyatthā〔具行为义者〕——。巴利
Kriyatthā-.
此总说,直至章末;“凡以动作为义者,彼为动作义”,即词根。巴利
Ayamadhikāro ā satthaparisamattiyā;’kriyā attho yassaso kriyattho’,dhātu.
从 cur 等词根之后接 ṇi-。巴利
Curādito ṇi-.
从cur等表示动作的词根,在表示其自身意义时,ṇi后缀常随后出现;ṇ音有增长之义——在其他情况中也是如此——如corayati(偷盗)、lāḷayati(爱抚)。那么,rajjaṃ kāreti(治理国家)该如何说呢?这是依Yogavibhāga(瑜伽分别)而言的。巴利
Curādīhi kriyatthehi sakatthe ṇi paro hoti bahulaṃ; ṇakāro vuddhyattho–-evamaññatrāpi–-corayati, lāḷayati. Kathaṃ rajjaṃ kāretīti? Yogavibhāgato.
在使役者的作用中,也使用 ṇā 与 ca——巴利
Payojakabyāpāre ṇāpi ca-.
凡促使作者行动者,在其作用中,表示动作的动词词根大多带有 ṇi、ṇā、āpi;kāreti、kārāpeti——问:作者本身也是诸作具等的促使者,那么在其作用中,是否也应得到 ṇi、ṇā、āpi 呢?由于“促使者”这一措辞的限定力,以及从 curādi 等词根另立规则的限定力,这些后缀在此处不会适用——因此,更常见的是仅用 ṇāpi;而 ṇi 仅是 u 元音的音变,二者与其他有所不同。巴利
Kattāraṃ yo payojayati tassa byāpāre kriyatthā ṇiṇāpī honti bahulaṃ; kāreti, kārāpeti–-nanu ca kattāpi karaṇādīnaṃpayojakoti tabyāpāre?Pi ṇiṇāpī pāpuṇanti? Payojakaggahaṇasāmatthiyā na bhavissanti, curādīhi visuṃ vacanasāmatthiyā ca–-āto bhiyyo ṇāpiyeva, ṇiye vuvaṇṇato, dvayamevaññehi.
于bhāva与kamma中、aparokkha中、mānanta等中,有kya——巴利
Kyo bhāvakammesvaparokkhesu mānantatyādisu-
于bhāvakamma所定、除parokkhā、mānanta等之后者,kya为krayattha——nt的取受是为下文;ka为avuddhi义;如是于下文亦尔——ṭhiyamānaṃ, ṭhiyate; sūyamānaṃ, sūyate——aparokkhesu是何义?Babhuva devadattena; bibhida kusūlo. Bhijjate kusūlo sayamevātibhijjateti由听闻而得知kamma性,sayameva由听闻而得知kattu性;于kattu性之欲说中,bhindati kusūlo attānanti成为bhāva;如是其他亦应随文而推求。“Aparokkhesu mānantatyādisu”此乃总摄,于“tanāditvo”“api va ete tyādayo tyādisu parabhutesu kattukammabhāvavihitesu”中,由kyādi之制定,彼等即于彼等中得知,故由无kamma之根,于kattu bhāva中;由有kamma之根,于kattukamma中,于kammāvacana之欲说中,于bhāva中而成为——应知:凡其根之动作期待kamma者,彼为sakammaka;凡其动作仅期待kattu者,彼应知为akammaka。巴利
Bhāvakammavihitesu parokkhāvajjitesu mānantatyādisu paresukyo hoti krayatthā–-ntaggahaṇamuttaratthaṃ; kakāro avuddhyattho; evamuttaratrāpi–-ṭhiyamānaṃ, ṭhiyate; sūyamānaṃ, sūyate–-aparokkhesūti-kiṃ? Babhuva devadattena; bibhida kusūlo. Bhijjate kusūlo sayamevātibhijjateti savanā kammatāvagamyate, sayamevāti savanato kattutā; kattutāvacanicchāyantu-bhindatikusulo attānanti bhavati; evamaññampi yathāgamamanugantabbaṃ. ‘‘Aparokkhesu mānantatyādisū’ti-ayamadhikāro ā‘‘tanāditvo‘‘apivaete tyādayo tyādisu parabhutesu kattukammabhāvavihitesu kyalādīnaṃ vidhānato tesveva viññayantīti-akammakehi dhātuhi kattubhāvesu sakammakehi kattukammesukammāvacanicchāyaṃ bhāveva bhavantīti veditabbā–-yassapanadhātussa kriyā kammamapekkhate sosakammako? Yassa tu kriyā kattumattamapekkhate so akammakoti ñātabbaṃ.
于主动者,用“lo”(语基替换)。巴利
Kattari lo-.
表示主动者时,用“lo”(语基替换)。巴利
Kattari lo-.
就行为义而言,在现量等情形中,对于主动者、分词等,使用“lo”;“lakāra”一词(即字母la)依“ñilassa”之规则。其特殊含义:例如pacamāno(烹煮)、pacanto(烧煮),即表示进行。巴利
Kriyatthato aparokkhesu kattuvitamānantatyādisu lo hoti; lakāro ‘‘ñilasse’ti. Visesanattho–-pacamāno, pacanto; pavati.
又,“mañ”以及“rudh”等的——巴利
Mañca rudhādīnaṃ-.
从 rudh 等(词根)在行为者所构成的 māna 等(词缀)中,有 lo;maṃ 或是在元音之后;m 是附缀;a 是为发音——rundhamāno、rundhanto、rundhati。巴利
Rudhādito kattuvihitamānādisu lo hoti; maṃ vānta sarā paro; makāro’nubandho; akāro uccāraṇatvo–-rundhamāno, rundhanto, rundhati.
ṇa、ṇā、pya、āpi 之后,可(vā)——巴利
Ṇaṇāpyāpīhi vā-.
从“ṇi、ṇāpya、āphi”等使役后缀构成、表施动者的现在分词(mānā等)中,可选择性地出现“lo”(即词尾“anta”形);例如:corayanto / corento;kārayantā / kārento;kārāpayanto / kārāpento;saccāpayanto / saccāpento;同理,在动词变化中亦然:corayati / coreti;kārayati / kāreti;kārāpayati / kārāpeti;saccāpayati / saccāpeti。此处的“或(vā)”字,兼表依语境而定的选择义;因此,若表“仅作义(māna)”时,则恒用“anta”形:corayamāno、kārayamāno、巴利
Ṇiṇāpyāphīhi kattuvihitamānādisu lo hoti vibhāsā; corayanto, corento; kārayantā, kārento; kārāpैyanto, kārāpento; saccāpayanto, saccāpento; corayati, coreti; kārayati, kāreti; kārāpayati, kārāpeti; saccāpayati, saccāpeti–-vacatthitavibhāsattho’yaṃ vā saddo; tena māne niccaṃ; corayamāno, kārayamāno, kārāpayamāno, saccāpayamāno.
由dipada等词后接ya、yaka〔后缀〕——巴利
Dipādīhi yayaka-.
属于“div”等动词组(第四类动词),在表达“lav(收割)”等类似意义时,插入词缀“ya”;例如:dibbanto(正在游戏,现在分词);dibbati(游戏,现在时)。巴利
Divādīhi lavīsaye yaka hoti; dibbanto; dibbati.
属于“tud”等词根(第六类动词)时,添加词缀“k”。巴利
Tudādīhi ko-.
在“tud”等词根中,若处于“la”的语境,则附加“k”词缀;tudamāno、tudanto;kudati。巴利
Tudādīhi lavīsaye ko hoti; tudamāno, tudanto; kudati.
由 jyā 等之后接 knā——巴利
Jyādīhi knā-.
“ji”等词根,在“la”语境下,附加“knā”词缀;由此得:jinanto、jināti——那么 jayanto、jayatī 呢?依“bhū”等词根之读法。巴利
Jiādīhi lavisaye knā hoti; jinanto, jināti–-kathaṃ jayanto, jayatīni? Bhuvādipāṭhā.
在kyā等〔词根〕之后,接〔后缀〕kṇa。巴利
Kyādīhī kṇā-.
Kī 等词根,在 la 语境下,kṇā 词缀发生;kiṇanto、kiṇāti。巴利
Kīādīhi lavisaye kṇā hoti; kiṇanto, kiṇāti.
由 svā 等(词根)之后,kṇo(后缀)。巴利
Svādīhī kṇo-.
于 su 等词根之后,在动词语基的范围内有 kṇo;suṇamāno、suṇanto、suṇoti;为何是 suṇāti?当依 kyādi 品读。巴利
Suādīhi lavisaye kṇo hoti; suṇamāno, suṇanto, suṇoti; kathaṃ suṇātīti? Kyādipāṭhā.
由 tanādi 后缀——巴利
Tanāditvo-.
于 tan 等之后、在词干元音处为 o;tanoti。巴利
Tanādito lavisaye o hoti; tanoti.
于被动语态中,有 tabba、anīya——巴利
Bhāvakammesu tabbānīyā-.
于bhāvakamma(被动/非被动)中,tabba与anīya后缀之后,kriyattha(动词义)多bahula(常用)出现;kattabbaṃ、karaṇīyaṃ;kattabbo kaṭo;karaṇīyo——bahulā巴利
Tabbaanīyā kriyatthā pare bhāvakammesu bahulambhavanti; kattabbaṃ, karaṇīyaṃ; kattabbo kaṭo; karaṇīyo–-bahulā
dhikāra 后缀亦用于 karaṇa 等词——sinānīyaṃ、cuṇṇaṃ;dānīyo、brāhmaṇo;samāvattanīyo、guru;pavacanīyo、upajjhāyo;upaṭṭhānīyo、sisso。巴利
Dhikārā karaṇādisupi bhavanti–-sinānīyaṃ, cuṇṇaṃ; dānīyo, brāhmaṇo; samāvattanīyo, guru; pavacanīyo, upajjhāyo; upaṭṭhānīyo, sisso.
于 bhāva 与 kamma 中,在表动作义的词根之后,通常有 ghyaṇa;vākyaṃ, kāriyaṃ, veyyaṃ, jeyyaṃ。巴利
Bhāvakammesu kriyatthā paro ghyaṇa hoti bahulaṃ; vākyaṃ, kāriyaṃ, veyyaṃ, jeyyaṃ.
于 ā 之后,在被动义与业处中加 ghyaṇa,且在 ā 之后亦加 e;deyyaṃ。巴利
Āto ghyaṇa hoti bhāvakammesu āssa e ca; deyyaṃ.
由 vadā 等词根,后缀 ya。巴利
Vadādīhi yo-.
于 vad 等表动作义的词根之后,在 bhāva 与 kamma 中常为 ya;vajjaṃ、majjaṃ、gammaṃ——在 bhuj 等词根之后,bhojjo、odano;bhojjā、yāgu;bhoggamaññaṃ。巴利
Vadādīhi kriyatthehi yo hoti bahulamhāvakammesu; vajjaṃ, majjaṃ, gammaṃ–-bhujānte () bhojjo, odano; bhojjā, yāgu; bhoggamaññaṃ.
此类事物,即指事物之所在、具备、状况、深陷、烧灼等。巴利
Kiccaghaccabhaccabhabbaleyyā-.
这些词以 ya 等为后缀时,便形成如此形式。巴利
Ete saddā yappaccayantā nipaccante.
从 guh 等(词根)后接 yaka——巴利
Guhādīhi yaka-.
由 guha 等有动作义的词,于 bhāva 与 kamma 中,yaka 后缀发生;guyhaṃ、duyhaṃ、sisso;这些 tabbādi 后缀在表示派遣使者等时,依一般规则即已成立——由 hoti 所行之业,当可作、当应作、当可造、当可办——如是,由汝所作,当可作;由 hoti 所作,当可作,因为由 hoti 确实已到作之时——如是,于 uddhamuhuttika 中,依 vattamāna 之义,在派遣等中亦已成立——如是,于 araha 作者、具足能力者及被了知时,具足 āvassaka 与 adhamiṇa 之义者,由 bhāva 等亦已成立——从 uddha muhuttika 而言——由 bhotā 所作,当可作;由 bhotā 王权当可作,bhavaṃ 是 araha;由 bhotā 负担当可承担,bhavaṃ 是 satto;由 bhotā 决定所作,当可作;由 bhotā 债务当可给与。巴利
Guhādīhi kriyatthehi bhāvakammesu yaka hoti; guyhaṃ, duyhaṃ, sisso; siddhā evete tabbādayo pesātisaggapattakālesupi gamyamānesu sāmaññena vidhānato–-hotā khalu kaṭo kattabbo, karaṇīyo, kāriyo, kicco-evaṃ tvayā kaṭo kattabbo; hotā kaṭo kattabbo, hoto hi patto kālo kaṭakaraṇe–-evaṃ uddhamuhuttike’pi vattamānato pesādisu siddhā eva–-tathā arahe kattari sattivisiṭṭhe ca patīyamāne āvassakādhamiṇatāvisiṭṭheva bhāvādo siddhā–-uddha muhuttikato-bhotā kaṭo kattabbo; bhotā rajjaṃ kātabbaṃ, bhavaṃ araho; bhotā bhāro vahitabbo, bhavaṃ satto; bhotā avassaṃ kaṭo kattabbo; bhotā nikkho dātabbo.
于施事者(kattari)中,latu、ṇa、ka——巴利
Kattari latuṇakā-.
于作者格,动作义者成为 latuṇakā;paṭhitā、pāṭhako——bahulamitveva-pādehi harīyatī’ti pādahārake;“galecuppatī”ti galecopako——saddho eva latuarahe sīlasādhu dhammesu ca sāmaññavihitatattā;bhavaṃ balu kaññāya pariggayitā,bhavametaṃ arahati;sīlādisu-khalvapi up巴利
Kattari kārake kriyatthā latuṇakā bhontī; paṭhitā, pāṭhako–-bahulamitveva-pādehi harīyatī’ti pādahārake;’galecuppatī’ti galecopako–-saddho eva latuarahe sīlasādhu dhammesu ca sāmaññavihitatattā; bhavaṃ balu kaññāya pariggayitā, bhavametaṃ arahati; sīlādisu-khalvapi upādātā kumārake; gantākhelo; muṇḍayitāro sāviṭṭhāyanā vadhuṃ kataparigahaṃ.
于动词义中,āvī 多为行为者;bhayadassāvī——为表达非此境界之义,故作别体释;以通例故,亦适用于 sīla 等。巴利
Kriyayatthā āvī hoti bahulaṃ kattari; bhayadassāvī–-appavīsayatāñāpanatthaṃ bhinnayogakaraṇaṃ; sāmaññavihitattā sīlādisu ca hoteva.
于期望义中,当(动词)被使用时,即在行为者(kattar)上,从动词义(kriyattha)加 aka(后缀)——“jīvatuti” jīvako;“nandatuti” nandako;“bhavatuti” bhavako。巴利
Āsiṃsāyamako-. Āsiṃsāyaṃ gamyamānāyaṃ kriyatthā ako hoti kattari;’jīvatuti’ jīvako; nandatuti’ nandako;’bhavatuti’ bhavako.
从 karā 转为 ṇano——巴利
Karā ṇano-.
于 Karato 之后,表主动者〔kattari〕时,加 ṇano 后缀;“karotī”ti 故为 kāraṇaṃ;kattarīti 者何?即 karaṇaṃ。巴利
Karato kattari ṇano hoti;’karotī’ti kāraṇaṃ; kattarīti-kiṃ? Karaṇaṃ.
vīhi 等义时,从 hā——巴利
Hāto vīhikālesu-.
于 vīhi 时节,在 hā 之后,为表行为者,加 ṇa;hāyanā 名为稻谷;hāyano 为年;所谓“于稻谷时节”——何者?hātā。巴利
Hāto vīhisiṃ kāle caṇano hotī kattari; hāyanā nāma vīhayo; hāyano saṃvaccharo; vīhikālesūti - kiṃ? Hātā.
Vīdā〔之后〕ku——。巴利
Vīdā ku -.
从 vid 后接 kū,构成行为者名词;vidū、lokavidū。巴利
Vidasmā kū hoti kattari; vidū, lokavidū.
由词根“vid”成“ñāto”——巴利
Vito ñāto-.
在带 vi 前缀的 ñā 后,ku 构成行为者名词;viñña;所谓 vitoti-kiṃ?Pañño。巴利
Vipubbā ñāiccasmā ku hoti kattari; viñña; vitoti-kiṃ? Pañño.
在 Kammato、ñāiccasmā 之后,kū 于行为者中出现;例如 sabbañña、kālañña。巴利
Kammato parā ñāiccasmā kū hoti kattari; sabbañña, kālañña.
从 kamma 之后的表动作意义的词,有时在行为者义中成为 aṇa;kumbhakāro、saralāvo、mavtajjhāyo——bahakulādhikārā 在此不成立,ādiccaṃ passati、himavantaṃ suṇoti、gāmaṃ gacchati。为何说“有时”?kammakaro。巴利
Kammato parā kriyatthā kvaci aṇa hoti kattari; kumbhakāro, saralāvo, mavtajjhāyo–-bahakulādhikārā iha na hoti, ādiccaṃ passati, himavantaṃ suṇoti, gāmaṃ gacchati. Kvacīti kiṃ? Kammakaro.
从 gamā 起是 rū-。巴利
Gamā rū-.
从kamma之后,gamā变为rū,用于主动语态;vedagu,pāragu。巴利
Kammato paraṃ gamā rū hoti kattari; vedagu, pāragu.
在 samāna、añña、bhavanta、yā 等以及 upamāna、disā 之后的业格中,变为 rī、rikkha、kā——巴利
Samānaññabhavantayāditupamānā disā kamme rīrikkhakā-.
以 samāna 等词尾与 yādi 等词尾作譬喻,其后的 disā 在业与作者中成为 rīrikkhaka;‘samāno viya dissati’,故有 sadī、sadikkho、sadiso;aññādī、aññādikkho、aññādiso;bhavādī、bhavādikkho、bhavādiso;yādī、yādikkho、yādiso;tyādī、tyyādikkho、tyādiso——所谓“以 samāna 等词尾”是何义?如树显现。所谓“譬喻”是何义?他显现。所谓“业”是何义?他如同看见——ra 字母是为省略末尾的 sara 等,ka 字母是为表示 ekāra 的缺失。巴利
Samānādīhi yādīhicopamānehi parā disā kammakārake rīrikkhakā honti;’ samāno viya dissatī’ti sadī, sadikkho, sadiso; aññādī, aññādikkho, aññādiso; bhavādī, bhavādikkho, bhavādiso; yādī, yādikkho, yādiso; tyādī, tyyādikkho, tyādiso –-samānādīhīti kiṃ? Rukkho viya dissati. Upamānāti kiṃ? So dissati kammeti kiṃ? So viya passatī–-rakārā antasarādilopatthā. Kakāro ekārābhāvattho.
于 bhāva 与 kāraka〔义〕中,〔后缀〕aghaṇghakā——巴利
Bhāvakārakesvaghaṇghakā-.
于状态与作者中,kriyatthā 的 aghaṇghakā 多为 bahakulaṃ;apaggaho、niggaho、karo、garo、cayo、jayo、ravo、bhavo、paco、vaco、annado、purindado、īsakkaro、dukkaro、sukaro——ghaṇa 于状态中——pāko、vāgo、bhāvo。于作者中,若为名称,则如“pajjate anena”故为 pādo;“rujati”故为 rogo;“vīsati”故为 veso;“sarati kālantaraṃ”故为 sāro、thirattho;“darīyante etebhi”故为 dārā;“jīrayati etena”故为 jāro——若非名称,则 dāyo、datto;lābho、laddho——gha——vako、nipako——ka——piyo、khipo、bhujo、āyudhaṃ。巴利
Bhāve kārake ca kriyatthā aghaṇghakā honti bahakulaṃ; apaggaho, niggaho, karo, garo, cayo, jayo, ravo, bhavo, paco, vaco, annado, purindado, īsakkaro, dukkaro, sukaro–-ghaṇa-bhāve-pāko- vāgo, bhāvo. Kārake’pi saññāyaṃ tāva-’pajjate’nene’ti pādo;’rujatī’ti rogo;’vīsatīti veso;’sarati kālantara’nti sāro, thirattho;’darīyante etebhī’ti dārā;’jīrayati etenā’ti jāro–-asaññāyampi-dāyo, datto; lābho, laddho–-gha-vakonipako–-ka-piyo, khipo, bhujo, āyudhaṃ.
于 dā、dhā 词根,在多数情况下,当后缀是 hoti 义(即动词性后缀)与 bhāva-kāraka(存在、状态、作者)时,有 dādhāhi(即 dā、dhā 变为 dādhā);例如 ādi、nidhi、vāladhi。巴利
Dādhāhi bahulami hotibhāvakārakesu; ādi, nidhi. Vāladhi.
从 vam 等词根之后,〔后缀〕thu-。巴利
Vamādīhathu-.
于 bhāva 与 kāraka 中,vam 等之后为 athu;vamathu、vepathu。巴利
Vamādihi bhāvakārakesvathu hoti; vamathu, vepathu.
表示动作意义的 kvi 词尾,广泛出现在表状态与作者的词中——ka 字母是作为 k 附加标记而起作用——abhibhu、sayambhu、bhattaggaṃ、salākaggaṃ、sabhā、pabhā。巴利
Kriyatthā kvi hoti bahulaṃ bhāvakārakesu–-kakāro kānu bandhakāriyattho–-abhibhu, sayambhu, bhattaggaṃ, salākaggaṃ, sabhā, pabhā.
表示动作意义的 ana 词尾,出现在表状态与作者的词中;gamanaṃ、dānaṃ、sampadānaṃ、apādānaṃ、adhikaraṇaṃ、calano、jalano、kodhano、kopano、maṇḍano、bhusano。巴利
Kriyatthā bhāvakārakesvano hoti; gamanaṃ, dānaṃ, sampadānaṃ, apādānaṃ, adhikaraṇaṃ, calano, jalano, kodhano, kopano, maṇḍano, bhusano.
于阴性中 aṇaktikayakyā——及——巴利
Itthiyamaṇaktikayakyā . ca-.
于阴性、状态及作格中,表动作义的a等词尾出现,no亦多——a-titikkhā。Vīmaṃsā、jigucchā、pipāsā、puttīyā、īhā、bhikkhā、āpadā、medhā、godhā——ṇa-kārā、hārā、tārā、dhārā、ārā——kti-iṭṭhi、siṭṭhi、bhitti、bhatti、tanti、bhuti——ka-uhā、rujā、mudā——yaka-vijjā、ijjā——ya-seyyā、samajjā、pabbajjā、paricariyā、jāgariyā——ana-kāraṇā、hāraṇā、vedanā、vandanā、upāsanā。巴利
Itthiliṅge bhāve kārake ca kriyatthā aādayo honta no ca bahulaṃ–-a-titikkhā. Vīmaṃsā, jigucchā, pipāsā, puttīyā, īhā, bhikkhā, āpadā, medhā, godhā–-ṇa-kārā, hārā, tārā, dhārā, ārā–-kti-iṭṭhi, siṭṭhi, bhitti, bhatti, tanti, bhuti –-ka- uhā, rujā, mudā,–-yaka-vijjā, ijjā–-ya-seyyā, samajjā, pabbajjā, paricariyā, jāgariyā–-ana-kāraṇā, hāraṇā, vedanā, vandanā, upāsanā.
以 jāhā 等结尾时,ni 用于阴性;jāni、hāni。巴利
Jāhā iccetehi ni hotitthiyaṃ; jāni, hāni.
kara 之后为后缀 ririyo。巴利
Karā ririyo-.
在 Karato 之后,ririyo 成为阴性;‘karaṇaṃ’ kiriyā——kathaṃ ‘kriyā’ ti?依‘Kriyāyaṃ’这一特例。巴利
Karato ririyo hotitthiyaṃ;’karaṇaṃ’ kiriyā–-kathaṃ kriyāti?’Kriyāya’nti nipātanā.
Ikitī 于自性——巴利
Ikitī sarūpe-.
动作意义的词根,当表示自身形态这一所表义时,其后则出现 ikitī 词缀;vaci、yudhi。Pacati。——在 akāro kakāro 等例中,与 kāra 一词构成复合词,正如 evakāro。巴利
Kriyatthassa sarūpe’bhidheye kriyatthā pare ikitī honti; vaci, yudhi. Pacati.–-Akāro kakārotiādisu kārasaddena samāso, yathā evakāroti.
在〔表〕戒行、乞食、瓦萨等〔义〕之词中,用“尼”〔词缀〕。巴利
Sīlābhikkhaññāvassakesu ṇi-.
有动作意义时,在表示戒行等习惯性意义的情况下,ṇī 后缀出现;uṇhabhoji、khīrapāyī、avassakārī、satatdāyī。巴利
Kriyatthā ṇī hoti sīlādisu patīyamānesu; uṇhabhoji, khīrapāyī, avassakārī, satatdāyī.
例:thāvara——ittara——bhaṅgura——abhidura——bhāsura——bhassara——巴利
Thāvarittarabhaṅgurabhidurabhāsurabhassarā-.
这些词是在表示习惯性行为之义时构成的。巴利
Ete saddā nipaccante sīle gamyamāne.
于作者、于过去时,ktavantuktāvī——。巴利
Kattari bhute ktavantuktāvī-.
于已发生义中,从现在时(的动词)依作者(主动)义,有 ktavantu 与 ktāvī(后缀);vijitavā、vijitāvī;已发生(一语)是限定范围,直至 āhāra 义为止。巴利
Bhutatthe vattamānato kriyatthā ktavantuktāvī hontī kattari; vijitavā, vijitāvī; bhuteti adhikāro yāva āhāratthāti.
Kto 用于 bhāva 与 kamma 中。巴利
Kto bhāvakammesu-.
于状态、业与过去时中,有 kto;āsitaṃ bhavatā;kato kaṭo bhavatā。巴利
Bhāve kamme ca bhute kto hoti; āsitaṃ bhavatā; kato kaṭo bhavatā.
于作者及开始中——巴利
Kattarī cāramhe-.
于动作开始时,若表作者,则用词尾 kto,并随其所应而适用;pakato bhavaṃ kaṭaṃ;pakato kaṭo bhavatā;pasutto bhavaṃ;pasuttaṃ bhavatā。巴利
Kriyārambhe kattari kto hota, yathāpattañca; pakato bhavaṃ kaṭaṃ; pakato kaṭo bhavatā; pasutto bhavaṃ; pasuttaṃ bhavatā.
以ṭhā、sava、sasa、sili、saghi、ruha、jara、jana 及 janī 结尾的——巴利
Ṭhāsavasasilisaghiruhajarajanīhi-.
在主动语态中,kto(过去分词后缀)用于ṭhā等(词根),如yathāpatta(如所应得)等;已侍奉师前,已侍奉于师;已亲近师前,已亲近于师;已随住师前,已随住于师;已接触师前,已接触于师。巴利
Ṭhādīhi kattari kto hoti yathāpattañca; upaṭṭhito gurumbhavaṃ, upaṭṭhito guru bhotā; upāsito gurumbhavaṃ, upāsito guru bhotā; anuvusito gurumbhavaṃ, anuvusito guru bhotā; āsiliṭṭho gurumbhavaṃ, āsiliṭṭho guru bhotā;
“尊者卧于小床”“小床为尊者所卧”;“尊者缘树而上”“树为尊者所缘”;“提婆达多耽于贱女”“贱女为提婆达多所耽”;“男童随女童而生”“女童随男童而生”。巴利
Adhisayito khaṭopikaṃ bhavaṃ, adhisayitā khaṭopikā bhotā; āruḷho rukkhaṃ bhavaṃ, āruḷho rukkho bhātā; anujiṇṇo vasaliṃ devadatto, anujiṇṇā vasalī devadattena; anujāto māṇavako māṇavikaṃ, anujātā māṇavikā māṇavakena.
于有去义、无业及处所中亦——巴利
Gamanatthākammakādhāre ca-.
就“去”义而言,不论不及物或及物,依处或是受事,或是施事,随应而定。如说:“这是他们所行处”、“此处为你所行处”、“此处为他们所行”、“此道为他们所行之道”;又如:“这是他们所坐处”、“此处为你们所坐”、“此处为他们所坐”。而“天若降雨,稻谷丰熟”之语,于此处意指因缘和合之成就。巴利
Gamanatthato akammakato ca kriyatthā ādhāre kto hoti kattari ca yathāpattañca; idamesaṃ yātaṃ, iha te yātaṃ, ihatehi yātaṃ, ayaṃ tehi yāto patho, idamesamāsitaṃ, iha te āsitā, iha tehi āsitaṃ, devo ce vaṭṭho sampannā sālayoti -kāraṇa sāmaggisampatti etthābhimatā.
以“āhāra”之义——巴利
Āhāratthā-.
就“受用”义而言,依处成为受事者,或随应而为施事者。如说:“这是他们所用之食”、“这是他们所用之饮”、“此处被他们所食”、“此处被他们所饮”、“饭被他们所食”、“水被他们所饮”——此是非施事者的构词解析。又如何理解“牛被饮”?或因“他们有饮”便说“被饮”?或是依通常用例——如“有饮”〔passinno〕等,此处凡是表过去时性者,即依此而成为受事者。如是,“为国王所杀”〔raññammato〕、“为国王所爱”〔raññamiṭṭho〕、“为国王所觉”〔raññambuddho〕、“为国王所敬”〔raññaṃ pūjito〕——如是,“被持戒”〔sīlito〕、“被守护”〔rakkhito〕、“被忍”〔khanto〕、“被呵责”〔ākuṭṭho〕、“被怒”〔ruṭṭho〕、“被嗔”〔rusito〕、“被广说”〔abhivyāhaṭo〕、“被怜”〔dayito〕、“被喜”〔haṭṭho〕、“被爱”〔kanto〕、“被制”〔saṃyato〕、“被念”〔amato〕——凡此皆唯依已食性〔bhutatā〕而说;而此处因之果则当别论。巴利
Ajjhohāratthā ādhāre kto hoti yathāpattañca; idamesaṃ bhuttaṃ, idamesaṃ pītaṃ, iha tehi bhuttaṃ, iha tehi pītaṃ, odano tehi bhutto, pītamudakaṃ–-akattattho yogavibhāgo; kathaṃ pītā gāvoti?’Pītamesaṃ vijjatī’tipītā?Bāhulakā vā–-passinnoti yā ettha bhutakālatā tanra kto; evaṃ raññammato, raññamiṭṭho,raññambuddho, raññaṃ pūjito–-evaṃ sīlito, rakkhito, khanto, ākuṭṭho, ruṭṭho, rusito, abhivyāhaṭo, dayito, haṭṭho, kanto, saṃyato,amato–-kaṭṭhanti bhutatāyameva; hetuno phalaṃ tvatra bhāvi.
tuṃ、tāye、tave 于 bhāva 义、将来时行为中、以及为此目的之义中——巴利
Tuṃtāyetave bhāve bhavissati kriyāyaṃ tadatthāyaṃ-.
当所表达的是未来意义时,若行为意义是由进行中的动作所引生,那么 tuṃ、tāye、tave 就用在表示“为了那个目的”的动词行为上;kātuṃ gacchati;kattāye gacchati;kātave gacchati——icchati bhottuṃ kāmeti bhottunti 以此即成立。于再次说明时,此处亦可有“icchanto karotīti”——如是 sakkoti bhottuṃ,jānāti bhottuṃ,gilāyati bhottuṃ,ghaṭate bhottuṃ,ārabhate bhottuṃ,labhate bhottuṃ,pakkamati bhottuṃ,ussahati bhottuṃ,arahati bhottuṃ,atthi bhottuṃ,vijjati bhottuṃ,vaṭṭati bhottuṃ,kappati bhottunti——同样 pārayati bhottuṃ,pahu bhottuṃ,samattho bhottuṃ,pariyatto bhottuṃ,alaṃ bhottunti;bhavati 的这一形式于一切处皆可发生——同样 kālo bhottuṃ,samayo bhottuṃ,velā bhottunti——如 bhottumano,sotuṃ soto,daṭṭhuṃ cakkhu。Yujjhituṃ dhanu,vattu jaḷo,gantuṃ mano,kattumalaso ti——发音则依说者而定——bhāveti kiṃ?Karissāmiti gacchati;kriyāyanti kiṃ?Bhikkhissaṃ iccassa jaṭā;tadatthāyanti kiṃ gacchissato te bhavissati bhattaṃ bhojanāya.巴利
Bhavissatiatthe vattamānato krayatthā bhāve tuṃtāye tave honti kriyāyaṃ tadatthāyaṃ patīyamānāyaṃ; kātuṃ gacchati; kattāye gacchati; kātave gacchati–-icchati bhottuṃ kāmeti bhottunti imināva siddhaṃpunabbidhānetvihāpi siyā icchanto karotīti–-evaṃ sakkotibhottuṃ, jānāti bhottuṃ, gilāyati bhottuṃ, ghaṭate bhottuṃ, ārabhate bhottuṃ, labhate bhottuṃ, pakkamati bhottuṃ, ussahatī bhontuṃ, arahati bhottuṃ, atthi bhottuṃ, vijjati bhottuṃ, vaṭṭati bhottuṃ, kappati bhottunti–-tathā pārayati bhottuṃ, pahu bhottuṃ, samattho bhottuṃ, pariyatto bhottuṃ, alaṃ bhottunti; bhavatissa sabbattha sambhavā–-tathā kālo bhottuṃ, samayo bhottuṃ, velā bhottunti–-yathā-bhottumano, sotuṃ soto, daṭṭhuṃ cakkhu. Yujjhituṃ dhanu, vattu jaḷo, gantuṃ mano, kattumalasoti–-uccāraṇantu vattāyattaṃ–-bhāveti kiṃ? Karissāmiti gacchati; kriyāyanti kiṃ? Bhikkhissaṃ iccassa jaṭā; tadatthāyanti kiṃ gacchissato te bhavissati bhattaṃ bhojanāya.
否定时,ālaṃkhalūnaṃ 之后可接 tūnaktvānaktvā,或(vā)——巴利
Paṭisedhe’laṃkhalūnaṃ tūnaktvānaktvā vā-.
于 alaṃ、khalu 诸词表达禁止意义的使用中,tuna 等后缀可出现在行为意义上;alaṃ sotuna,khalu sotuna;alaṃ sutvāna,khalu sutvāna;alaṃ sutvā,khalu sutvā;alaṃ sutena,khalu sutena——alaṃ khalūna 是什么意思?意思是“不要发生”;禁止是什么意思?是装饰。巴利
Alaṃkhalusaddānaṃ paṭisedhatthānaṃpayoge tunādayo vā honti bhāve; alaṃ sotuna, khalu sotuna; alaṃ sutvāna, khalu sutvāna; alaṃ sutvā, khalu sutvā; laṃ sutena, khalu sutena–-alaṃ khalūnanti kiṃ? Mā hotu; paṭisedheti kiṃ? Alaṃkāro.
Pubbekakattukānaṃ〔前面同一施事者们的〕——巴利
Pubbekakattukānaṃ-.
对于同一行为者的诸动作,其中先前的那个,为表达其意义,tuna 等后缀便出现在行为意义上;sotuna yāti、sutvāna、sutvā 或——“同一行为者”是什么意思?譬如在已吃的 devadatta 那里,yaññadatta 出发;“先前”是什么意思?既吃又煮——未到河而山,越过山而河,由于 bhū 词根在一切情形中出现,故可理解为同一行为者性与先前时间性。吃了又吃而去,由此即可成立,而重复性则由重复词得知——如何是 jīvagāhaṃ agāhasi、kāyappacālakaṃ gacchanti 等?由 ghaṇ 后缀的状语性而成立;譬如 odanapākaṃ sayati。巴利
Eko kattā yesaṃ vyāpārānaṃ tesuyo pubbo tadatthato kriyatthā tunādayo honti bhāve; sotuna yāti, sutvāna, sutvāvā–-ekakattukānanti kiṃ bhuttasmiṃ devadatte yaññadatto vajati; pubbāti kiṃ? Bhuñjati ca pacati ca–-appattvā nadiṃ pabbato, atikkamma pabbataṃ nadīti bhudhātussa sabbattha sambhavā ekakattukatā pubbakālatā ca gamyate. Bhutvā bhutvā gacchatīti imināva siddhamābhikkhaññantu dibbacanāvagamyate–-kathaṃ jīvagāhaṃ agāhasi, kāyappacālakaṃ gacchantītiādi? Ghaṇantena kriyāvisesanena siddhaṃ; yathā odanapākaṃ sayatīti.
于现在时中,作者(即施动者)上(用)nta——巴利
Nto kattari vattamāne-.
表示现在时意义时,就正在进行的动作而言,具动作意义的词根在主动语态中即成为 nto;如 tiṭṭhanto。巴利
Cattamānatthe vattamānato kriyatthā nto hoti kattari; tiṭṭhanto.
于现在时义,从现在时的动词义,māna 词尾用于主动语态;tiṭṭhamāno。巴利
Vattamānatthe vattamānato kriyatthā māno hoti kattari; tiṭṭhamāno.
于bhāva与kamma〔语态〕中——巴利
Bhāvakammesu -.
于现在时义,从现在时的动词义,在bhāva与kamma中,有māno;ṭhīyamānaṃ,paccamāno odano。巴利
Vattamānatthe vattamānato kriyatthā bhāve kamme ca māno hoti; ṭhīyamānaṃ, paccamāno odano.
它们于未来时以 ssa 为前缀——巴利
Te ssapubbānāgate-.
在未来义中,凡来自现在时动词词干的那些 ntamāna 词尾,都成为带 ssapubbā 的形式,即:ṭhassanto、ṭhassamāno、ṭhisissamānaṃ、paccassamāno odano。巴利
Anāgatatthe vattamānato kriyanthā te ntamānā ssapubbā honti; ṭhassanto, ṭhassamāno, ṭhisissamānaṃ, paccassamāno odano.
于动词义之后,多数有ṇvā等后缀;cāru、dāru。巴利
Kriyatthā pare bahakulaṃ ṇvādayo honti; cāru, dāru.
于 Khajayānaṃ,单音节的 di 成为二——巴利
Khajayānamekassarodi dve-.
以kha、cha、sa为后缀的动作名词,其第一音节的元音变为双音形式;titikkhā、jigucchā、vīmaṃsā。巴利
Khachasappaccayantānaṃ kriyatthānaṃ paṭhamamekassaraṃ saddarūpaṃ dve bhavati; titikkhā, jigucchā, vīmaṃsā.
于parokkhā(过去时)亦然——巴利
Parokkhāyañca-.
于间接过去时中,单音节的第一个词形成为两个;jagāma——cakāra 表示未说出的集合义;由此,在其他处亦如所传。巴利
Parokkhāyaṃ paṭhamamekassaraṃ saddarūpaṃ dve bhavati; jagāma–-cakāro avuttasamuccayattho; tenaññatrāpi yathāgamaṃ.
“放弃”、“应被放弃”、“为放弃”,“动摇不定”、“摇摆不定”——贪心者、愚痴者,陷入“这是此、那是彼”之类的系缚之中。巴利
Jahāti, jahitabbaṃ, jahituṃ, daddallati, vaṅkamati–-lolupo, momuhoti ottaṃ’tadaminādi’ pāsā.
从词首开始,元音(可发生变化)。巴利
Ādismā sarā-.
处于起始位置的元音,其后面若紧跟另一元音,便成为两个;asisisati——为何说“起始”?Jajāgāra;为何说“元音”?Papāca。巴利
Ādibhutā sarā paramekassaraṃ dve hoti; asisisati–-ādismāti kiṃ? Jajāgāra; sarāti kiṃ? Papāca.
已二成之 Gaṃ,它不再取得二重性;titikkhasati、jigucchisati。巴利
Gaṃ dvibhutaṃ na taṃ puna dvattamāpajjate; titikkhasati, jigucchisati.
随其所欲,于以 si 等结尾之词——巴利
Yathiṭṭhaṃ syādino-.
以 syā 结尾者,依所愿,或取一音为首要,或依传来规则,成为重复;puputtiyisati, putittīyisatī, puttīyiyisati.巴利
Syādyantassa yathiṭṭhamekassaramādibhutamaññaṃ vā yathāgamaṃ dvittamāpajjate; puputtiyisati, putittīyisatī, puttīyiyisati.
前音节缩短为短音。巴利
Rasso pubbassa-.
于 Citte 中,pubbassalaro 为短音;dadāti。巴利
Citte pubbassalaro rasso hoti; dadāti.
非语基首辅音的脱落——巴利
Lopo’nādibyañjanassa-.
重叠时,前一部分中开头以外的辅音脱落;asisisati。巴利
Dvitte pubbassādito’ññassabyañjanassa lopo hoti; asisisati.
于 khajasesu 中,assi——巴利
Khajasesvassi -.
于第二时,前之ass变为i,在khacha等中;pipāsati——khacha等中是何义?jahāti;ass是何义?bubhukkhati。巴利
Dvitte pubbassa assa i hoti khachasesu; pipāsati–-khacha sesūti kiṃ? Jahāti; assāti kiṃ? Bubhukkhati.
gupa 的 u——。巴利
Gupissussa -.
在重叠式中,前词干 gup 的 us 变为 i,于 khachasa 词尾前;jigucchati。巴利
Dvitte pubbassa gupissa ussa i hoti khachasesu; jigucchati.
于第四、第二(词干)的第三、第一(词尾)——巴利
Catutthadutiyayānaṃ tatiyapaṭhamā-.
重叠时,前者的第四、第二依次成为第三、第一;bubhukkhati。Ciccheda。巴利
Dvitte pubbesaṃ catutthadutiyānaṃ tatiyapaṭhamā honti; bubhukkhati. Ciccheda.
于kavagga诸字,生起cavagga诸字——巴利
Kavaggahānaṃ cavaggajā-.
在 Dvitte 中,前面的诸 kavagga 依序成为 vavagga;cukopa、jahāti。巴利
Dvitte pubbesaṃ kavaggahānaṃ vavaggajāhonti yathā kkamaṃ; cukopa, jahāti.
māna 转为 vī,para 转为 maṃ——巴利
Mānassavī parassa ca maṃ-.
于 dvitte 之前,pubbassa māna 的 vī 发生,parassa 的 maṃ 亦发生;vīmaṃsati。巴利
Dvitte pubbassamānassa vī hoti, parassaca maṃ; vīmaṃsati.
对于 kitassa 与 āsaṃsa 的疑问,或作 vā——巴利
Kitassāsaṃsayeti vā-.
于无疑惑时,在 dvitta 中,前一部分的 kita 变为 vā;tikicchati。Cikicchati——asaṃsayeti kiṃ?Vicikicchati。巴利
Saṃsayato’ññasmiṃ cattamānassadvitte pubbassa kitassavāti hoti; tikicchati. Cikicchati–-asaṃsayeti kiṃ? Vicikicchati.
于 paccaye 前,yuvaṇṇa 诸字的 ño〔替换〕。巴利
Yuvaṇṇānamñoppaccaye-.
以i音或u音结尾的动词词根,当后接后缀时,依次变为ña。例如:cetabbaṃ, netabbaṃ, sotabbaṃ, bhavitabbaṃ。巴利
Ivaṇṇuvaṇṇantānaṃ kriyatthānaṃ ño honti yathākkamaṃ paccaye; cetabbaṃ, netabbaṃ, sotabbaṃ, bhavitabbaṃ.
对于轻的、近末的——。巴利
Lahussupantassa-.
轻音者近音之 yuvaṇṇa 依次成为 ña;esitabbaṃ, kositabbaṃ——何谓轻音?dhūpitā;何谓近音?rundhati。巴利
Lahubhutassa upantassa yuvaṇṇassa ño honti yathākkamaṃ; esitabbaṃ, kositabbaṃ–-lahussātikiṃ? Dhūpitā; upantassāti-kiṃ? Rundhati.
assa 在带 ṇa 标记的后缀前——巴利
Assā ṇānubandhe -.
当后缀带有 ṇ 随行时,近音的 a 变为 ā;kārako。巴利
Ṇakārānubandhe paccaye pare upantassa akārassa āhoti; kārako.
它们不于以 k 为随字的增音中——巴利
Na te kānubandhanāgamesu-.
这些既非带kānubandha,也不带增音(nāgama);cito, suto, diṭṭho, puṭṭho——依“vanā”等规则而不带增音。——Cinitabbaṃ, vinituṃ; suṇitabbaṃ, suṇituṃ; pāpuṇitabbaṃ, pāpuṇituṃ; dhunitabbaṃ, dhunituṃ, dhunanaṃ, dhunayitabbaṃ, dhunāpetabbaṃ, dhunayituṃ, dhunāpetuṃ, dhunayanaṃ, dhunāpanaṃ, dhunayati, dhunāpeti; pīnetabbaṃ, pīnayituṃ, pīnanaṃ, pīnituṃ, pīnayati; sunoti; sinoti; dunoti; hinoti; pahiṇitabbaṃ, pahiṇituṃ, pahiṇanaṃ.巴利
Te ñoā kānubandhe nāgame ca na honti; cito, suto, diṭṭho, puṭṭho–-nāgame vanādinā. –-Cinitabbaṃ, vinituṃ; suṇitabbaṃ, suṇituṃ; pāpuṇitabbaṃ, pāpuṇituṃ; dhunitabbaṃ, dhunituṃ, dhunanaṃ, dhunayitabbaṃ, dhunāpetabbaṃ, dhunayituṃ,dhunāpetuṃ, dhunayanaṃ, dhunāpanaṃ, dhunayati, dhunāpeti; pīnetabbaṃ, pīnayituṃ, pīnanaṃ, pīnituṃ, pīnayati; sunoti; sinoti; dunoti; hinoti; pahiṇitabbaṃ, pahiṇituṃ, pahiṇanaṃ.
这些在带有随伴音与增音的情况下,有时亦不出现;mudito、modito;ruditaṃ、roditaṃ。巴利
Te kvaci vā na honti kānubandhanāgamesu; mudito modito; ruditaṃ, roditaṃ.
除了带有 ka 随伴音与增音者以外,在其他地方,这些有时也不出现:khipako、panudanaṃ、vadhako。巴利
Kānubandhanāgamato’ññasmimpi te kvaci na honti; khipako, panudanaṃ, vadhako.
当 pye 在后时,出现 sissā——巴利
Pye sissā-.
于pyādese中,sissa变为ā;此为依止。巴利
Sissa āti pyādese; nissāya.
Ñonamayavā sare.巴利
Ñonamayavā sare-.
当后面是元音时,即成为 ñonamayavā;问:“jayo, bhavo——sareti”是何义?答:“Jeti; anubhoti。”巴利
Sare pare ñonamayavā honti; jayo, bhavo–-sareti kiṃ? Jeti; anubhoti.
当 ṇ 随伴时,āya、āvā——巴利
Āyāvā ṇānubandhe-.
于 ño 与 namā 之后,āyāvā 成为 sarādoṇānubandhe;nāyayati、bhāvayati。Sayāpetvātiādisurassattaṃ。巴利
Ñonamāyāvā honti sarādoṇānubandhe; nāyayati, bhāvayati. Sayāpetvātiādisurassattaṃ.
当非 ṇāpi 的 ṇānubandha 后缀随逐时,在以 ā 结尾的词根末尾增入 yuka。巴利
Āssāṇāpimhi yuka-.
以 ā 结尾的动词词根,在非 ṇāpito 的 ṇānubandha 处发生 yuka;dāyako——在 ṇānubandha 处呢?dānaṃ。为何说 aṇāpimhi?dāpayati。巴利
Ākārantassa kriyatthassa yuka hoti ṇāpito’ññasmiṃ ṇānubandhe; dāyako–-ṇānubandhetveva? Dānaṃ. Aṇāpimhīti kiṃ? Dāpayati.
于pada等词,有时——巴利
Padādīnaṃ kvaci-.
Pad 等词根有时有 yuka;nipajjitabbaṃ、nipajjituṃ、nipajjanaṃ、pamajjitabbaṃ、pamajjituṃ、pamajjanaṃ——“有时”是指什么?Pādo。巴利
Padādīnaṃ yuka hoti kvaci; nipajjitabbaṃ, nipajjituṃ, nipajjanaṃ, pamajjitabbaṃ, pamajjituṃ, pamajjanaṃ–-kvacīti kiṃ? Pādo.
于rudh等之前,或为maṃ——巴利
Maṃ vā rudhādīnaṃ-.
rudh 等词根有时或成为 maṃ;rundhituṃ、rujjhituṃ——所谓“有时”究竟指什么?nirodho。巴利
Rudhādīnaṃ kvaci maṃ vā hoti; rundhituṃ, rujjhituṃ–-kvacitveva? Nirodho.
末尾辅音的消失发生在何处?巴利
Kvamhi lopo’ntabyañjanassa-.
末尾辅音在kvamhi中脱落;bhattaṃ ghasanti, gaṇhanti vā etthāti bhattaggaṃ。巴利
Antabyañjanassa lopo hoti kvamhi;’bhattaṃ ghasanti, gaṇhanti vāetthā’ti bhattaggaṃ.
于非yakāra的辅音前,pararūpa巴利
Pararūpamayakāre byañjane-.
动词词根的末辅音,在非yakāra的辅音前发生同化;如hettabbaṃ;为何说是“辅音”?如bhinditabbaṃ。为何说是“非yakāra”?如bhijjati。巴利
Kriyatthānamantabyañjanassa pararūpaṃ hoti yakārato’ññasmiṃ byañjane; hettabbaṃ; byañjaneti kiṃ? Bhinditabbaṃ. Ayakāreti kiṃ? Bhijjati.
mana 等词的 niggahīta——巴利
Manānaṃ niggahītaṃ-.
以ma和na结尾的动词词根,在非yakāra的辅音前变为niggahīta;gantabbaṃ、jaṅghā。为何强调“在辅音前”?因为有gamanaṃ;为何强调“非yakāra”?因为有gamyate。巴利
Makāranakārantānaṃ kriyatthānaṃ niggahītaṃ hotayayakāre byañjane; gantabbaṃ, jaṅghā. Byañjanetveva? Gamanaṃ; aya kāretveva? Gamyate.
brū 的 o 在辅音前不出现;brūmi。只有在辅音前才这样吗?abravi。巴利
Brūssa o na hoti byañjane; brūmi. Byañjanetveva? Abravi.
在 ghānubandhe 的情形中,ca 与 ja 变为 ka 与 ga——。巴利
Kagā cajānaṃ ghānubandhe-.
于gha随伴字母之前,以c字母和j字母结尾的表动作意义的词根,依次成为k和g;vākyaṃ, bhāgyaṃ。巴利
Ghānubandhe cakārajakārantānaṃ kriyatthānaṃ kagā honti yathākkamaṃ; vākyaṃ, bhāgyaṃ.
当有ṇa随伴时,hanassa变为ghāta。巴利
Hanassa ghāto ṇānubandhe-.
han 在 ṇ 随行时变为 ghāta;āghāto。巴利
Hanassa ghāto hoti ṇānubandhe; āghāto.
于 Kvimhī 时,pari、pa、ca、sa、mo 等之后有 gho——巴利
Kvimhī gho paripaccasamohi-.
于“pari”等(前缀)之后,后接的“han”在 kvi 接尾时变为“gha”,如 paligho、paṭigho、aghaṃ(其元音短化依例外规定)、saṅgho、ogho。巴利
Paṭhyādīhi parassahanassagho hoti kvimhi; paligho, paṭigho, aghaṃ-rassattaṃ nipātanā;saṅgho, ogho.
于 se- 之前,其后之〔音〕变为 ghaṃ。巴利
Parassa ghaṃ se-.
重叠时,后者的 han 在 se 之前变为 ghaṃ;jighaṃsā。巴利
Dvitte parassa hanassa ghaṃ hoti se; jighaṃsā.
Jiharānaṃ的“giṃ”——巴利
Jiharānaṃ giṃ-.
于二词中,对他人之 jiharānaṃ 时,giṃ 成为 se;vijigiṃsā,jigiṃsā。巴利
Dvitte paresaṃ jiharānaṃ giṃ hoti se; vijigiṃsā, jigiṃsā.
dhā 的 [被] ho 替换。巴利
Dhāssa ho-.
在重复时,后者的 dhā 的 ssa 变为 ha;dahati。巴利
Dvitte parassa dhāssa ha hoti; dahati.
于 ṇi 存在时,dusa 的长音——巴利
Ṇimhi dīgho dusassa-.
dusa 的长音在 ṇi 词尾前;dūsito——在 ṇi 词尾前如何?Duṭṭho。巴利
Dusassadīgho hoti ṇimhī; dūsito–-ṇimhīti kiṃ? Duṭṭho.
Guhissa 在元音前〔变化〕——巴利
Guhissa sare-
guh 的词干在元音前变为长音;niguhanaṃ——为何说“在元音前”?guyhaṃ。巴利
Guhissa dīgho hoti sare; niguhanaṃ–-sareti kiṃ? Guyhaṃ.
对于 muh、bah 等〔词根〕,在带随伴字音 ka 的 te、tve 之前——巴利
Muhabahānañca te kānubandhe’tve-.
muh、bah等词根,若有ka附随而非tve时,则加ta等字母后变长音,如mūḷho、bāḷehā、guḷho——此规则不适用于何种情形?muyahati。何以说“ka附随”?因有mu-hitabba之形式。何以排除“tve”?因有muyhitvāna、muyhitvā等形式。此“ka附随”之规则,适用范围直至“sāsassasisve”为止。巴利
Muhabahānaṃ guhissa ca dīgho hoti takārādo kānubandhetvānatvāvajjite; mūḷho, bāḷehā, guḷho–-neti kiṃ? Muyahati. Kānubandheti kiṃ? Mu-hitabbaṃ. Atveti kiṃ? Muyhitvāna, muyhitvā, kānubandhetveti ayamadhikāro yāva sāsassasisve‘‘ti.
Vahassussa——巴利
Vahassussa-.
Vahassa 与 ussa 遇 kānubandha 且非 tvā 与 tvāna 时,长音;cūḷho。巴利
Vahassौssa dīgho hoti te kānubandhe tvānatvāvajjite; cūḷho.
Dhāssa 的 hi——。巴利
Dhāssa hi-.
词根“dhā”,因其具有持载之义,当连接 te 和 kānubandha 等词尾时,词根中的“i”变为 te 所代表的形式;但在 tvāna 与 tvā 之前则不适用此规则。例如:nihito(被置放者)、nihitavā(已置放者)。巴利
Dhā dhāraṇenimassa hi hoti te kānubandhe tvānatvā vajjite; nihito, nihitavā.
以 ham 等结尾的词,其末尾音发生脱落——。巴利
Hamādirānaṃ lopo’ntassa -.
对于以 ham 等和以 r 结尾的词根,其末尾音可脱落,发生在带有 k 随缚字而非 tvā 或 tva 的语境中;gato、khato、hato、mato、tato、saññato、rato、kato——为何仅限 tve?gamyate。为何仅限带 k 随缚字?gantabbaṃ。为何仅限非 tve?gantvāna、gantvā。巴利
Hamādīnaṃ rakārantānaṃ vāntassalopo hoti te kānubandhe tvānatvāvajjite; gato, khato, hato, mato, tato, saññato, rato, kato–-tetveca? Gamyate. Kānubandhetveva. Gantabbaṃ. Atvetveva? Gantvāna, gantvā.
以 vac 等〔词根〕的 vassa 可替换为 uṭa。巴利
Vacādinaṃ vassuṭa vā-.
对于 vac 等词,其 vassa 在带 k 随缚字的 tve 中,可任选变为 uṭa;uttaṃ、vuttaṃ;utthaṃ、vutthaṃ;为何仅限于非 tve 呢?Vatvāna、vatvā。巴利
Vacādīnaṃ vassa vā uṭa hoti kānubandhe’tve; uttā, vuttaṃ; utthaṃ, vutthaṃ; atvetveva? Vatvāna, vatvā.
对于 vac 等词,其 assa 在带 k 随缚字的 tve 语境中,变为 u;如 vuttaṃ、vutthaṃ。巴利
Vacādīnamassa u hoti kānubandhe’tve; vuttaṃ, vutthaṃ.
vaddha 的〔ssa 可替换为〕vā——巴利
Vaddhassa vā-.
对于 vaddha 的 assa,在带 k 随缚字的 tve 中,可转为 u;vuddho、vaddho——仅非 tve 时吗?vaddhitvāna;vaddhitvā。如何是 vuttī 呢?“vutti matte”。依特例安立;vattī 则依规则本身成立。巴利
Vaddhassa assa vā u hoti kānubandhe’tve; vuddho, vaddho–-atvetvava? Vaddhitvāna; vaddhitvā. Kathaṃ vuttīti?’Vutti matte’ti. Nipātanā; vattīti hoteva yathālakkhaṇaṃ.
Yajassa 的 ṭiyī-。巴利
Yajassayassa ṭiyī-.
对于 yaja,其 ya 变为 ṭiyī,发生在带 k 随缚字的 tve 中;iṭṭhaṃ、siṭṭhaṃ。为何仅限于非 tve?yajitvāna、yajitvā。巴利
Yajassa yassa ṭiyī hontī kānubandhe’tve; iṭṭhaṃ, siṭṭhaṃ, atvetveva? Yajitvāna, yajitvā.
对于 ṭhā,变为 i,发生在带 k 随缚字的 tve 中;如 ṭhito。若非 tve 呢?ṭhatvāna、ṭhatvā。巴利
Ṭhāssi hoti kānubandhe’tve; ṭhito. Atvetveva? Ṭhatvāna, ṭhatvā.
Gāpānami hoti kānubandhe’tve; gītaṃ, pītaṃ. Atvetveva? Gāyitvā; niccaṃ yāgamo; pāssa tu pītvāni bahulādhikārā.巴利
Gāpānami hoti kānubandhe’tve; gītaṃ, pītaṃ. Atvetveva? Gāyitvā; niccaṃ yāgamo; pāssa tu pītvāni bahulādhikārā.
Janissa 的〔音〕在带 k 标记的 tve 之前变为 ā;jāto。仅在 tve 时吗?janitvā。巴利
Janissa ā hoti kānubandhe’tve; jāto. Atvetveva? Janitvā.
Sāsassa 的 si-s 可——巴利
Sāsassasisvā-.
以“教导”为关联者,则有教导、教法,弟子、受教者。问:因何而教导?答:由于随教之后。巴利
Sāsassa vā sishoti kānubandhe’tve; siṭṭhaṃ, satthaṃ; sisso, sāsiyo. Atvetveva? Anusāsitvāna.
于 karassa 之后,〔替换为〕ātave——巴利
Karassātave-.
行为即是因缘,谓做事、为之。巴利
Karassaā hoti tave; kātave.
在 tuṃ、tuna、tabba 等词尾中,或……巴利
Tuṃtunatabbesuvā-.
在 tuṃ 等词尾中,ka 可选择性变为 kā;例如:kātuṃ(做)、kattuṃ(做)、kātuna(做已)、kattuna(做已);kātabbaṃ(应做)、kattabbaṃ(应做)。巴利
Tumādisu vā karassā hoti; kātuṃ, kattuṃ, kātuna, kattuna; kātabbaṃ, kattabbaṃ.
ñassa 变为 ne 和 jā-。巴利
Ñassa ne jā-.
ñ 字根在 na 声母前变为 jā;例如 jānituṃ(知,不定式)、jānatto(知,名词形)。为何要限定 na 声母?是为了排除像 ñāto(被知者)这样的情况——此处不发生变化。巴利
Ñadhātussa jā hoti nakāre; jānituṃ, jānatto. Neti kiṃ? Ñāto.
词根saka与āpa的 kukku 在 ṇe- 前。巴利
Sakāpānaṃ kukku ṇe-.
“saka”“āpa”等词根,于“ṇa”字之前插入“kkuṇ”增音:如 sakkuṇanto(能,现在分词)、pāpuṇanto(到,现在分词);sakkuṇoti(他能)、pāpuṇoti(他到达)。为何特指“ṇa”字?是为排除如 sakkoti(他能)、pāpeti(他使到达)这类情况,此处不插入该增音。巴利
Sakaāpānaṃ kukku iccete āgamā honti ṇakāre. Sakkuṇanto, pāpuṇanto; sakkuṇoti, pāpuṇoti. Ṇeti kiṃ? Sakkoti, pāpeti.
于 ni 之后,ci 的 c 变为 jo-。巴利
Nito cissa jo-.
于 nis 之后的 ci 的 c 变为 ch;nicchayo。巴利
Nismā parassa cissa cho hoti; nicchayo.
Jarasadānamima vā——。巴利
Jarasadānamima vā-.
于jarā等词末元音之后,īma可有可无地替换;jīraṇā、jīrati、jīrāpeti;nisīditabbaṃ、nisīdanaṃ、nisīdituṃ、nisīdati——为何说“可”?jarā、nisajjā;“īma vā”因规则分析,其他词亦可?Abhiratha,saṃyogādi lopa 于其义。巴利
Jarasadānamantasarā paro īma hoti vibhāsā; jīraṇā, jīrati, jīrāpeti; nisīditabbaṃ, nisīdanaṃ, nisīdituṃ, nisīdati–-vāti kiṃ? Jarā, nisajjā;’īma veti yogavibhāgā aññesampi?Abhiratha, saṃyogādilopo’tthassa.
对境的明了、明见与能见。巴利
Disassa passadassadasdadakkhā-.
dis 的 passa 等替换形式可(vā)有;vipassanā、vipassituṃ、vipassati;sudassī、piyadassī、dhammadassī、sudassaṃ、dassanaṃ、dasseti;daṭṭhabbaṃ、daṭṭhā、daṭṭhuṃ、duddaso、addasa;addā、addaṃ;addakkhi、dakkhissati——为何说“可(vā)”?Dissanti bālā。巴利
Disassa passādayo honti vibhāsā; vipassanā, vipassituṃ, vipassati; sudassī, piyadassī, dhammadassī, sudassaṃ, dassanaṃ, dasseti; daṭṭhabbaṃ, daṭṭhā, daṭṭhuṃ, duddaso, addasa; addā, addaṃ; addakkhi, dakkhissati–-vātveva? Dissanti bālā.
在 rī、rikkha、ka 之前,samānā 之后的〔disa〕变为 ra——巴利
Samānā ro rīrikkhakesu -.
于“samāna”(相同)一词的音节之后,后接音节中的“d”可变作“r”,这见于“rīrikkhaka”等词语。例如:sarī, sadī(同类);sarikkho, sadikkho(相似);sariso, sadiso(相似)。巴利
Samānasaddato parassa disassa ra hoti vā rīrikkhakesu; sarī, sadī; sarikkho, sadikkho; sariso, sadiso.
“dahassa”可变为“dassa”或“ḍo-”。巴利
Dahassa dassaḍo-.
“dah”中的“da”可变作“ḍa”。例如:ḍānehā, dāho(燃烧);ḍahati, dahati(燃烧)。巴利
Dahassa dassaḍo hoti vā; ḍānehā, dāho; ḍahati, dahati.
于 anaghaṇ、svā 与 aparī 之后,为 ḷ——巴利
Anaghaṇsvāparīhi ḷo-.
于‘ā’、‘parī’等前缀之后,后续词根‘daha’中的‘da’转为‘ḷa’,并带有连声标记‘naghaṇsu’;例如:‘āḷāhanaṃ’(燃烧)、‘pariḷāho’(炽热、热恼)。巴利
Āparīhi parassa dahassa dassa ḷo hotanaghaṇsu; āṇāhanaṃ, pariḷāho.
当词尾为 atyādinta(如此等)时,atthi(有)要替换成 bhu-。巴利
Atyādintesvatthissa bhu-.
在除 tyādi 以外的诸后缀中,asa bhuviccassa 的 bhu 成为;bhavitabbaṃ。巴利
Tyādinnavajjitesu paccayesu asa bhuviccassa bhu hoti; bhavitabbaṃ.
替换规则表明,在这一领域中不使用asa——由此也说明,在某些情况下某些词根也不使用——问:“在ati等之后”是什么意思?答:atthi、santo。问:“atthissa”是什么意思?答:为了避免出现assatissa。巴利
Ādesavidhānamasassāppayogatthametasmiṃ visaye–-etena katthaci kassaci dhātussāppayogo’pi ñāpito hoti–-atyādintesūti kiṃ? Atthi, santo. Atthissāti kiṃ? Assatissa mā hotu.
于 A、Ā、ssa 等开头中——巴利
Aāssaādisu -.
Aādo、āādo、ssaādo之时,attha变为bhu;babhuva, abhavā, abhavissā, bhavissati.巴利
Aādo āādo ssaādo ca atthassa bhu hoti; babhuva, abhavā, abhavissā, bhavissati.
以 ntamānānti 及 iyuṃ 为词尾时,ādi 脱落——巴利
Ntamānāntiyiyuṃsvādilopo-.
在以nt等开头的词形中,词根atthi(存在)的某些形式会发生词尾省略。例如:santo(存在者,主格单数)、samāno(存在者,现在分词)、santi(他们存在,第三人称复数)、santu(愿他们存在,祈使式)、siyā(愿其存在,愿望式单数)、siyuṃ(愿其存在,愿望式复数)。——为何要加“等词形中”这一限定?因为atthi本身不适用此省略规则,仍保留原形。巴利
Ntādīsvatthissādilopo hoti; santo, samāno, santi, santu, siyā, siyuṃ–-etesviti kiṃ? Atthi.
于 pā 等之后,ṭhā 有时变为 ṭhaga——巴利
Pādito ṭhāssa vā ṭhago kvaci-.
在表示动作差异的语词(即动词前缀)之后,后续字根中的“ṭha”有时会变为“ṭhaha”;例如:saṇṭhahanto(正安立)、santiṭṭhanto(正站立);saṇṭhahati(安立)、santiṭṭhati(站立)——这些前缀包括:pa、parā、apa、saṃ、anu、ava、o、ni、du、vi、adhi、api、ati、su、u、abhi、pati、pari、upa、ā 等。为何要说“有时”呢?因为存在不作替换的情况,如:saṇṭhiti(安立,名词)。巴利
Pādīhi kriyāvisesajotakehi saddehi parassa ṭhāssa kvaci ṭhaho vā hoti; saṇṭhahanto, santiṭṭhanto; saṇṭhahati, santiṭṭhati–-pa parā apa saṃanu ava o ni du vi adhi api ati su uabhipati pari upa ā pādi; kvacīti kiṃ? Saṇṭhiti.
“dāssiya”后加“ṅi”,即“dāssiyaṅi”的格尾变化规则。巴利
Dāssiyaṅi-.
从 pādita 之后的 dā 有 iyaṅi 与 hena 的替换,在某些情况下;未加区分时,samādiyati;只在某些情况下吗?Ādāya。巴利
Pādito parassa dāssa iyaṅi henāti kvaci; anādisitvā, samādiyati; kvacītveva? Ādāya.
在词根“pā”等之后,他者的“ka”音位有时可替换为“kha”;例如:saṅkhāro(行、有为法)、saṅkharīyati(被制作)——之所以说“ka 之”而不说“karoti 之”,是为了同时说明在第三人称单数(timhi)语境中时态助词(vikaraṇa)的生起。巴利
Pādito parassakarassa kvacikha hoti; saṅkhāro, saṅkharī yati –-karassāti avatvā karotissāti vacanaṃ timhi ca vikaraṇuppatti ñāpetuṃ.
由不变词“pura”(前、先)开始,其后跟随的动词词根“kara”(作)有时变为“kha”;例如“purakkhatvā”(置于前方,副动词形)、“purekkhāro”(前行、推崇,名词形)。这些即依“tadam-”等读法之例。巴利
Pura iccasmā nipātā parassa karassakha hoti; purakkhatvā, purekkhāro, ettaṃ tadaminādipāṭhā.
在 ti 之后,kama 的——巴利
Tito kamassa-.
于 ni 之后,后续的 kama 有时变为 kha;purakkhatvā、purekkhāro——此出自 ettaṃ、tadaminā 等文句。巴利
Nismā parassa kamassa kvaci kha hoti; purakkhatvā, purekkhāro, ettaṃ tadaminādipāṭhā.
Nito之后,kama的——巴利
Nito kamassa-.
从‘尼’(ni)位之后,其后的业(kamma)起始辅音有时变为‘卡’(kha),例如:nikkhamati(出去)。为何说‘有时’?——因为并非全都如此,例如nikkamo(出离)即为例外。巴利
Nismā parassa kamassa kvaci kha hoti; nikkhamati; kvacitveva? Nikkamo.
于 yuvaṇṇa 类词,iya 与 uva 替换,在 sare 之前——巴利
Yuvaṇṇānamiyaṅuvaṅi sare-.
以i类元音(伊)或u类元音(乌)结尾的动词词根,当后接元音时,在某些情况下会分别变为“伊扬”(iyaṅ)和“乌旺”(uvaṅ);例如:“vediyati”(感受)、“bruvanti”(他们说)。为何强调“后接元音”?是为了排除不发生此变化的“nivedeti”(通知)、“brūti”(他说)等词。“在某些情况下”又是什么意思?是指并非一律如此,如“jayati”(胜)、“bhavati”(有/存在)即不发生此变化。巴利
Ivaṇṇuvaṇṇantānaṃ kriyatthānamiyaṅuvaṅi honti sare kvavi;vediyati, bruvanti; sareti kiṃ? Nivedeti, brūti; kvacītveva? Jayati, bhavati.
除 ñā 等开头者外,以 ā 结尾的动词语干在 kye 前变为 ī。巴利
Aññādissāssī kye-.
以 ñā 等开头的词除外,以 ā 结尾的动词语干,在 kye 前变为 ī;diyati;为何说“以 ñā 等开头的词除外”?Ñāyati,tāyati。巴利
Ñādito’ññassa ākārantassa kriyatthassa ī hoti kye; diyati; aññādissāti kiṃ? Ñāyati, tāyati.
Tanassā vā——。巴利
Tanassā vā-.
在 kye 之前,tana 的 a 可变为 ā;tāyate、taññate。巴利
Tanassa ā hoti vā kye; tāyate, taññate.
元音可以延长——巴利
Dīgho sarassa-.
动词词根若以元音收尾,于后缀‘kye’前,其元音延长;例如‘cīyate(被积集)’、‘sūyate(被听闻)’。紧接着,该延长元音之后,发生‘ṭha’替换——巴利
Sarantassa kriyatthassadīgho hoti kye; cīyate, sūyate. Sānantarassa tassa ṭho-.
对于以该字母收尾的动词词根,其后紧接的语缀‘ta’变为‘ṭha’;例如‘kuṭṭho(被捣碎)’、‘tuṭṭhavā(已欢喜者)’、‘tuṭṭhabbaṃ(应欢喜)’、‘tuṭṭhī(欢喜)’。为何要说‘紧接其后’?是为了排除如‘tussitvā(欢喜已)’的情况——其中‘ta’并非紧接词根末尾音之后,故不适用此规则。巴利
Sakārantato kriyatthā parassānantarassatakārassa ṭha hoti; kuṭṭho, tuṭṭhavā, tuṭṭhabbaṃ, tuṭṭhī; ananatarasāti kiṃ? Tussitvā.
Kasassima 与 vā——巴利
Kasassima ca vā-.
此规则谓:词根“kas”(耕犁)之后,紧接其末尾的他动词缀“ta”变为“ṭha”,且“kas”的字母亦可选择性变为“ima”;由此得到“kiṭṭhaṃ”(已耕之地)、“kaṭṭhaṃ”(已耕之地)。为何仍须限定“紧接末尾之后”?是为了排除“kasitabbaṃ”(应耕犁)——此处并非紧接末尾,故不发生替换。巴利
Kasasmā parassānantarassa tassa ṭha hoti, kasassa vā ima ca; kiṭṭhaṃ, kaṭṭhaṃ–-anantarassātveva? Kasitabbaṃ.
Dhastotrastā——。巴利
Dhastotrastā -.
这些词被规定为如下形式。巴利
Ete saddā nipaccante.
Pucchādi 之后——。巴利
Pucchādito-.
于puccha等表动作的词根之后、紧随其后的ta音变为ṭha;puṭṭho、bhaṭṭho、yiṭṭho——为何要“紧随其后”呢?Pucchitvā。巴利
Pucchādīhi kriyatthehi parassānantarassa takārassaṭha hoti; puṭṭho, bhaṭṭho, yiṭṭho–-anantarassātveva? Pucchitvā.
sāsa、vasa、saṃsasa、sā,tho——。巴利
Sāsavasasaṃsasasā tho-.
依这些〔后缀〕,后接词首元音的 tassa 变为 tha;satthaṃ、vutthaṃ、pasatthaṃ、satthaṃ——kathamanusiṭṭho 如何?依“Kathanarānaṃ ṭaṭhaṇalā”。Ṭho。仅在后接词首元音时?Sāsatuṃ。巴利
Etehi parassānantarassa tassa tha hoti; satthaṃ, vutthaṃ, pasatthaṃ, satthaṃ–-kathamanusiṭṭhoti? ‘‘Kathanarānaṃ ṭaṭhaṇalā‘‘ti. Ṭho. Anantarassātveva? Sāsatuṃ.
Dho dahabhehi——。巴利
Dho dahabhehi-.
凡以‘-dha’、‘-ha’、‘-bha’音为结尾且具有行为义的词根,其紧接的‘ta’(过去分词后缀)变为‘dha’。例如:‘vuddho’(已增长者)、‘duddhaṃ’(已挤乳)、‘laddhaṃ’(已得)。巴利
Dhakārahakārabhakārantehi kriyatthehi parassānantarassa tassa dha hoti; vuddho, duddhaṃ,laddhaṃ.
Dahā 变为 ḍho-。巴利
Dahā ḍho-.
在‘Dahā’之后,紧随其后的辅音‘ta’变为‘ḍha’;例如:daṅḍho(棍棒)。巴利
Dahā parassānantarassa tassa ḍha hoti; daṅḍho.
又 Bahassa 的 u 与 ma——巴利
Bahassuma ca-.
于 ‘Bahā’ 之后,继起的 ‘ta’ 转为 ‘so’;依与 ‘sasanta’ 的组合规则,‘Bahā’ 亦增缀 ‘uma’;例如 ‘buḍḍho’。巴利
Bahā parassānantarassa tassa so hoti, bahassuma ca sasantayogena; buḍḍho.
由 ruhā 等〔词根〕,〔后缀〕ho 以及 ḷa〔替换〕——巴利
Ruhādīhi ho ḷa ca -.
紧接 Ruhā 等词根之后的 atta,其 ha 变为 ho,末尾的 a 也变为 ḷo;āruḷho、guḷho、vuḷho、bāḷho;〔若说〕“紧接其后的”才如此?Ārogatuṃ。巴利
Ruhādīhi parassānantarassatassa ha hoti, ḷo cāntassa; āruḷho, guḷho, vuḷho, bāḷho; anantarassātveva? Ārogatuṃ.
于 muhā 之后、紧接其后的 tassa 变为 ha,或依与 ha 结合之规则,其末尾的 a 变为 ḷa;muḷho, muddho。巴利
Muhā parassānantarassa tassa ha hoti vā, ḷo cāntassa hasantiyogena; muḷho, muddho.
于bhid等词根之后,随后的过去分词及具有该分词所示状态者,其ta不发生音变;bhinno、bhinnavā、chinno、chinnavā、channo、channavā、khinno、khinnavā、uppanno、uppananavā、sinno、sinnavā、sanenā、sannavā、pīno、pīnavā、sūno、sūnavā、dīno、dīnavā、ḍīno、ḍīnavā、līno、līnavā、lūno、lūnavā——为何提及过去分词及具有该分词所示状态者?bhitti;chitti、bhottuṃ、chettuṃ。巴利
Bhidādito no ktakkavantunaṃ-. Bhidādito paresaṃ ktaktavantunaṃ tassano hoti; bhinno, bhinnavā, chinno, chinnavā, channo, channavā, khinno, khinnavā, uppanno, uppananavā, sinno, sinnavā, sanenā, sannavā, pīno, pīnavā, sūno, sūnavā, dīno, dīnavā, ḍīno, ḍīnavā, līno, līnavā, lūno, lūnavā–-ktaktavantunatti kiṃ? Bhitti; chitti, bhottuṃ, chettuṃ.
于 dā 之后,其余 kta、ktavantu 后缀的 t 变为 inno;dinno、dinnavā。巴利
Dāto paresaṃ ktaktavantunaṃ tassa inno hoti; dinno, dinnavā.
从 kir 等词根后,ṇo-。巴利
Kirādīhi ṇo-.
以“kira”等词根为例,于其后接第三人称的过去分词词尾“kta”与“ktavant”时,其中的“ta”变为“ṇa”;例如:kiṇṇo(已散布者)、kiṇṇavā(具散布者)、puṇṇo(已满者)、puṇṇavā(具满者)、khīṇo(已尽者)、khīṇavā(具尽者)。巴利
Kirādīhi paresaṃ ktaktavantunaṃ tassānantarassa ṇa hoti; kiṇṇo, kiṇṇavā, puṇṇo, puṇṇavā, khīṇo, khīṇavā.
于 tarā 等〔词根〕之后,〔接〕riṇṇa——。巴利
Tarādīha riṇṇo-.
“以‘渡’等词根为首”者:于其后接“过去分词”及“具过去分词”词缀时,彼词根之双写辅音发生脱落变化;如:“已渡”、“曾渡者”、“已老”、“曾老者”、“已行”、“曾行者”。巴利
Tarādīhi paresaṃ ktaktavantunaṃ tassaraṇṇo hoti; tiṇṇo, tiṇṇavā, jiṇṇo, jiṇṇavā, ciṇṇo, ciṇṇavā.
于 go、bhañj 等之后——巴利
Go bhañjādīhi-.
于 bhañjā 等之后,对其他的 ktaktavantu 词尾,紧随其后的〔音〕变为 ga;bhaggo、bhaggavā、laggo、laggavā、nimuggo、nimuggavā、saṃviggo、saṃviggavā。巴利
Bhañjādīhi paresaṃktaktavantunaṃ tassānantarassaga hoti; bhaggo, bhaggavā, laggo, laggavā, nimuggo, nimuggavā, saṃviggo, saṃviggavā.
kho——紧接在 Susā 之后巴利
Susā kho-.
在 susā 之后,对于其他的 ktaktavantu 词,其 tassa 变为 kho;sukkheṃ、sukkhavā。巴利
Susā paresaṃ ktaktavantunaṃ tassa kho hoti; sukkheṃ, sukkhavā.
Pacā 之后为 ko——。巴利
Pacā ko-.
在 pacā 之后,对于其余的 ktakkavantuna,其 t 变为 ko;pakko、pakkavā。巴利
Pacā paresaṃ ktakkavantunaṃ tassa ko hoti; pakko, pakkavā.
Mucā等词根在带有ktaktavantū后缀时,其词尾如何?mukko、mutto;mukkavā、muttavā——在“sakko”等ṇvādi后缀中成立——在ktaktavantū后缀中,satto即是sattavā。巴利
Mucā paresaṃktaktavantunaṃ tassa ko vā hoti; mukko, mutto; mukkavā, muttavā–-sakkoti ṇvādisu siddhaṃ–-ktaktavantusu satto sattavātveva hoti.
vaḍḍhā 的 kti 后缀发生脱落——巴利
Lopo vaḍḍhā ktissa-.
在 vaḍḍhā 之后,kti〔后缀〕中该〔部分〕发生脱落;vaḍḍhi。巴利
Vaḍḍhā parassaktissa tassa lopo hoti; vaḍḍhi.
表被动义时,其后的 kvi 后缀脱落;如 abhibhu。巴利
Kriyatthā parassa kvissa lopo hoti; abhibhu.
对于ṇi与ṇāpi,在这些中——巴利
Ṇiṇāpīnaṃ tesu-.
于ṇi、ṇā、pī之后缀中,在彼等ṇi、ṇā、pī中发生脱落;kārentaṃ payojayayati——kāreti、kārāpeti。巴利
Ṇiṇāpīnaṃ lopo hoti tesu ṇiṇāpīsu;’kārentaṃ payojayayati’kāreti, kārāpeti.
有时 vikaraṇa 的脱落。巴利
Kvacī vikaraṇānaṃ-.
动词变化标记(vikaraṇa)有时会发生省略;例如:udapādi(生起了)、hanti(他杀)。巴利
Vikaraṇānaṃ kvaci lopo hota; udapādi, hanti.
“māna”变为“massa-”(即词干中 māna 的 ma 被省略、替换为 ssa 的形式)。巴利
Mānassa massa-.
及物动词(kriyattha,即作用于他者的动词)的现在分词后缀“-māna”中,“ma”有时脱落;例如:“karāṇo”(正在做者)。为何说“有时”?——若不舍落,则如:“kurumāno”(正在做者)。巴利
Kriyatthā parassa mānassa makārassa lopo hoti kvaci; karāṇo; kvacati kiṃ? Kurumāno.
“eilasse-”:词尾变化省略标记。巴利
Eilasse-.
Eilāna 的〔变化中〕有时成为〔Eilāname〕;如 gahetvā——adenti;有时则不然?如 vapitvā。巴利
Eilāname hota kvacī; gahetvā, adenti; kvacītveva? Vapitvā.
在复合词中,tvā 有时变为 pyo——巴利
Pyo vā tvāssa samāse-.
tvā 后缀在复合词中可变为 pyo;所插入的 p,依据“pye sissā”规则。具区分说明之义;abhibhūya、abhibhavitvā——〔说〕“在复合词中”是为了什么?patvā;由于“kvaci asamāsepi bahulādhikārā”〔规则〕,即便不在复合词中亦可〔如此〕?lataṃ dantehi chindiya。巴利
Tvāssavā pyo hota samāse; pakāro’pye sassā’ti. Visesanatthā; abhibhūya, abhibhavitvā–-samāseti kiṃ? Patvā; kvavāsamāse’pi bahakulādhikārā?Lataṃ dantehi chindiya.
“tvā”可替换为“ssa”、“tuṃ”、“yāna”等形式,用于某些复合词中。例如“abhihaṭhūṃ”与“abhiharitvā”(二者皆意为‘携取、运送之后’);又如“anumodiyāna”与“anumoditvā”(皆意为‘随喜之后’)。——所谓‘非复合词中亦然’者,依‘bahulādhikārā’(多样通用规则)是否也适用?如“daṭhuṃ”与“disvā”(皆意为‘见’)。——此处作语法分别(yogavibhāga),意在说明这些形式并非毫无限制地通用,而是有其特定的适用范围。巴利
Tvāssa vā tuṃyānā honti samāse kvaci; abhihaṭhūṃ, abhiharitvā; anumodiyāna, anumoditvā–-asamāse-pi bahulādhikārā? Daṭhuṃ; disvā–-esamappavisayatāñāpanattho yogavibhāgo.
Hanā 之后为 racco——巴利
Hanā racco-.
从 han 之后的 tvā 后缀,在复合词中,可变为 racco;ahacca、ahanitvā。巴利
Hanasmā parassa tvāssa racco vā hoti samāse; ahacca, ahanitvā.
在 sās 与 adhikara 之后,ca、ca、riccā。巴利
Sāsādhikarā cacariccā-.
于 sās 与 adhī 之后,karā 之后的 tvā 后缀依次可变为 ca、ca、riccā;sakkacca、sakkaritvā、asakkacca、asakkaritvā、adhikicca、adhikaritvā、巴利
Sāsādhīhi parā karā parassa tvāssa cacariccā vā honti yathākkamaṃ; sakkacca, sakkaritvā, asakkacca, asakkaritvā, adhikicca, adhikaritvā,
在i之后,tvā后缀可变为cco;adhicca、adhiyitvā、samecca、sametvā。巴利
Iiccasmā parassa tvāssa cco vā hoti; adhicca, adhiyitvā, samecca, sametvā.
从 dis 之后,〔tvā 后缀变为〕 vāna 或 vā,且 sa——。巴利
Disā vānavā sa ca-.
从 disā 或 disa 的 tvā 后缀,可成为 vāna 或 vā;而 disa 的 sa 音,依其结合而存在;sa 的自身形式是为了排除后一词形;disvāna、disvā、passitvā——为何说“未见他人之过失”?因为指示性的 tvā 后缀省略;如是 laddhā(na) dhana 等例中。巴利
Disato tvāssa vānavā honti vā, disassa ca sakāro taṃ santiyogena; sassa savidhānaṃ pararūpabādhanatthaṃ; disvāna, disvā, passitvā–-kathaṃ nādaṭṭhā parato dosanti? Ñāpakātvāssa valopo; evaṃ laddhā(na) dhanantiādisu.
这是辅音的——巴利
Ei byañjanassa-.
在表行为义的词之后,若后缀以辅音开头,则可选择性地替换为“ñi”;例如:bhuñjituṃ(为食)、hottu(愿成)。此处“辅音开头”指的是什么?譬如pācako(厨者)。巴利
Kriyatthā parassa byañjanādippaccayassa ñi vā hoti; bhuñjituṃ, hottu; byañjanassāti kiṃ? Pācako.
rā 之后,nassa 变为 ṇo——巴利
Rā nassa ṇo-.
表行为义的词根以“rā”结尾时,其后缀中的“na”变为“ṇa”;例如:araṇaṃ、saraṇaṃ。巴利
Rāntato kriyatthā parassa paccayanakārassa ṇo hoti; araṇaṃ, saraṇaṃ.
不〔发生〕于 ntamānatyyādi 等词——巴利
Na ntamānatyyādinaṃ-.
位于“-r-”音之后,对于其他词根的现在分词主动态及中间态等语尾,词根末尾的“n”不替换为“ṇ”。例如:karonto(正在做,主动分词)、kurumāno(正在做,中间态分词);karonti(他们做)。巴利
Rāntato paresaṃ ntamānatyādīnaṃ nassa ṇo na hoti; karonto, kurumāno; karonti.
【规则】词根“gam”(去)、“yam”(给予)、“is”(欲求)、“ās”(坐)、“dis”(见)及类似词根,在现在分词主动态与现在分词中间态等语尾前,可增入“ccha”。——巴利
Gamayamisāsadisānaṃ vā cchaṅi-.
这些词根,在nta、māna等词尾之前,可插入ccha:gacchanto、gacchamāno、gacchati;yacchanto、yacchamāno、yacchati;icchanto、icchamāno、icchati;acchanto、acchamāno、acchati;dicchanto、dicchamāno、dicchati。“可”是何义?gamissati;由于限定分别,在其他某些情形中亦可?icchitabbaṃ、icchā、icchituṃ;acchitabbaṃ、acchatuṃ;其他词根依规则分别?pavecchati。巴利
Etesaṃ vā cchaṅi hoti ntamānatyādisu; gacchanto, gacchamāno, gacchati; yacchanto, yacchamāno, yacchati; icchanto, icchamāno, icchati; acchanto, acchamāno, acchati; dicchanto, dicchamāno, dicchati. Vāti kiṃ? Gamissati; vavatthita vihāsattenaññesu ca kvaci? Icchitabbaṃ, icchā, icchituṃ; acchitabbaṃ, acchatuṃ; aññesañca yogavibhāgā? Pavecchati.
Jaramarānaṃ 的 īyaṅi——巴利
Jaramarānamīyaṅi-.
这些词根在“nta”“māna”“tya”等词缀前,可插入“īya”的变化形;例如:“jīyanto”(正在衰老者)、“jīranto”(正在衰老者);“jīyamāno”(正在衰老者)、“jīramāno”(正在衰老者);“jīyati”(它衰老)、“jīrati”(它衰老);“mīyanto”(正在死亡者)、“maranto”(正在死亡者);“mīyamāno”(正在死亡者)、“maramāno”(正在死亡者);“mīyati”(它死亡)、“marati”(它死亡)。巴利
Etesamīyaṅi vā hoti ntamānatyādisu; jīyanto, jīranto; jīyamāno, jīramāno; jīyati, jīrati; mīyanto, maranto; mīyamāno, maramāno; mīyati, marati.
‘安置’即‘tiṭṭhapivā-’,意为使立、使住。巴利
Ṭhāpānaṃ tiṭṭhapivā-.
Ṭhā 与 pā 等(词根)在 nt、māna、ty 等(后缀)之前,可成为 tiṭṭha、piva 等;tiṭṭhanto、tiṭṭhamāno、tiṭṭhati;pivanto、pivati;还是 vā 呢?Ṭhāti、pāti。巴利
Ṭhapānaṃ tiṭṭhapivā honti vā ntamānatyādisu; tiṭṭhanto, tiṭṭhamāno, tiṭṭhati; pivanto, pivati; vātveva? Ṭhāti, pāti.
gam、vad、dad 等词根可替换为 ghamm、vajj、dajj——巴利
Gamavadadānaṃ ghammavajjadajjā-.
gam 等词的 ghamm 等替换形式,在 nt、māna、ty 等词缀前可(vā)发生;ghammanto、gacchanto;vajjanto、vadanto;dajjanto、dadanto。巴利
Gamādīnaṃ ghammādayo vā honti ntamānatyyādisu; ghammanto, gacchanto; vajjanto, vadanto; dajjanto, dadanto.
kar 的 sa 可替换为 kubba、kuru、kayirā——巴利
Karassa sossa kubbakurukayirā-.
karassa 与 okārassa 可依规则变为 kubbā 等,用于 nt、māna、ti 等之前;kubbanto、kayiranto、karonto;kubbamāno、kurumāno、kayiramāno、karāṇo;kubbati、kayirati、karoti;kubbate、kurute、kayirate——由于限定性替换规则,此规则多用于 māna 与 paracchakka 之前为 kuru,偶尔用于 pubbacchakka?Agghaṃ kurutu no bhavaṃ;依“sossāti”之说,这些仅用于主动语态。巴利
Karassa saokārassa kubbādayo vā honti ntamānatyādisu; kubbanto, kayiranto, karonto; kubbamāno, kurumāno, kayiramāno, karāṇo; kubbati, kayirati, karoti; kubbate, kurute, kayirate–-vacatthitavibhāsattā vādhikārassa bhiyyo mānaparacchakkesukuru, kvavideva pubbacchakke? Agghaṃ kurutu no bhavaṃ; sossāti vuttattā kattari yevime.
Gahassa 的 gheppa〔替换〕。巴利
Gahassa gheppo-.
gahassa 可作 gheppa;在 ntamānatyādi 等后缀中〔亦同〕;gheppanto、gheppamāno、gheppati——若作 vā 则不然?gaṇhāti。巴利
Gahassa vā gheppoti ntamānatyādisu; gheppanto, gheppamāno, gheppati–-vātveva? Gaṇhāti.
ṇo 替换 niggahita——巴利
Ṇo niggahitassa-.
若无持有,则无能持;应当持、能持、正在持。巴利
Gahassa niggahatassa ṇo hoti; gaṇhitabbaṃ, gaṇhituṃ, gaṇhanto.
至此,在《目犍连语法》的《vutti》中,第五章 khādikaṇḍa 结束。巴利
Iti moggallāne vyākaraṇe vuttiyaṃ khādikaṇḍo pañcamo.
于现在时,tiantisithamimatñante sevhñemhe——巴利
Vattamāne tiantisithamimatñante sevhñemhe-.
于现在时中,对于已开始而未完成的行为,从现在时动词词根生起 ti 等词尾;gacchati、gacchanti、gacchasi、gacchatha、gacchāmi、gacchāma;gacchate、gacchante、gacchase、gacchavhe、gacche、gacchamhe——为何说 pure adhammo dippati, purā marāmiti?因为现在时本身被确立为正在发生,以彼邻近者之摄取而摄受;或由 pure、purā 等词,未来性被理解,那时它成为现在时;或者这是时间的变异;因为 ti 等词尾在其他时间也普遍存在?“Santesu pariguhāmi mā ca kiñci ito adaṃ, kāyayassa bhedā abhisamparāyaṃ sahavyataṃ gacchati vāsavassa, anekajātisaṃsāraṃ sandhāvissaṃ, ativelaṃ namassissanti”。巴利
Vattamānñāraddhāparisamatte atthe vattamānato kriyatthā tyādayo hontī; gacchati, gacchanti, gacchasi, gacchatha, gacchāmi, gacchāma; gacchate, gacchante, gacchase, gacchavhe, gacche, gacchamhe –-kathaṃ pure adhammo dippati, purā marāmiti? Vattamānasseva vattumiṭṭhattā, taṃsamīpassataggahaṇena gahaṇā; purepurāsaddehi vā anāgatattāvagamyate, tadā tassa vattamānattā; kālavyattayo vā eso; bhavanteva hi kālantare’pi tyādayo bāhulakā?‘‘Santesu pariguhāmi mā ca kiñci ito adaṃ, kāyayassa bhedā abhisamparāyaṃ sahavyataṃ gacchati vāsavassa, anekajātisaṃsāraṃ sandhāvissaṃ, ativelaṃ namassissanti‘‘.
生命存者,灭者,尚存者,尚未灭者,寿者,诸所能守护者,如是诸相皆存在。巴利
Bhavassati ssatissantissasissathassāmissāmassatessante ssasessavhessaṃssāmhe-.
将来时中,对于尚未发生的动作,由动词词根衍生出 ssati 等词尾;gamissati、gamissanti、gamissasi、gamissatha、gamissāmi、gamissāma;gamissate、gamissante、gamissase、gamissavhe、gamissaṃ、gamissāmhe。巴利
Bhavissati anāraddhe atthe vattamānato kriyatthā ssatyādayo honti; gamissati, gamissanti, gamissasi, gamissatha, gamissāmi, gamissāma; gamissate, gamissante, gamissase, gamissavhe, gamissaṃ, gamissāmhe.
于名词中,在 garahā 与 vimbhaya 两词上——巴利
Nāme garahāvimbhayesu-.
当名词词干作为不变词,表达责备与惊叹时,有 ssati 等词尾;这些确实会自称是善法;诸比丘,那个愚人确实不会对众生有悲悯;诸比丘,那个愚人怎么会用纯泥造小屋呢;愚人,在我宣说离欲之法时,你确实会生起贪欲;苏丁那贤友,确实有隔夜的粥可食,确实此处也有呵责的去除。惊叹?——确实奇妙,确实稀有,出家人确实安住于寂静的安住方式,因为一个有想、醒着的人,对五百辆货车接连驶过,竟既看不见,也听不到声音;奇妙啊,盲人要爬山;聋人要听声。巴利
Nāmasadde nipāte sati garahāyaṃ vimbhaye ca gamyamānessatyādayo honti; ime hi nāma kalyāṇadhammā paṭijānissanti; na hi nāma bhikkhave tassa moghapurisassapāṇesu anuddayā bhavissati; kathañhi nāma so bhikkhave moghapuriso sabbamattikāmayaṃ kuṭikaṃ karissati; tattha nāma tvaṃ moghapurisamayā virāgāya dhamme desite sarāgāya vetessasi, atthi nāmatāta sudinna ābhidosikaṃ kummāsaṃ paribhuñjissasi, atthiyevihāpi nindāvagamo. Vimbhaye?- Acchariyaṃ vata bho abbhūtaṃ vata bho santena vata bho pabbajitā vihārenaviranti, yatra hi nāma saññī samāno jāgaro pañcamattānī sakaṭasatāni nissāya nissāya atikkantāni neva dakkhiti, na pana saddaṃ sossati; acchariyaṃ andho nāma pabbatamārohissati; badhiro nāma saddaṃ sossati.
已生者中,īuṃ、otthembha、āū、sevhaṃ、ambhe——巴利
Bhute īuṃotthembhāāūsevhaṃambhe-.
于过去时中,从表示已完成的动作之现在〔时〕,动词词干有 ī 等〔词尾〕;agamī, agamuṃ, agamo, agamittha, agamiṃ, agamimhā;agamā, agamū, agamise, agamivhaṃ, agama, agamimhe——过去时通称之意亦于非当日过去时?Suvo ahosi ānando.巴利
Bhute parisamattñatthe vattamānato kriyatthā īādayo honti; agamī, agamuṃ, agamo, agamittha, agamiṃ, agamimhā; agamā, agamū, agamise, agamivhaṃ, agama, agamimhe–-bhuta sāmaññavacanicchāyamanajjatanepi? Suvo ahosi ānando.
非现在时:表示行为尚未完成的样态。巴利
Anajjatane āūotthaamhātthatthuṃsevhaṃiṃmbhase-.
于非当日过去时中,为表示已发生之事,从现在时动词词根产生 ā 等词尾。巴利
Avijjamānajjatane bhute’tthe vattamānato kriyatthā āādayo honti.
知而起身,知而躺卧,
此为今日此时,或白昼,或夜半时分。巴利
Āñāyyā ca uṭṭhānā āñāyyā ca saṃvesanā, Esajjatano kālo aharūbhayataḍḍharattaṃ vā;
Agamā, agamū, agamo, agamattha, agama, agamamhā; agamittha, agamatthuṃ, agamase, agamavhaṃ, gamiṃ, agamamhase; 他词之义为何?今日或昨日 agamāsi。巴利
Agamā, agamū, agamo, agamattha, agama, agamamhā; agamittha, agamatthuṃ, agamase, agamavhaṃ, gamiṃ, agamamhase; aññapadattho kiṃ? Ajja hiyyo vā agamāsi.
于过去时中,o、ettha、aṃ、bha、ttha、re、ttho、vho、imhe——巴利
Parokkhe oetthaambhattharetthovhoimhe-.
于非现前之过去义,从cattamāna〔过去分词〕有kriyattha〔动词义〕的ā等词尾;jagāma, jagamu, jagame, jagamittha, jagama, jagamimha; jagamittha, jagamire, jagamittho, jagamivho, jagami, jagamimhe. –––––––––––––––––––-巴利
Apaccakkhe bhutānajjatane’tthe cattamānato kriyatthā aādayo honti; jagāma, jagamu, jagame, jagamittha, jagama, jagamimha; jagamittha, jagamire, jagamittho, jagamivho, jagami, jagamimhe. –––––––––––––––––––-
心散乱、颠倒、遍执著者,即使自己所作之业在已生起之时未被觉知,而由推论得知者,从事实而言即是parokkhā;由此,即使在最上之事中,也有应用的可能。巴利
Mūḷhavikkhittabyāsattacittonattanāpi kriyā katābhinibbattikāle’nupaladdhā samānā elenānumīyamānā parokkhāca vatthuto; tenuttamavsaye’pi payogasambhavo.
以 eyyādi 替换,或于 optative 中:ssā、ssaṃ、ssu、ssessa、tha、ssaṃ、ssaṃ、mhā、ssatha、ssiṃ、ssu、ssa、sesa、vhe、ssiṃ、ssāma、ase——巴利
Eyyādo vātipattiyayaṃ ssāssaṃsussessathassaṃssamhāssatha ssiṃsussasessavhessiṃssāma ase-.
Eyyā 等(后缀)在 kriyātipatti(违实/未实现)语境中,ssā 等(后缀)可(vā)出现;由于 vidhura 后缀或不变词,或由于动作的 kāraṇavekallato(因缺失),动作的 patana(落空)anipphatti(不成就)即 kriyātipatti;而这些 ssā 等(后缀)只在 sāmatthiya(能力)的过去与未来时中发生,不在现在时中,于此 kriyātipatti 的 sambhavā(可能)中。巴利
Eyyādo visaye kriyātipattiyaṃ ssādayo honti vibhāsā; vidhurappaccayopanipātato kāraṇavekallato vā kriyāyāti patanamanipphatti kriyātipatti; ete ca ssādayo sāmatthiyātītānāgatesveva honti, na vattamāne, tatra kriyātipattya sambhavā.
Sace paṭhamavaye pabbajjaṃ alabhissā, arahā abhavissā; dakkhiṇena ce agamissā, na sakaṭaṃ pariyābhavissā—— dakkhiṇena ce agamissaṃsu, agamisse, agamissatha, agamissaṃ, agamissamhā, agamissatha, agamissiṃsu, agamissase, agamissavhe, agamissiṃ, agamissāma ase—— na sakaṭaṃ pariyābhavissā。为什么要说 vā?Dakkhiṇena ce gamissati, na sakaṭaṃ pariyābhavissati。巴利
Sace paṭhamavaye pabbajjaṃ alabhissā, arahā abhavissā; dakkhiṇena ce agamissā, na sakaṭaṃ pariyābhavissā- dakkhiṇena ce agamissaṃsu, agamisse, agamissatha, agamissaṃ, agamissamhā, agamissatha, agamissiṃsu, agamissase, agamissavhe,agamissiṃ, agamissāma ase- na sakaṭaṃ pariyābhavissā. Vāti kiṃ? Dakkhiṇena ce gamissati, na sakaṭaṃ pariyābhavissati.
于因与果中,它们可……eyya、eyyuṃ、eyyāsi、eyyātha、eyyāmi、eyyāma、etha、eraṃ、etho、eyyavho、eyyaṃ、eyyāmhe——巴利
Hetuphalesveyyaeyyuṃeyyāsaeyyāthaeyyāmieyyāmaetha eraṃethoeyyavhoeyyaṃeyyāmhe-.
于作为因的动词与作为果的动词中,从现在时态,kriyattha 之后可接 eyyā 等词尾。巴利
Hetubhutāyaṃ phalabhutāyañca kriyāyaṃ vattamānato kriyatthāeyyādayo vā honti.
若诸行是常,则不应灭;若向南行,则车不应倾覆——若向南行,gaccheyyāsi、gaccheyyātha、gaccheyyāmi、gaccheyyāma;gacchetha、gaccheraṃ、gacchetho、gaccheyyavho、gaccheyyaṃ、gaccheyyāmhe——车不应倾覆;有与行是因,不灭与不倾覆是果——此处为何不成立?——Hantīti palāyati、vassatīti dhāvati、hanissatīti palāyissatīti?正因itisadda本身已显示因与有因性,vāti何用?若向南行,车则不应倾覆。巴利
Sace saṃkhārā niccā bhaveyyuṃ, na nirujjheyyuṃ; dakkhineṇana ce gaccheyya, na sakaṭaṃ pariyābhaveyya-dakkhiṇena ce gaccheyyuṃ, gaccheyyāsi, gaccheyyātha, gaccheyyāmi, gaccheyayyāma; gacchetha, gaccheraṃ, gacchetho, gaccheyyavho, gaccheyyaṃ, gaccheyyāmhe- na sakaṭaṃ pariyābhaveyya; bhavanaṃ gamanañca hetu, anirujjhanaṃ pariyābhavanañca phalaṃ–-iha kasmā na hoti?- Hantīti palāyati, vassatīti dhāvati, hanissatīti palāyissatīti? Itisaddeneva hetuhetumantatāyaya jotitattā vāti kiṃ dakkhiṇena ce gamissati, na sakaṭaṃ pariyā bhavissati.
于 Pañhapatthanāvidhisū 中——巴利
Pañhapatthanāvidhisū-.
“问”即询问、考量、审察、抉择应作之事;“求”即祈愿所愿圆满;“规则”是方法、运用,于诸行中的施行。此规则分为两种:依恭敬与不恭敬而分,以及依所缘境差别而分。所缘虽有别,然皆不越此二种。巴利
Pañho-sampucchanaṃ sampadhāraṇā nirūpanā kāriyanicchayanaṃ; patthanā-yāvanamiṭṭhāsiṃsanañca; vidhānaṃ vidhi niyojanaṃ kriyāsu vyāpāraṇā; sā ca duvidhāva?- Sādarānādaravasena, visayabhedena bhinnāyapi tadubhayānativattanato.
在这些问等(语法范畴)中,从动词义而言,有-eyya等(祈愿语气形式);在疑问中?——贤者岂可遍学戒律,抑或学法?——我当去伍波萨他,抑或不去?在祈愿中?——愿我于佛前得受出家,愿我得受达上;愿我见彼百年无病。在命令(规定)中?——贤者当煮饭,贤者当作福业,贤者当于此食,贤者当于此坐,贤者当教幼童——即使在允许与规定之时亦成立,于彼处亦由规定而了知;在允许中?——你应如是作。在适时中?——你当作已作之事,是你作事之时;若僧团适时,僧团当作伍波萨他;世尊,此是其时,善逝,此是其时,世尊当为弟子制定学处——在派遣中亦欲?——贤者,你当往村庄。巴利
Etesu pañhādisu kriyatthato eyyādayo honti; pañhe?-Kimāyasmā vinayampariyāpuṇeyya,udāhu dhammaṃ?; Gaccheyyaṃ vāhaṃ uposathaṃ, na vā gaccheyyaṃ?, Patthanāyaṃ?- Labheyyāhakakambhante bhagavato santike pabbajjaṃ, labheyyaṃ upasampadaṃ; passeyyaṃ taṃ vassasataṃ arogaṃ. Vidhimhi?-Bhavaṃ pattaṃ paceyya, bhavaṃ puññaṃ kareyya, iha bhavaṃ bhuñjeyya, iha bhavaṃ nisīdeyya, māṇavakaṃ bhavaṃ ajjhāpeyya–-anuññāpattakālesupi siddhāva, tatthāpi vidhippatītito; anuññāyaṃ?Evaṃkareyyāsi. Pattakāle?- Kaṭaṃ kareyyāsi, patto te kālo kaṭakaraṇe; yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ saṅgho uposathaṃ kareyya; etassa bhagavā kālo, etassa sugata kālo, yambhagavā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeyya–-pesane’picchanti?- Gāmaṃ tvaṃ bhaṇe gaccheyyāsi.
例:Tuattuhithamimataṃantaṃssuvhoñāmase——巴利
Tuattuhithamimataṃantaṃssuvhoñāmase-.
于问答等处,这些由动词义而来;由动词义而来;yacchatu、gacchantu、gacchāhi、gacchatha、gacchāmi、gacchāma、gacchataṃ、gacchantaṃ、gacchassu、gacchavho、gacche、gacchāmase——于问句?Kinnu balu ho vyākaraṇamadhiyassu?于祈愿处?Dadāhi me、jivatu bhavaṃ。于规则处?Kaṭaṃ karotu bhavaṃ、puññaṃ karotu bhavaṃ、iha bhavaṃ bhuñjatu、ihabhavaṃ nisīdatu、uddisatu bhante bhagavā pātimokkhā。于派遣处?Gaccha bhaṇe gāmaṃ。于允许处?Evaṃ karohi。于适时处?Kālo’yaṃ te mahāvīra uppajja mātukucchiyaṃ。巴利
Pañhādisvete honti kriyatthato; kriyatthato; yacchatu, gacchantu, gacchāhi, gacchatha, gacchāmi, gacchāma, gacchataṃ, gacchantaṃ, gacchassu, gacchavho, gacche, gacchāmase–-pañhe?- Kinnu balu ho vyākaraṇamadhiyassu?. Patthanāyaṃ?- Dadāhi me, jivatu bhavaṃ. Visimhi?-Kaṭaṃ karotu bhavaṃ, puññaṃ karotu bhavaṃ, iha bhavaṃ bhuñjatu, ihabhavaṃ nisīdatu, uddisatu bhante bhagavā pātimokkhā. Pesane?- Gaccha bhaṇe gāmaṃ. Anumatiyaṃ?Evaṃ karohi. Pattakāle?-Kālo’yaṃ te mahāvīra uppajja mātukucchiyaṃ.
Sattyarahesveyyādi——于 sattiya、araha 等中 eyya 等〔词尾〕——巴利
Sattyarahesveyyādi-.
于能力(sattiyaṃ)义与适合(arahatthe)义中,表行为义(kriyatthā)的 eyya 等词尾出现;尊者确实能治理王国(bhavaṃ khalu rajjaṃ kareyya),尊者有能力(bhavaṃ satto);适合开始者(arabho)。巴利
Sattiyaṃ arahatthe ca kriyatthā. Eyyādayo honti; bhavaṃ khalu rajjaṃ kareyya, bhavaṃ satto; arabho.
在推测义中,可(用)vā-。巴利
Sambhāvane vā-.
‘于可能义,当依根而说时,eyya等词尾可随宜而现’——意指在可能义被领会、且以根词宣说时,eyya等词尾随宜出现。例如:api pabbataṃ sirasā bhindeyya(纵以头劈山,亦可破之)。至于行为失效与可能等情形?——‘纵被雷电击中,我亦信其不亡……我信、我受持、我认可:尊者或许受食;尊者将受食;尊者已受食。’于行为失效与可能的情形:‘nābhujissaṃ bhavaṃ(尊者未曾受食)’。巴利
Sambhāvane gamyamāne dhātunā vuccamāne ca eyyādayohonti vibhāsā; api pabbataṃ sirasā bhindeyya. Kriyātipattiyantussādi?- Asaniyāpi hato nāpatissā sambhāvemi saddahāmiavakappemi bhuñjeyya bhavaṃ; bhujissati bhavaṃ, abhuñji bhavaṃ. Krayātipattiyantussādi-sambhāvemi nābhujissaṃ bhavaṃ.
在与 mā 连用时,〔动词采用〕ī、ā 等词尾——巴利
Māyoge īāādi-.
于 mā 与 yoga 存在时,ī 等以及 ā 等可(vā)成为;māssupunapi evarūpamakāsi,mā bhavaṃ agamā vanaṃ;vā 是何?Mā tekāmaguṇe bhamassu cittaṃ,mā tvaṃ karissasi,mā tvaṃ kareyyāsi——此乃表示不可能时态之义;buddho’bhavissatīti 以词与词之间关联而得知未来时态,如是所作 kaṭo svebhavissati,bhāvi kaccamāsīti;lunāhi lunāhitvevāyaṃ lunāti,lunassu lunassutvevāyaṃ lunātīti——此即 tvā 等之中等语尾人称词尾之分别;此所说为——Evamesa turito aññe’pi niyojento viya kiriyaṃ karotīti;如是 lunātha lunāthātvevāyaṃ lunāti,lunavho lunavho tvevāyaṃ lunāti;如是于其他时态中亦 lunāhi lunāhitvevāyaṃ aluni,alunā,lulāva,lunissatīti;如是于 ssu 中亦应结合——如是于集合中亦 maṭhamaṭa,vihāramaṭetvevāyamaṭati;maṭhamaṭassu,vihāramaṭassutvevāyamaṭati——于差别业处中,仅一般语词之遍及故,不适用?Odanaṃ bhuñja,yāgumpiva,dhānā khādetvāvāyamajjhoharati。巴利
Māyoge sati īādayo āādayo ca vā honti; māssupunapi evarūpamakāsi, mā bhavaṃ agamā vanaṃ; vāti kiṃ? Mā tekāmaguṇe bhamassu cittaṃ, mā tvaṃ karissasi, mā tvaṃ kareyyāsi–-asakakālattho’yamārambho; buddho’bhavissatīti padantara sambandhena anāgatakālatā patiyate, evaṃ kato kaṭo svebhavissati, bhāvi kaccamāsīti; lunāhi lunāhitvevāyaṃ lunāti, lunassu lunassutvevāyaṃ lunātīti tvādīnamevetaṃ majjhimapuri sekavacanānamābhikkhaññe vibbavanaṃ; idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti?-Evamesa turito aññe’pi niyojento viya kiriyaṃ karotīti; evaṃ lunātha lunāthātvevāyaṃ lunāti, lunavho lunavho tvevāyaṃ lunāti; tathā kālattaresupi lunāhi lunāhitvevāyaṃ aluni, alunā, lulāva, lunissatīti; evaṃ ssumhi ca yojanīyaṃ–-tathā samuccaye’pi maṭhamaṭa, vihāramaṭetvevāyamaṭati; maṭhamaṭassu, vihāramaṭassutvevāyamaṭati–-byāpārabhede tu sāmaññavacanasseva byāpakattā anuppayogo bhavati? Odanaṃ bhuñja, yāgumpiva, dhānā khādetvāvāyamajjhoharati.
前六与后六中,于单数与复数、于 tumha、amha、其余者,majjhima、uttama、paṭhama 各有二——巴利
Pubbaparacchakkānamekānekesu tumhāmhasesesu dvedve majjhimuttamapaṭhamā-.
于表示“你”“我”之词及表示其他者之词的单数与复数诸格中,前述六时与后述六时依次各有两两成对的词尾,以表达动作义;此“最上之称”依其自性,在第三双数格中为惯用——tvaṃ gacchasi, tumhe gacchatha, tvaṃ gacchase, tumhe gacchavhe; tvaṃ gacchasi, tumhe gacchatha, tvaṃ gacchase, tumhe gacchavhe; ahaṃ gacchāmi, mayaṃ gacchāma, ahaṃ gacche, mayaṃ gacchāmhe; so gacchati, te gacchanti, so gacchate, te gacchante.巴利
Ekanekesutumhāmhasaddavacanīyesu tadaññasaddavacanīyesu ca kārakesupubbacchakkānaṃ paracchakkānaṃ majjhimuttamapaṭhamā dve dve honti yathākkamaṃ kriyatthā; uttamasaddo’yaṃ sabhāvato tatiyaduke ruḷho–-tvaṃ gacchasi, tumhe gacchatha, tvaṃ gacchase, tumhe gacchavhe; tvaṃgacchasi, tumhe gacchatha, tvaṃ gacchase, tumhe gacchavhe; ahaṃgacchāmi, mayaṃ gacchāma,ahaṃ gacche, mayaṃ gacchāmhe; so gacchati, te gacchanti, so gacchate, te gacchante.
依能力而获得词尾的〔形式〕,即使在 tumha、amha 的其余〔形式〕不成为粗俗时,也照样出现——gacchasī、gacchatha、gacchase、gacchavhe;gacchāmi、gacchāma、gacche、gacchāmhe;gacchati、gacchanti、gacchate、gacchante。巴利
Sāmatthiyā laddhantā appaṭhujjamānesupi tumhāmhasesesu bhavanti–-gacchasī, gacchatha, gacchase, gacchavhe; gacchāmi, gacchāma, gacche, gacchāmhe; gacchati,gacchanti, gacchate, gacchante.
于 ā、ī、ssā 等〔后缀〕处,可〔换为〕aña——。巴利
Āīssādisvaña vā-.
以 ā 起首的词尾、以 ī 起首的词尾,以及以 ssā 起首的词尾,对于表动作义之词,可替换为 añ,ña 为附标——agamā,gamā;agamī,gamī;agamissā,gamissā。巴利
Āādo īādo ssāādo ca kriyatthassa vā aña hoti, ñakāro’nubandho–-agamā, gamā; agamī, gamī; agamissā, gamissā.
以ā等起首的词尾中,brū的替换形式为āho。brū的替换形式为āho,在以ā等起首的词尾中;āha、āhu。巴利
Aādisvāho brūssa-. Brūssa āho hoti aādisu; āha, āhu.
Bhussa 之后为 cuka-。巴利
Bhussa cuka-.
在“ā”等音之前,词根“bhu”变为“cuka”;其中辅音“k”为附缀辅音,元音“u”为辅助发音之用;例如“babhuva”(曾经存在)。巴利
Aādisu bhussa cuka hoti; kakāro’nubandho; ukāro uccāraṇattho; babhuva.
前面(的音节)替换为“a”。巴利
Pubbassa a-.
在 A 等之前、重复时,前面 bhū 的〔元音〕变成 a;babhuva。巴利
Aādisu dvitte pubbassa bhussaa hoti; babhuva.
ussaṃsu 或 hā 可——巴利
Ussaṃsvāhā vā-.
Āhādesā〔由 āha 替换〕后面的 ussaṃsu 可有;āhaṃsu、āhu。巴利
Āhādesā parassौssaaṃsuvā hoti; āhaṃsu āhu.
Ty 与 antī 的 ṭa 与 ṭū——巴利
Tyantīnaṃ ṭaṭū-.
以 āha 替代时,其余以 ty 等结尾的(词)成为 ṭa 或 ṭu;ṭ 字适用于一切替代;āha、āhu。正因此,也(是)以 ty 等结尾(词)中 brū 的 āho 的例证。巴利
Āhā paresaṃ tiantīnaṃ ṭaṭū honti; ṭakārā sabbādesatthā; āha, āhu. Atoyeva ca ñāpakā tiantisu ca brūssāho.
于 ī 等之前,vaca 的 oma——巴利
Īādovacassoma-.
凡以“ī”等元音开头的“vaca”语根,其词尾替换为“oma”;“m”字母为连缀标志;由此得“avoca”形。何以要说“以ī等开头”?若不设此条件,便成“avaca”(而非“oma”替代形)。巴利
Īādisuvacassa oma hoti; makāro’nubandhā; avoca; īādoti kiṃ? Avaca.
在ma、me等词尾前且无辅音重叠时,dā可变为daṃ——巴利
Dāssa daṃ vā mamesvadvitte-.
词根“dā”(给予)在现在时、非表意愿的语境中,当位于第一人称单复数词缀之前时,可替换为“da”或“daṃ”;由此形成“dammi”“demi”(我给予)与“damma”“dema”(我们给予)。问:为何要简别“非表意愿”?答:因为“dadāmi”“dadāma”等形式属于表意愿的语境,不适用此规则,故应排除。巴利
Advitte vattamānassa dāssa daṃ vā hoti mimesu; dammi,demi; damma, dema. Añcitteti kiṃ? Dadāmi. Dadāma.
kar 的〔词尾〕sso 与 ssuṃ——巴利
Karassa sossakuṃ-.
动词词根‘kar’(做)的元音‘o’,在‘mi’‘me’等词尾之前,可替换为‘ku’;例如:‘kummi’、‘kumma’,即‘karomi’与‘karoma’的变体。巴利
Karassa saokārassa kuṃ vā hoti mimesu; kummi, kumma; karomi, karoma.
Kā——于 īādisu。巴利
Kā īādisu-.
动词词根‘kar’的元音‘o’,在以‘ā’等元音开头的词尾之前,可替换为‘kā’;例如:过去式‘akāsi’(亦可作‘akari’)、‘akaṃsu’(亦可作‘akariṃsu’)、‘akā’(亦可作‘akarā’)。巴利
Karassa saokārassakā hoti vā īādisu; akāsi, akari; akaṃsu, akariṃsu; akā, akarā.
而 hāssa 的 āhaṅi 以 ssa——。巴利
Hāssacāhaṅi ssena-.
对于 karassa、sossa、hāssa 等,将来时可用词缀 -ssa,亦可视作与 -ss 相连:如 kāhati 即 karissati;akāhā 即 akarissā;hāhati 即 hāyissati;āhāhā 即 ahāyissā。巴利
Karassasossahāssaca āhaṅi vā hoti ssena saha; kāhati, karissati; akāhā, akarissā;hāhatī, hāyissati; āhāhā, ahāyissā.
词根 cchaṅi- 有获得、接受、抓取等义。巴利
Labhavasacchidabhidarudānaṃ cchaṅi-.
Labha 等词的 cchaṅi 可替代,与 ssa 一起;alacchā、alabhissā、lacchati、labhissati;avacchā、avasissā;vacchati、vasissati;cchecchā、acchindissā;checchati。Chindissati;hecchā、bhindissā;bhecchati、bhindissati;arucchā、arodissā;rucchati、rodissati。于其他处,chida 的 cchaṅi 亦可,依语法分析?——Acchecchuṃ、acchindiṃsu。其他词亦可?——Gacchaṃ、gacchissaṃ。巴利
Labhādīnaṃ cchaṅi vā hoti ssena saha; alacchā, alabhissā, lacchati, labhissati; avacchā, avasissā; vacchati, vasissati; cchecchā, acchindissā; checchati. Chindissati; hecchā, bhindissā; bhecchati,bhindissati; arucchā, arodissā; rucchati, rodissati. Aññasmimpi chidassa vā cchaṅi yogavibhāgā?- Acchecchuṃ, acchindiṃsu. Aññesaṃ va?-Gacchaṃ, gacchissaṃ.
例:Bhujamucavacavisānaṃ kkhaṅi——。巴利
Bhujamucavacavisānaṃ kkhaṅi-.
对于 bhuj 等词,与 ssa 结合时,可成为 kkhaṅi;abhokkhā、abhuñjissā;bhokkhati、bhujissati;amokkhā、amuñcissā;mokkhatiṃ、muñcissati;acakkhā、avacissā;cakkhati。Vacissati;pāvekkhā、pāvisissā;pavekkhati、pavisissati。对于 vis 等词,依据瑜伽分别,亦可为 kkhaṅi?——Pāvekkhi、pāvisi。巴利
Bhujādīnaṃ kkhaṅi vā hoti ssena saha; abhokkhā, abhuñjissā; bhokkhati, bhujissati; amokkhā, amuñcissā; mokkhatiṃ muñcissati; acakkhā, avacissā; cakkhati. Vacissati; pāvekkhā, pāvisissā; pavekkhati, pavisissati. Visassāññasmimpi vā kkhaṅi yogavibhāgā?-Pāvekkhi, pāvisi.
于 ā、ī 等之后,有 harassa——。巴利
Āīādisu harassā-.
于 ā、ī 等〔后缀〕之前,h 的〔替换为〕ā,且〔该 ā〕为短音;ahā、aharā;abhāsi、abhari。巴利
Āādoīādo ca harassaā hoticā; ahā, aharā; abhāsi, abhari.
Ā、ā 等之后,gamissa 有时成为 gamissā;agā、agamā;agā、agami。saṃsa 之后,还有 chaṅi——巴利
Āādoīādo ca gamissā hoti vā; agā, agamā; agā,agami. Saṃsassa ca chaṅi-.
Saṃsa 与 gami 在 ā 等词尾前,可变为 chaṅ;aḍañchā, aḍaṃsā; aḍañchi, aḍaṃsi; agañchā, agacchā, agañchi, agacchi。巴利
Saṃsassa ca gamissa ca chaṅi vā hoti āīādisu; aḍañchā, aḍaṃsā; aḍañchi,aḍaṃsi; agañchā, agacchā, agañchi, agacchi.
hū 的 sa、he、he、hi、ho、hī 诸替换形式,在 sacca 等词之后——巴利
Hūssahehehihohī ssaccādo-.
Hū 在 ssati 等词尾前变为 he 等;hessati、hehissati、hohissati。巴利
Hūssa hñādayo honti ssaccādo; hessati, hehissati, hohissati.
于 ṇā 等词中为短音——巴利
Ṇānāsu rasso-.
于 kaṇaka 等〔词〕中,动词词干之短音〔出现〕;kiṇāti、dhunāti。巴利
Kaṇakanāsu kriyatthassarasso hoti; kiṇāti, dhunāti.
‘ā’、‘ī’、‘ū’、‘mhā’、‘ssa’、‘smhā’、‘naṃ’等词尾,可选择替换。巴利
Āīūmhāssāssamhānaṃ vā-.
此类词尾亦可取短音;其变化如下:gama、gamā;gami、gamī;gamu;gamimha、gamimhā;gamissa、gamissā;gamissamha、gamissamhā。巴利
Esaṃ vā rasso hoti; gama, gamā; gami, gamī; gamu; gamimha, gamimhā; gamissa, gamissā; gamissamha, gamissamhā.
Kusaruhehissa 变为 chi——。巴利
Kusaruhehissa chi-.
在“kusā”与“ruha”之后接续他人称词尾时,词中的“ī”可替换为“chi”。例如:akkocchi(亦作 akkosi,意为“他骂了”);abhirucchi(亦作 abhiruhi,意为“他喜爱了”)。巴利
Kusā ruhā ca parassa īssa chi vā hoti; akkocchi, akkosi; abhirucchi, abhiruhi.
以 A、Ī、SSA 等开头的辅音的 iña——巴利
Aīssaādīnaṃ byañjanassiña-.
为表达行为义,在他人词根中 a 等、ī 等及 ssa 等之后的辅音,可选择性替换为 iña;babhuvittha, abhavittha, abhavissā, anubhavissā, anubhavissati, anubhossati, (harissati) hassati。这些词为何如此?源自 bhavati;为何特别指明辅音的条件?因为 babhuva。巴利
Kriyatthā paresaṃ aādīnaṃ īādinaṃ ssaādīnava byañjanassैña hoti vibhāsā; babhuvittha,abhavittha, abhavissā, anubhavissā, anubhavissati, anubhossati, (harissati) hassati. Etesanti kiṃ? Bhavati; byañjanassāti kiṃ? Babhuva.
从 brū 而言,ti 替换为 īña——巴利
Brūto tissīña-.
于brū之后,为他人(parassa)的ti,可(vā)成为īña;bravīti,brūti。巴利
Brūto parassa tissa īña vā hoti; bravīti, brūti.
于动作义中,其后 kya 的 īñ 可有;pacīyati paccati。巴利
Kriyatthā parassakyassa īñvā hoti; pacīyati paccati.
Eyyāthassñaāīthānaṃ oaaṃtthatthovhoka-.巴利
Eyyāthassñaāīthānaṃ oaaṃtthatthovhoka-.
eyyātha 等词尾亦可依序成为 o 等;tumhe bhaveyyātho, bhaveyyātha;tvaṃ abhavissa, abhavisse;ahaṃ abhavaṃ, abhava;so abhavittha, abhavā;so abhavittho, abhavī;tumhe bhavathavho, bhavatha——与 āsa 相伴的 a 亦被采用——至于 tho,在词尾列表中唯与 tvā 等相关,或因依附于彼;作依存关系,乃造论者之惯例。巴利
Eyyāthādīnaṃ oādayo vā honti yathākkamaṃ; tumhe bhaveyyātho, bhaveyyātha; tvaṃ abhavissa, abhavisse; ahaṃ abhavaṃ, abhava; so abhavittha, abhavā; so abhavittho, abhavī; tumhe bhavathavho, bhavatha–-āsahavaritova akāro gayhate–-tho panante niddesā tvādisambandhīyeva, tasseva vā nissītattā; nissayayakaraṇampi hi suttakārāviṇṇaṃ.
Uṃssiṃsvaṃsu——巴利
Uṃssiṃsvaṃsu -.
乌姆的替换形式为 -iṃsu 或 -aṃsu;例词:agamiṃsu(他们去了)、agamaṃsu(他们去了)、agamuṃ(他们去了)。巴利
Umiccassa iṃsuaṃsu vā honti; agamiṃsu, agamaṃsu, agamuṃ.
以 -e 结尾的词(可)为 -suṃ——巴利
Emantā suṃ-.
从 ñā 代换和 o 代换,对于他者〔第三人称〕u 类词尾,可替换为 suṃ;nesuṃ、nayiṃsu;assosuṃ、assuṃ——为了说明代换性,故取 tta。巴利
Ñādesato oādesato ca parassa umiccassa suṃ vā hoti; nesuṃ, nayiṃsu; assosuṃ, assuṃ–-ādesattākhyā panatthaṃ ttaggahaṇaṃ.
于 hū 之后变成 resuṃ——巴利
Hūto resuṃ-.
Hūto 的第三人称 u 类词尾可变为 resuṃ;ahesuṃ、ahavuṃ。巴利
Hūto parassa umiccassa resuṃ vā hoti; ahesuṃ, ahavuṃ.
Ossa aitthattho——此义真实不虚巴利
Ossa aitthattho-.
“o”可替换为“a”等;tvaṃ abhava、abhavi、abhavittha、abhavittho、abhavo。巴利
Ossa aādayo vā honti; tvaṃ abhava, abhavi, abhavittha, abhavittho, abhavo.
“o”可替换为“si”;ahosi tvaṃ、ahuvo。巴利
Ossa si vā hoti; ahosi tvaṃ ahuvo.
长音之后的 ī 可替换为 si;akāsi,akā;adāsi,adā。巴利
Dīghato parassa īssa si vā hoti; akāsi, akā; adāsi, adā.
mhā、ttha 的 uña——。巴利
Mhātthānamuña-.
“mhā”可替换为“uñ”;例如:agamumhā、agamimhā;agamuttha、agamittha。巴利
Mhātthānamuñdvā hoti; agamumhā, agamimhā; agamuttha, agamittha.
iṃ 之后亦有 siña——。巴利
Iṃssa ca siña-.
在此处,iṃ 与 i 等词尾可为(vā),并在 mhā 词尾处多见;akāsiṃ、akariṃ;akāsimhā、akarimhā;akāsittha、akarittha。巴利
Imiccassa siña vā hoti mhātthānañca bahulaṃ; akāsiṃ, akariṃ; aakāsimhā, akarimhā;akāsittha, akarittha.
Eyyuṃ 的 ssa〔变为〕uṃ——。巴利
Eyyuṃssuṃ-.
eyyuṃ 这个词尾,其 uṃ 可替代;gacchuṃ,gaccheyyuṃ。巴利
Eyyumiccassa uṃ vā hoti; gacchuṃ, gaccheyyuṃ.
“hi”的尾音省略——巴利
Hissato lopo-.
于ato之后的hi的脱落,可(vā)发生;gaccha、gacchāhi——atoti kiṃ? Karohi.巴利
Ato parassa hissa lopo vā hoti; gaccha, gacchāhi–-atoti kiṃ? Karohi.
Kyassa sse-.巴利
Kyassa sse-.
Kyassa 亦可省略,或〔替换〕为 sse;andhabhavissā,anvabhuyissā,anubhavissati,anubhuyissati。巴利
Kyassa vā lopo hoti sse; andhabhavissā, anvabhuyissā, anubhavissati, anubhuyissati.
有-atthi 等欲求词时,ssu、sas、atha、saṃ 与 sāma 脱落。巴利
Atthiteyyādicchantaṃ ssusasathasaṃsāma -.
于 as 与 bhū 之后,其余以 eyya 起始的诸词尾依次成为 sā 等;assa、assu、assa、assatha、assaṃ、assāma。巴利
Asa-bhuvīccasmā paresaṃeyyādicchannaṃ sādayo honti yathākkamaṃ; assa, assu, assa, assatha, assaṃ, assāma.
开头的两个:iyā、iyuṃ——。巴利
Ādidvīnnamiyāiyuṃ-.
于“欲令如此”等句中,其开头的两个字,依序变为“iyā”和“iyuṃ”的形态;即“siyā”(单数)和“siyuṃ”(复数)。巴利
Atthiteyyādicchannaṃ ādibhūtānaṃ dvinnaṃ iyāisuṃ honti yathākkamaṃ; siyā, siyuṃ.
Tassa 的 tho——。巴利
Tassatho-.
在表示他人请求或祈愿的语境中,表“存在”义的词干其字母“ta”转变为“tha”,如 attha、atthu。巴利
Atthito parassa takārassa tho hoti; attha, atthu.
atthi 的 a 于 si、hi 等词尾前变为 aṭa;此 ṭa 适用于一切替换;asi、ahi。巴利
Atthissa aṭa hoti sihisu; ṭo sabbādesattho; asi, ahi.
“mimānaṃ”亦可源自“mhimhā”。巴利
Mimānaṃ vā mhimhā ca-.
于 atthi 之后,其他词的 mi、ma 可成为 mhi、mhā;由于与该者相连,atthi 的 a 成为 aṭa;amhi、asmi;amha、asma。巴利
Atthismā paresaṃ mimānaṃ mhimhā vā honti, taṃsantiyo gena tthissa aṭa ca; amhi,asmi; amha, asma.
在上述诸形中,as 词根的词干字母换成 sa,例如 asmi、asma,意在排除其他异体形式,以免后起规则与之相妨。巴利
Esu mimesuatthissa sakāro hoti; asmi, asma; pararūpabādhanatthaṃ.
当词尾为 ī 等时,元音当予延长。巴利
Īādo dīgho-.
atthi 的〔元音〕在 ī、ā 等〔词缀〕前变为长音;āsi、āsuṃ、āsi、āsittha、āsiṃ、āsimhā。巴利
Atthissa dīgho hoti īādimhi; āsi, āsuṃ, āsi, āsittha, āsiṃ, āsimhā.
于 hi、mi、me 诸词尾中,元音 a 变成长音。例如:pavāhi、pavāmi、pavāma;muyhāmi。巴利
Himimesvassa-. Akārassa dīgho hoti himimesu; pavāhi, pavāmi, pavāma; muyhāmi.
Sakā 后面的 ṇa,遇到以 ī、ā 等元音开头的词时,变成 kha。巴利
Sakā ṇāssa kha īādo-.
从 sakasmā 的 kaṇā 之后,当 ī 等音在后时,kha 变为 kho;asakkhi, asakkhiṃsu。巴利
Sakasmā kaṇāssa kho hoti ī ādisu; asakkhi, asakkhiṃsu.
于sse前,由自身词根变为kaṇāssa kho或不变;sakkhissā、sakkuṇissā;sakkhissati、sakkuṇissati。巴利
Sakasmā kaṇāssa kho vā bhoti sse; sakkhissā, sakkuṇissā; sakkhissati, sakkuṇissati.
在这些之中,于 suto 之后,keṇākaṇānaṃ 的 roṭa——。巴利
Tesu suto keṇākaṇānaṃ roṭa-.
在上述 ī 等及 sse 等词缀的情形中,词根 su(听闻)在其余情况下,则由 ke、ṇa、ka、ṇa 等词缀替换为 ro 及 ṭa。例如:assosi(他听到了)、asuṇi(他听到了);assossā(她将听到)、asuṇissā(她将听到);sossati(他将听到)、suṇissati(他将听到)。巴利
Tesu īādissesu suto paresaṃ keṇākaṇānaṃ roṭa hoti; assosi, asuṇi; assossā, asuṇissā; sossati, suṇissati.
Ñā 与 sana 的 nāya 于 ti 等前——巴利
Ñāssa sanāssa nāyo timhi-.
sanāssa与ñāssa在timhi中也可变为nāyo;nāyati。Jānāti。巴利
Sanāssa ñāssa nāyo vā hoti timhi; nāyati. Jānāti.
于 Ña 之前,jaṃ〔替换〕——。巴利
Ñamhi jaṃ-.
在ñā的替换中,sana的ñā变为jaṃ,或不变;jaññā,jāneyya。巴利
Ñādese sanāssa ñāssa jaṃ vā hoti; jaññā, jāneyya.
eyya 的 iyā 与 ñā 可替换——巴利
Eyyassiyāñā vā-.
在 Ñāto 之后,eyyassa 可变为 iyā 与 ñā;jāniyā、jaññā、jāneyya。巴利
Ñāto eyyassa iyāñā honti vā; jāniyā, jaññā, jāneyya.
于 īssa 等词之后,ka 与 na 的脱落——巴利
Īssaccādisu kanā lopo-.
由īādo与ssa二者而成的ñāto处,kan的脱落或可发生;aññasi、ajāni;ñassati、jānissati。巴利
Īādo ssaccādo ca ñāto kanā lopo vā hoti; aññasi, ajāni; ñassati, jānissati.
ssa 于业格中变为 hi——巴利
Ssassa hi kamme-.
已知 parassassa 于业格中可为 hoti;paññāyihiti、paññāyissatī,巴利
Ñāto parassassassa hi vā hoti kamme; paññāyihiti, paññāyissatī,
由此,后者的 ssa 可替换为 hi;ehiti、essati。巴利
Etismā parassassassahi hoti vā; ehiti, essati.
于 Hanā 之后,chekhā——巴利
Hanā chekhā-.
“han”词根的字母可替换为“ss”或“cch”;例如:hañchema(我们将打击)、hanissāma(我们将打击);paṭihaṃkhāmi(我将反击)、paṭihanissāmi(我将反击)。巴利
Hanā ssassa chekhā vā honti; hañchema, hanissāma; paṭihaṃkhāmi, paṭihanissāmi.
hā 之后的 ssa 可变为 ha;hāhati,chahissati。巴利
Hāto parassa ssassa ha hoti vā; hāhati, chahissati.
以 dakkha、kha、he、hi、ho、hī 这些,脱落——巴利
Dakkhakhahehihohīhi lopo-.
于 dakkha 等替代形式之后,ssa 可省略;dakkhati。Dakkhissati;sakkhati,sakkhissati;hehiti,hehissati;hohiti,hohissati。巴利
Dakkhādīhi ādesehi parassassassa lopo vā hoti; dakkhati. Dakkhissati; sakkhati, sakkhissati; hehiti, hehissati; hohiti, hohissati.
kayireyya、seyyum 等词的——巴利
Kayireyyasseyyumādīnaṃ-.
kayirā 之后,于 eyyuṃ 等词尾,eyya 发生脱落;kayiruṃ、kayirāsi、kayirātha、kayirāmi、kayirāma。巴利
Kayirā parasseyyumādīnameyyassa lopo hoti; kayiruṃ, kayirāsi, kayirātha, kayirāmi, kayirāma.
‘Kayirā’用于表示对他人的命令或对第三者的祈使,其词尾‘ṭā’构成命令式,例如‘sokayirā’意为“停止”。巴利
Kayirā parassa eyyassaṭā hoti; sokayirā.
Ethassa 的 eyya 变成 ā——巴利
Ethassā-.
Kayirā 之后 ethassa 成为 ā;kayirātha。巴利
Kayirā parassethassa ā hoti; kayirātha.
于‘labha-’之后,‘iṃ’与‘ī’之处,可换为‘thaṃ’与‘thā’——巴利
Labhā iṃīnaṃ thaṃthā vā-.
从labhati词根而言,这些语尾变为thaṃ、thā:alatthaṃ(我得了)、alabhiṃ(我得了);alattha(他得了)、alabhi(他得了)。巴利
Labhasmā iṃīiccesaṃ thaṃthā honti vā; alatthaṃ, alabhiṃ; alattha, alabhi.
Gurupubbā 之后、短音之前的 nte 与 ntīnaṃ 变为 re——巴利
Gurupubbā rassā re ntentīnaṃ-.
在前一音节为长(重)的情况下,对后面以-nt结尾的词,可变为re:gacchare, gacchanti;gacchare, gacchante;gamissare, gamissanti;gamissare, gamissante——“前一音节为长”者何?如pacanti。“短”者何?如honti。巴利
Gurupubbasmā rassā paresaṃ ntentīnaṃ re vā hoti; gacchare, gacchanti; gacchare, gacchante; gamissare, gamissanti; gamissare, gamissante–-gurupubbāti kiṃ? Pacanti. Rassāti kiṃ? Honti
Eyyeyyāseyyantaṃ ṭe——。巴利
Eyyeyyāseyyantaṃ ṭe-.
“eyya”等语尾亦可换作“e”。例如:“so kare”即“so kareyya”(他应做);“tvaṃ kare”即“tvaṃ kareyyāsi”(你应做);“ahaṃ kare”即“ahaṃ kareyyaṃ”(我应做)。巴利
Eyyādīnaṃ ṭe vā hoti; so kare, so kareyya; tvaṃ, kare, tvaṃ kareyyāsi; ahaṃ kare, ahaṃ kareyyaṃ.
“o”类造作词缀,于他者行为范畴中——巴利
Ovikaraṇassu paracchakke-.
Ovikaraṇassa 的 u 出现于 paracchakka 的范畴中;tanute。巴利
Ovikaraṇassa u hoti paracchakkavisaye; tanute.
或在前六处中的某一处——。巴利
Pubbacchakke vā kvaci-.
有时,在o类变化词尾前,元音可替换为u;例如vanuti、vanoti(均为“他爱/他渴望”)。巴利
Ovikaraṇassa u hoti vā kvaci pubbacchakke; vanuti, vanoti.
Eyyāmassemu 与——。巴利
Eyyāmassemu ca-.
“eyyā”可替换为“emu”,或附上“u”一同出现;例如:bhavemu(我们应存在)、bhaveyyāmu(我们应存在)、bhaveyyāma(我们应存在)。巴利
Eyyāmassemu vā hoti, u ca; bhavemu, bhaveyyāmu, bhaveyyāma.
以上是《目犍连语法》注疏的第六章,名为“Tyādikaṇḍa”(语基章)。巴利
Iti moggallāne vyākaraṇe vuttiyaṃ tyādikaṇḍo chaṭṭho.
这部《目犍连语法释论》共由六个品诵组成,至此圆满。巴利
Samattā cāyaṃ moggallānavutti chahi bhāṇavārehi.
赖彼王威德,已修习之心全然纷乱。
完全不为恶见者与恶比丘所扰乱;
于Laṅkā,牟尼王的教法善住。
Puṇṇavandasamāyogā〔由满月结合〕,vāridhīca〔海〕vivaddhate〔亦增长〕;
当那个以信、慧、功德而升起的 Parakkamabhuje,
作为 Manuvaṃsa 族旗帜之象征,统治 laṅkādīpaṃ;
由智者长老Māggallānena,为持净行者们,
所造此者,易解、无疑、不紊;
依止于胜者(jina)无余境界所遍的教说,
成就声论而无劳,增益智慧;
其注疏以简要方式,阐明广大义理
复由彼光大教法者所造。巴利
Yassa rañño pabhāvena bhāvitattasamākulaṃ, Anākulaṃ duladdhīhi pāpabhikkhūhi sabbaso; Laṅkāya munirājassa sāsanaṃ sādhu saṇṭhitaṃ, Puṇṇavandasamāyogā vāridhīca vivaddhate; Parakkamabhuje tasmiṃ saddhābuddhiguṇodite, Manuvaṃsaddhajākāre laṅkādīpaṃ pasāsati; Māggallānena therena dhīmatā sucivuttinaṃ, Racitaṃ yaṃ suviññeyyamasandiddhamanākulaṃ; Asesavisayavyāpi jinavyappathanissayaṃ, Saddasatthamanāyāsasādhiyaṃ buddhivaddhanaṃ; Tassa vutti samāsena vipulatthappakāsanī, Racitā puna teneva sāsanujjotakārināti;